加载中...
共找到 3,953 条相关资讯
Operator: Good afternoon, and welcome to the Polarean Imaging plc Investor Presentation. [Operator Instructions] Before we begin, I'd like to submit the following poll. I'd now like to hand you over to Christopher Von Jako, CEO. Good afternoon, sir. Christopher Von Jako: Thank you so much. I appreciate it. So hello. As mentioned, my name is Chris Von Jako. I'm the CEO of Polarean, and I'm joined today by our CFO, Chuck Osborne. So thank you for taking the time to be with us. I'll begin with an overview and some additional context on the RNS we released this morning. And after that, I'll walk through an updated presentation, both as a refresher for those familiar with Polarean and as an introduction for any new to the story. Finally, Chuck and I will take a number of questions at the end of the presentation. So before I begin, just as a reminder, these are the normal disclaimers. We are revolutionizing pulmonary medicine with our FDA-approved Xenon MRI platform. It is the only noninvasive radiation-free technology that shows the full picture of lung function. So usage is growing across our leading academic centers, both in clinical as well as research. And as you may know, our technology is available for use on all 3 major MRI vendors. So that includes Philips, GE and Siemens. Reimbursement is active, which is great for us, and clinical sites are billing and getting paid for Xenon MRI exams. In March, we announced a third revenue vertical in our pharma trial, which is in pharma trials, where we also signed our first multicenter trial, and we continue to build a growing pipeline with our partner, VIDA. And then lastly, on this slide, our platform is really backed by nearly about 1,000 publications and growing in more than about 200 clinical studies, providing strong scientific and clinical validation. So there's no question our first half revenue has been disappointing to both the market and our team. We did not close any new systems in the first half. Obviously, this morning, we announced a new order from the NIH, which was quite significant. But consumable usage continues to grow, which shows strong engagement from our customers already using the platform. At the same time, we faced real market headwinds, right? So the NIH funding cuts have reduced resources available to many of our academic customers, while new Medicaid reductions just put in recently in July are putting an additional pressure on hospital budgets. Together, these policy shifts have slowed capital purchases, particularly for new innovative technology like ours, and it's really lengthened the adoption cycles. We expect this uncertainty to continue into 2026 as academic centers reassess and reset their budgets. That said, we're, I think, doing a great job of managing our cash with discipline and are funded to operate through the second quarter of 2026. And importantly, I would say commercial momentum is building. Physicians see the value today in our technology. Gas exchange approval would be transformative in the future for us. And administrators today value both our existing reimbursement and new revenue opportunities that, that reimbursement brings. So with Alan Huang, who joined us a year ago, actually, leading sales, quotes are sharply up. I think we're over $21 million, which is about a 650% increase from year-over-year. And those quotes get to a point when we release those quotes are -- when we're kind of in that process with these centers. So that's really good to see. Our total addressable market continues to expand across our focus fronts. So in June, we announced our expanded pediatric approval, which basically broadened access to over 1 million more potential patients with our technology with a controlled market release that we have planned actually next month and then hopefully, our first patient in Cincinnati Children's shortly after that. So based on our long ongoing discussions that we've had with the FDA, we redesigned our pivotal Phase III trial for gas exchange, which we announced that cut the cost in half to about $4 million to $4.5 million, and we expect to finalize the gas exchange trial plans before the year-end. Internationally, we continue advancing our potential for our OUS expansion through dealer partnerships. We've had some nice progress with Taiwan and also elsewhere in the Asia Pacific. With Philips, we are advancing approval of our XENOVIEW Chest Coil on their 3T MRI systems. While the coil is already FDA cleared, this additional Philips process ensures seamless integration within their installed base, which is great. And what that really means in practical sense is that the coil is fully compatible for clinical use across their 3 Tesla machines. It's integrated into the software. It'd be recognized automatically and managed safely during the scanning process. In March, as I mentioned, we announced our first pharma collaboration and basically, the Xenon MRI platform is being included in a substudy of a global multicenter trial for investigation of a new lung therapy. That trial is set to begin early next year. And as I mentioned earlier, obviously, our pharma pipeline continues to grow. And that first one that we announced really helps from a foundational standpoint. And finally, scientific momentum remains strong at this past year's American Thoracic Society Annual Meeting, which was held, I believe, in May. That is the leading global conference for pulmonary medicine. There were more than 30 Xenon MRI presentations across a range of indications. What was great is our Founder and Chief Scientific Officer, Professor Bastiaan Driehuys, was honored with a really special award there recognizing his pioneering work of bringing Xenon MRI from the benchtop to the patient. Also the International Society for Magnetic Resonance in Medicine, that's the premier global annual MRI conference that happens, that was in May as well. So Xenon was prominently featured there, including 2 presentations that I personally delivered, which was great. So it really is bringing up the overall presence and knowledge of the technology. And then obviously, we've had a number of really great new publications that validate the platform, including important new studies in lung cancer. I kind of touched on those in my presentation, both from a surgical planning perspective as well as in guiding radiation therapy for lung cancer. And I think that really underscores the growing recognition of Xenon MRI's clinical values, particularly in those areas with cancer. For 2025, given the headwinds that proved greater than we anticipated, we did announce that we're revising our revenue guidance down to $2.5 million to $3.5 million, which is down from our prior $5 million to $6 million. This obviously follows a very strong 2024, where we exceeded our guidance, but we continue to build a really good pipeline. That said, our backlog remains healthy. Prior to our announcement this morning with the NIH, which increased it significantly, it was at $1.2 million that was on orders that we had or stuff that we had delivered since June 30. So looking ahead, we expect to return next year or the following year to the $5 million to $6 million revenue trajectory as we expect market conditions to improve as hospitals continue to adjust with the news that they've had over the last several months, which really I think if I look at it in any way, it was just the uncertainty that has been there. That uncertainty is kind of coming away now, and they can now reassess on that. Importantly, from a profitability standpoint, we continue to see a clear path following the gas exchange approval, and we expect we can achieve that with about $20 million in incremental investment. Throughout, we continue to remain focused on executing our 5-pillar strategy. And as it says here, right, obviously, driving utilization, which we continue to do at both our clinical sites as well as our research sites. We want to grow our customer base. We want to strengthen our reimbursement, expand our total addressable market and continue to advance our partnerships that we have. So turning to the regular presentation. Our mission is to revolutionize pulmonary medicine. We talk about that, obviously, with this vision to optimize lung health and prevent avoidable loss by illuminating hidden disease. Our employees are united by this purpose, and our focus is always on the patients, delivering truly, I would say, breathtaking images that help clinicians detect disease earlier, guide treatment decisions and monitor outcomes over time. So lung cancer is the #1 cancer killer worldwide and over 500 million people suffer from chronic lung disease, yet we still rely on outdated tools. You can see here, if you want to look from an imaging perspective, you have X-ray and CT. They use radiation and only show anatomical structure. And then on the far right there, you can see me doing spirometry. That is obviously the standard for lung function today, but has its major limits. It gives no images and provides a very variable, nonpersonalized and insensitive measure. The lungs have 2 jobs. The first thing that they do is they ventilate. You can see that on the left-hand side, that was move air in and out. The second thing they do is oxygen crosses a thin membrane, a very thin membrane into the blood and the carbon dioxide moves out and is exhaled out of the body. But that deep region that's there is the silent zone. It's hidden from current test, yet it's where many diseases begin. And if you miss the silent zone, you miss that disease until it's too late. I tend to do this with investors just to think about structure and function and what the differences are. If you think about structure, it's like a road map. Here in San Francisco with the roads and the bridges, but there's no traffic. So if you add the traffic in, this is function. It shows what's moving freely and where the traffic jams are. CT works in the very same way. It shows the big structures, the major airways, but it can't see the silent zone where function matters most. And there -- if there's a traffic jam there, oxygen never reaches its destination. So how do we see the silent zone? Well, that's where Xenon MRI comes in. For the first time, we can apply the power and safety of MRI directly to the lungs. What you see is our ventilation scan is FDA approved, it's reimbursed, say, for patients now as young as 6. It occurs in a single 10-second breathhold. This is true 3D view of lung function. The Xenon gas acts as a safe surrogate for oxygen showing exactly where the lungs are working. What you can see here up in that left-hand side is where it's not working. So there's a blockage in the silent zone there, which is visible to other tools. And the gas clears completely from the body in seconds, making Xenon MRI safe, reliable and practical. So here's sort of a standard setup for Xenon MRI. If you look at the far left, the lungs are mostly filled with air. So you only see the outer boundary. So we take that first 10-second image of what we call a proton image or a structural image there. And in that second image, we add Xenon. So now you could see the function or where the ventilation is happening. But then you overlay the 2 together in that third image and you could see where the lungs work and where they're not. And that last image there is our software that really generates the quantitative maps turning the guesswork into clear insight. So this is the silent zone. This is where gas exchange happens. Oxygen, as I mentioned, crosses that thin membrane. It's actually 1 micron, which is invisible to the eye. And when it crosses that membrane, it goes into the red blood cells. But Xenon, as I mentioned, follows the same path. The breakthrough is that it resonates at a different frequency, whether it's in the air space, the membrane or the blood, letting us image all 3 compartments in that 10 seconds. But as we know, the bottom 2 there, I'm showing now a healthy patient, and you're seeing the healthy patient in the airspace, the membrane and the red blood cells. And we have our FDA approval for that top, which is looking at the airspace itself or what we call ventilation. So in a healthy subject, the flow is smooth. Everything is green. In like an airway disease like COPD or asthma, the traffic jam is in the airways. So air flow is blocked, which is shown there in the top image in the red and yellow. In a patient that has tissue disease like pulmonary fibrosis, the jam is in the membranes, that traffic jam. So that's where the oxygen or -- and in this case, also the Xenon is getting trapped. It thickens in that 1 micron membrane that's invisible to everything else. So it's really trapping the xenon and oxygen in there, which is shown in pink on the image. In pulmonary hypertension, which is a vascular disease, the traffic jam is in the vessels. So transfer to the blood is impaired in some way, could be injury. But here, you can see that in the red and yellow. So Xenon MRI uniquely images this gas exchange revealing where the blockage is and why patients can't breathe. Remember, there's some reason where oxygen, when you're inhaling it, and it doesn't get to the blood, that's where patients get breathless. So the unmet need is massive. We know this. We've been talking about this for a while, whether it's across airway disease, tissue disease and vascular disease as well as cancer. And early function loss in the silent zone is that common thread. So with Xenon MRI, as I mentioned before, we can finally see it. We can detect that disease earlier. We can guide therapy and surgery and radiation therapy. We can monitor progression, and we can even predict outcomes. So I'm going to give a couple of examples here. I'm going to start with unexplained breathlessness, then I'll move to cancer, and then I'll also talk about tissue disease, in this case, pulmonary fibrosis. So unexplained breathlessness affects nearly 10 million Americans and the standard tests really fail to explain what the issue is. They don't know whether it is a heart issue, whether it's a lung issue, a combination of those. The patient is just out of shape or maybe they're having some sort of mental health issue. So in this case, at one of our sites, a man presented with difficulty breathing. His chest x-ray, which is the first thing they did look at, is normal. The second thing they have moved to is a CT scan. This also looked normal. Then they would move to doing a functional test, in this case, spirometry, where you can see that 82% is what the patient had, which is on the lower end of normal, but it's still normal. Months later, they ended up sending the patient home, probably giving him an inhaler, but months later, he returned with worsened symptoms. They end up doing another spirometry, which is essentially about the same at 78%. So 2 basically almost normal -- basically normal spirometry settings. But this center actually had our technology and Xenon MRI really revealed large regions with no airflow going to it, which really helped to understand what was going on with this patient. Further, they used those images to help target a biopsy and really give a diagnosis. And I think this is really kind of shows the super power of Xenon MRIs, particularly in ventilation here, revealing what other tests really did not show and what they missed. So looking at the potential in cancer, I think we already addressed earlier that cancer is bad, especially in the lungs. I think worldwide, it's over 1 million patients. But in the United States, and some other countries are doing this as well, they're doing -- they're eligible for lung screening. In the U.S., over 14 million people are eligible for lung screening. But unfortunately, about 10% are screened, but even when CT, you can see a CT here and you can actually see the needle going towards the tumor there. But even when they find this tumor, it doesn't show lung function. So CT can't show and can't tell if this patient is healthy enough for surgery or if the patient should have radiation therapy, for example. And that's really where Xenon MRI comes in for these patients with lung cancer. In surgery, it can guide how much lung can be removed. It can actually also predict postoperative function. There was a really important paper that was recently published that showed this in over 100 patients that were done at one of our sites. And it can actually even anticipate the complications from a postsurgical lung surgery. In radiation therapy, it shows which regions can be spared, really enabling safer and more effective treatments. And Xenon MRI really kind of provides the missing functional insight for lung cancer, making the cancer care even better. So even more exciting is looking at lung tissue diseases. And this is where all the excitement around really getting the gas exchange approval is. About 7% of people actually getting lung screens show early abnormalities. And they really don't know what's happening with these patients. They really kind of don't know which ones will progress to fibrosis and which ones won't. And most of these patients actually fall into the gray zone. So it's a big problem today to know whether they are progressing or whether they're not progressing. Xenon MRI changes that. You can see on the CT, this patient appears normal. There's actually -- it's an older patient, but appears normal in general. But Xenon MRI shows in that pink membrane area, basically shows that thickening, signaling that there's higher risk here for this patient and really heading towards fibrosis. It also allows us to track therapy. Before here, this image is antifibrotics. You can see the widespread pink there. This is a lot of the work that's been done by Duke and really exciting a lot of people from a clinician standpoint as well as a lot of these pharma companies that are focused on bringing up more and more new antifibrotic therapies. But what you see a couple of months later, the green shows the progression has slowed. So CT really is the problem here. I don't actually have the image here, but basically, by the time you see the fibrosis on a CT image is too late. And Xenon MRI really acts earlier, really identifying the risk and guiding that therapy. So this is our drug device platform. It's built on a per patient consumable. It's a real what we call a true razor-razor blade model. It starts with the Xenon cylinder, which you could see on the left there, serving about -- roughly about 100 patients. And then each single-use dose bag is filled with the Xenon gas. But first, it has to go through a hypopolarizer, which makes it visible on MRI. And then it's measured for accuracy. And then, of course, it's delivered into the MRI suite. And then we have our chest coil, which we have actually 4 different versions of our chest coil. They're all FDA cleared, working on both GE -- or not both, but GE, Siemens and Philips. So we capture the detailed images using that chest coil. And then we move those images into our AI software, which integrates the images, providing an automated quantitative analysis. So as mentioned, obviously, many times before, our platform is really protected by over 20 patents, which are great. And each one of those patents actually go out at least another decade plus. And then, of course, while we are MR vendor agnostic, we have a co-marketing relationship partnership with Philips, which has been very, very beneficial to us. So reimbursement is in place and just with 3 scans really covers the system. And I think that's a huge value proposition that we've seen with the potential customers that we've been talking to. And we generate our revenue, whether it's from a system sale, the recurring consumables that we have and service as well as with our third vertical, which is the global pharma partnerships. So I would say that we have really kind of proved out the model. We have a number of systems in place across sites in both the U.S. and Europe. I did not add the NIH yet. So it's not just a vision. This is something that's working today. I did want to just kind of show one example sort of the way the payment schedule does work. So we established this new code, which pays about roughly half of that $2,500 the sites would receive getting for it. So it's a brand-new code. But also as important, we have these other 2 or 3 codes that are already existing procedural codes. And it's great that our centers are receiving reimbursement for all of those codes, in some cases, actually getting higher than the $2,500. We tend to say this quite a bit when we're talking to centers as well. When they're looking for a new revenue, if you're doing just an MRI on a patient's brain, the revenue that they can recognize a hospital from that is about $300. So you can see it's almost 10x more that they can recognize from doing a Polarean image. So as I mentioned a number of times, in March, we did announce that Polarean expanded into our pharma-sponsored trials, really creating this third revenue cycle. Our partnership with VIDA really enables us to scale our imaging service platform and Xenon MRI offers a very sensitive noninvasive biomarker that can really reduce sample sizes and accelerate drug development time lines. And then we saw -- obviously, we also mentioned this that a leading pharmaceutical company did select our service platform for this multicenter trial. And as I also mentioned as well, we're really excited about getting that trial up and running. There's been a lot of work over the last several months between us, VIDA and this really very large pharmaceutical company. So we're obviously also aiming to add additional other pharma companies into the trial. But we really see that this service model really builds a network of Xenon MRI-enabled sites, and it allows us to really accelerate pharma adoption and creates a durable competitive advantage for Polarean. So with that being said, let me just turn it over to Chuck, and I'll have him just go through sort of our first slide around financials. So Chuck? Charles Osborne: Great. Thank you, Chris. Yes. As Chris mentioned, although we faced some U.S. headwinds based on the government funding, we are seeing signs of early traction. Our consumable growth was 36% for the first half of '25 versus '24. As we said with the financing in the previous June, we -- the money is to drive commercialization, and we have been investing in our commercialization and doing it in a very disciplined way, trying to save money in other areas to make sure we can fund a nice aggressive commercialization strategy. We finished June with about $7.3 million in cash, and we continue to have no debt on the balance sheet, and this does fund the company through Q2 of next year. We have our 2 big strategic partners, Bracco and NUKEM, who are very supportive of the company, not just financially, but also commercially and strategically. They've been huge supporters of the company. And then as Chris talked about our updated revenue guidance, we're going to do somewhere between $2.5 million and $3.5 million in 2025. And then we believe we'll be back on the growth trajectory for 2026 and do somewhere between $5 million and $6 million. Christopher Von Jako: Okay. Great. So I always do like to put up the team. We have a proven leadership with this team. They have decades of experience in imaging and commercialization, which is great. And we're really pushing with this team forward on a number of different areas that we've spoken about, really kind of focused on those 5 pillars that we speak about all the time. So I think the story is very much still the same. The unmet need is really immense. And I think that we really do have exclusive intellectual property and the right capabilities to continue to move this technology forward as we continue to work in the research end and continue to move towards the clinical end and adoption of the clinical side. Clinicians, I can't say this so much more, but clinicians really see the clear patient impact. They really do. They understand it. Every person that we present the technology to understands exactly that impact. But unfortunately, the headwinds that we've had, even with a great reimbursement in place, has really put us in a tough position. We had a -- we really anticipated a number of orders by now. Some of these centers that we've been working with, because of these headwinds that they've had, in particular, unfortunately, have had to make lots of changes on their side. In some cases, some of these centers we've been working with, have let hundreds of employees off, which is obviously a really tough shape. So it's really kind of put us on the back burner in some of these centers that we were hoping to progress with. But when they're letting not tens of employees off but hundreds of employees off, in some cases, more than 600 employees at one academic medical center that we were talking about, really makes it hard. But we are very lucky to have a very strong reimbursement in place, and our centers have really enjoyed kind of getting that in place, and we've been working with a number of other centers and making sure that, that reimbursement is going to continue to flourish. Our partnerships with med tech and pharma are expanding as we talk about, the work that we've been doing with Philips, but not only with Philips, also with Siemens and with GE has been really important. And as Chuck mentioned earlier, the work that we've been doing with Bracco and with NUKEM have been really important. And then just very excited about what we're doing from a pharma perspective. The pharma perspective not only does things from a -- brings that third vertical from a revenue standpoint, but really gives us great credibility in looking at what we're doing from a drug development side. It's also good for our story on the commercialization side because from a pharma perspective, when these academic medical centers love to do these trials, and it brings an additional revenue for them to do these trials. And in the end, this is really precision medicine for lung health. And our technology is really showing things that other technologies can't, and that's really the basis behind it. So as I mentioned maybe before, I've had one of the Xenon MRIs myself. I was on the table there for about 3 minutes in and out, got it very healthy. In this case, I'm just showing my ventilation images, but I did do a gas exchange as well, which was good. So I was a healthy test. But I would say we want to right now take the time and conclude the presentation and invite you to ask some questions. So maybe I'll stop there. Lilly? Operator: [Operator Instructions] As you can see, we received a number of questions throughout today's presentation. Can I please ask you to read out the questions and give responses where appropriate to do so, and I'll pick up from you at the end. Christopher Von Jako: All right. Thanks, Lilly. I appreciate it. So just looking at the questions here. So Chuck, I'm probably going to ask you to answer some of these too, if they're appropriate. So what factors do you think are driving the 36% increase in consumable sales? And how can you see this growth momentum being sustained or accelerated? Okay. So obviously, the awareness of Xenon scanning is increasing, I think, obviously, in the medical and scientific community. And we are selling consumables, as I probably have mentioned, both to our clinical side as well as our research side. And this is obviously driving an increase in total consumable sales for us, which is great. And we want to continue to do this as we continue to expand the sites and continue to work on that. So I think that's great. We have seen a steady increase in research imaging as well. And also, there have been some notable grants that were just awarded to a number of our sites. So we'll see that continue to steadily increase. And I think I'm hoping some of the work that's been happening at the NIH will kind of smoothen up and some additional grants will be received there. But I think that work is continuing. All right. So let's see the next one. Given the challenges and restrictions in the U.S. capital equipment sales, how do you see the balance between consumables and systems evolving over the next 12 to 18 months? So maybe Chuck, do you want to take that one? Charles Osborne: Yes, I'll take that one. As we've said all along, in the early days, our sales will be largely capital sales. And as for the next 18 months, we see that being a majority of our sales until we increase our polarizer footprint and the number of scans at each site increases. In the later years, when we have this larger footprint and scans are happening more frequently at the sites, our gas sales will be higher than our capital sales. But for the next 18 months or so, we are still predominantly capital sales focused. Christopher Von Jako: Okay. What milestones are you targeting within your existing runway to demonstrate progress and increase further growth? So I think August, I mentioned this a number of time. Our focus really remains on driving utilization. I think we're doing a lot of things on doing that. We have a team that's just dedicated on driving that utilization. We're visiting our centers, both our research centers as well as our clinical centers on really an ongoing basis to do that. The other thing, obviously, is growing the user base. That is going to be really important. I was really excited to announce the NIH order this morning. We had hoped -- it had actually come in before this call. We'd hoped, obviously, a number of orders had come in before this call, but it was really nice to wake up this morning to actually see that e-mail and then put that announcement out as soon as we were able to do that. So pretty excited about that. But we'll look to obviously continue to grow the user base. The third thing is broadening reimbursement. So we're doing a lot of things around broadening reimbursement. And as I've talked about in the past, obviously, Medicare is the governmental insurance for patients that -- sorry, for people that are 65 and older and happen to be patients. So that is basically a guaranteed reimbursement that's there if they want to get an image. And then people that are younger in that age group below 65, it really comes down to private insurance. So we've been working particularly with, say, Cincinnati Children's because their patient population, obviously, is younger than 65. Now some people that are younger than 65 actually qualify for Medicare as well, depending on the type of illness that they have. but they have been getting private insurance reimbursement, which is great. And as we expand and look into looking at gas exchange, we're looking at actually increasing the reimbursement that we have for gas exchange as well because there are some different constraints when they're doing a gas exchange. So we're still trying to broaden that reimbursement. It's a real focus for us. Obviously, the fourth thing is expanding our total addressable market. We talked about pediatric. We talked about international. Maybe just a little bit about international. We're making some great progress with our Taiwanese distributor. We've had a number of calls with other potential distributors as well. In fact, we have one tonight. And I was -- about a month ago, I was in China as well and really looking at that market and opening up that market. It's the largest growing area for MRI sales. So we were there meeting with a number of potential customers. I happened to actually join the annual MRI -- the Chinese annual MRI meeting while I was there. So there is some good work going on there. But obviously, one of the big focuses is gas exchange. And so pretty excited about sort of the work that we've done there with the FDA and hoping to finalize our protocol by the end of the year. And the last thing is really developing those partnerships. And I think I've obviously mentioned that quite a bit. But obviously, we want to make progress in all of these areas. And our current cash flow, obviously, as Chuck mentioned, brings us through Q2 2026. So let's see. How do you see your expanded collaborations with Philips influence adoption and credibility among clinicians and hospitals? So obviously, our relationship with Philips really allows us to expand our reach, which is great because we have other voices out there talking about our technology. We've not only done this with Philips, we've done this with Siemens and with GE as well, getting their salespeople to talk about our technology, not only in the U.S. but outside the U.S. I actually had the opportunity when I was in China also to visit with Philips there and jointly to visit a number of customers while we were there. I actually brought a joint customer of ours from the Cincinnati Children's with me to China to make some specific presentations. Let's see the next one here. Could the Philips and VIDA Diagnostics collaborations open doors to further deals with pharma and device companies? I think, obviously, the answer is yes to that. But both Philips obviously, is broadening our exposure that I just mentioned. And VIDA, in particular, they're working directly with pharma companies. Their focus is mainly they're a CRO for CT. And together, uniting us together with them brings the MRI component into it and really allows us to kind of grow that area from a pharma perspective. So I think the answer is good on that. Well done on securing distribution deal with Sumtage, thank you, in Taiwan. How do you see the balance between the U.S. market and selective international expansion evolving? I think, obviously, I've said it a number of times, we spent quite a bit of money getting our FDA approval and also our reimbursement in the United States. It's really been our primary focus. I got very comfortable last year with our technology as we had it out in the field, which allowed me to kind of think about sort of outside the United States. And I think, as I mentioned, we're looking for like-minded potential partners like distributors like Sumtage, will give us opportunities in select markets. Those select markets, I'd like, in particular, have looked at the Asia Pacific market because there, reimbursement in certain places becomes less of an issue. And so places like Taiwan, like China, like, say, Korea, India, for example, really can open it up. And I think it was probably a good time for us to do that, obviously, with sort of the big headwinds that obviously that we saw in the U.S. marketplace that was happening as well. So how do you expect the expanded pediatric indication to impact adoption and revenue growth in the near term? Obviously, the expansion of the label down to 6 that we announced, I think, in the beginning of June when we announced it, really, as I mentioned even in the presentation, opens up a market by about another 1 million patients. If you think about it, when we -- in the United States, there are dedicated pediatric hospitals, and we've been focusing on about 20 to 30 of these pediatric hospitals here in the U.S. They were only able to image about 1/3 of their population because these pediatric hospitals only treat from infant up to 18 years old. So they were only looking at the 12 to 18. Now we know Cincinnati Children's is also doing adult patients. In fact, they did one yesterday. Across the street, they have the University of Cincinnati, which is an adult hospital, and they've been sending patients over there from the adult hospital. So they've been doing that as well. But they've only been looking at sort of in their core area from the 12 to 6. So opening it up from 6 up to 11 obviously opens up another 2/3. And it becomes really obviously compelling for a number of the other pediatric hospitals that we've been talking to, which I think is -- which is the more important thing. So we're pretty excited about that, not only the work they've been doing at Cincinnati Children's, but also the fact that they've been able to get reimbursement on those pediatric patients, which is really important. The reduced cost for gas exchange indication following your FDA meeting looks very positive. I certainly agree. How does this accelerate your path to broader label expansion? So we are going through this one last step with the FDA. We did -- I think we put an RNS out, I think, in August. And we talked about, in essence, that we put our protocol in. We're waiting to get some feedback around the protocol. And I'm hoping if all goes well, we'll be able to finalize that protocol before the end of the year. I know that when we talk to clinicians, they are most excited, obviously, about gas exchange because it's really showing them the complete picture of lung function, which is really what people want to see. We haven't really even gotten to the depth. It gets a little bit more clinical here, but on some of the things that we can do around the cardiopulmonary side. But some of that work has been advancing really, really nicely at Duke. But I think what we've seen as we've been able to derisk the study and have really nice conversations with the FDA is that we've seen that we've reduced the size of the trial, really the subject size of the trial, which can hopefully help us, obviously, which is reducing the dollar amount, which can also hopefully potentially reducing the time to conduct the trial and then analyze the data. So hopefully, as we get through this last part with the FDA, we can get a little bit more transparent about where we think the trial will be. But we are really excited about where that is going. Are there particular pulmonary diseases or patient populations where, it's perfect segue, I guess, where you expect gas exchange imaging to have the biggest impact? So gas exchange, as I mentioned, obviously, is giving the complete picture. So it actually affects all 5 of those areas that I talked about. Probably the least on is airway disease, but it's also still nice to know in those airway disease patients, whether they're having issues, both in their membrane, that very thin membrane as well as in the capillaries around the lungs and understanding whether the oxygen is transferring over into the blood or maybe there's no blood there. So I think that, that's really important. I think that it's obviously extremely valuable in unexplained breathlessness to really understand so where that oxygen is getting hung up in any of those 3 compartments. Pulmonary fibrosis is something I'm really keyed into. I've mentioned a number of times this coming November, my father passed away about 10 years ago from pulmonary fibrosis. And I think this is so key in understanding this disease early because sometimes they don't understand it. Someone is having unexplained breathlessness as my dad did, and they're not seeing it on CT. So the ability to actually see the membrane, understand what's going on there, getting them on therapy earlier, really preventing what's going on there is really important. And then the ability from a drug development side, really understanding what's happening in that membrane. And then obviously, any of the pulmonary vascular diseases like pulmonary hypertension will be really important as well. And I think that we are just sort of scratching the surface right now there. This is something that currently no other technology can interrogate is that really that capillary structure around the lungs and trying to understand what's happening there, why the oxygen is not getting in or whether it is or isn't getting into that area, but also using this to understand where the pulmonary hypertension is coming from. There are essentially 5 different stages of pulmonary -- or 5 different versions of pulmonary hypertension and some of those involve really invasive steps in order to make a diagnosis. And this is a very noninvasive way of doing this. And some of the work that they've been doing at Duke and other places are going to be really, really important as we continue to progress and move this forward. And I'm hoping actually in the next -- there actually was a nice new publication by Duke a couple of months back, particularly in this area around pulmonary hypertension, but there's a lot of focus there. And this is where the cardiologists are also getting involved, which is nice. And we've had a lot of good, great discussions with the folks at Duke and the cardiology department, which has been great and really see this as a game-changing technology. So how do you plan to address the challenges that were prompted the lower 2025 revenue guidance? Obviously, the headwinds that we saw by the policy changes within the U.S. government have really affected us as well as other companies. I was just in London a few weeks ago at a meeting where I was talking to a number of CEOs from other companies that were also very affected by this. So it's not only a Polarean thing. It's happening to a number of companies. But I would say that it's innovative companies like us that are really probably feeling the headwinds in this market. But we hope, obviously, that hospitals are going to begin to adapt, and we already see this happening and finding creative ways to purchase the equipment. We do offer a number of interesting and creative ways to do this. And we're working with our customers to kind of fit in their new funding constraints. It was really nice to see the NIH spend some money today, obviously, with the order that we had. So hopefully, that's a good sign that the NIH is kind of going to be moving in the right direction from that perspective. How long does your current cash runway last? I think we did explain that before, but -- and do you need to raise capital soon? So Chuck, do you maybe want to just address that again? It's another question that we got in. Charles Osborne: Yes, happy to do so. Yes, as we said, our current June 30 cash of $7.3 million safely funds the company through Q2 of 2026. And so we will have to fund the company at some time in the future. We're trying to time it so that we have some good commercial traction and can finance from a position of strength. We are actively managing our costs and with the reductions of cost of the gas change clinical trial, we believe we can get to profitability post gas change approval with somewhere around or a little bit less than $20 million. Christopher Von Jako: Right. Thanks, Chuck. When do you anticipate starting the gas exchange trial? I think as I mentioned already before, we expect to have that protocol finalized by the end of the year. But more importantly, obviously, is making sure that we have the financing secured before we start that trial. I mean I think that's going to be the end step. I think as I started 2 years ago, we've been working to ensure that everything is in place to start this trial. And that, obviously, the biggest hurdle has been around the FDA, but we had to do things both internally from a product standpoint to make sure that the product is ready to start that trial. I think some of that has been around the software, which, in general, I think, has worked out quite nicely for us because the pharma trial that we're going to be starting has also kind of helped us move in that right direction as that pharma trial will be looking at gas exchange as well. And I think that this is a perfect segue has kind of led us to that place. So again, I think the big thing for us right now is getting the protocol finalized and then obviously securing the financing. How long does your cash runway last? Did we already answer that? That was -- that's another one. How significant is the pharma services model and when could it contribute to revenue? So it is a third revenue source for us, and we are providing a service to these pharma companies. And what it is doing is we are actually analyzing the imaging, right? And we're charging a service to be able to do that. And the other part, obviously, is that our customers will be doing patients as part of this. They'll be buying gas to do the patients. So it's really that kind of twofold from a revenue standpoint. But I think the more important thing is that working with VIDA, I think we've built a scalable imaging service platform to do these multicenter trials. So -- and this partnership basically allows us, as I mentioned before, give us that service component as well as the consumable sales. And I think, obviously, really positions us as a future biomarker in drug development, which I think is a market with really long-term growth potential. So I think that those are really good. Let's see. I think there's a few more here, Chuck. I'll read this one. I'm not sure we can answer this one, Chuck, but I'll give it to you. Have Bracco and NUKEM confirmed they will continue to support the company? Charles Osborne: Obviously, we haven't launched a financing, and so we have not gone out and solicited investment from anybody. But Bracco and NUKEM, as I said during the presentation, have been very supportive in all of our previous financing. They're very supportive in helping us commercialize the product and thinking about our strategy. So they're very supportive partners. Christopher Von Jako: Okay. How long will the gas exchange trials take? What is the expected FDA response time once the trials are submitted? What is the total length of time from start to receipt of the FDA response? So we did send in a formal request on our trial proposal. We do expect sometime this quarter, we'll get a response. Depending on what their response is, we may have to shift our protocol a bit. And hopefully, we'll get that finalized. Once we do that, we'll submit a final protocol to the FDA. We don't actually need to get a response from them. We won't ask for a response next time. We don't need to get a response for them. So we're actually kind of free to start the trial once we submit the final protocol to them. So that's good. So how long does the gas exchange trial take? I think it's too early to say that. But I think in general, what we have talked about, once we formally start the trial, we think it's about a 2-year process, which is enrolling the patients, analyzing the data and then submitting to the FDA and then getting a response from the FDA. So we believe it's about a 2-year process. Knowing their responses to our last submission will kind of give us a real key indication of really how many patients we're going to have to do, and that will kind of be dictated from that. Let's see. When do you think the uncertainty about NIH funding cuts/indirect cost cap will be resolved. Congress has indicated it does not support the proposed cuts. I think the bigger thing, it's really hard to kind of understand that. I think what we did see recently is that the NIH did open up and wanted the funds that they had approved before to be spent before the end of September. Luckily, that happened. That actually opened up the trigger for our NIH order that we got today. So I think that was a good thing. It's really hard to understand because the NIH is one component of it, but really, it's also the Medicare or the Medicaid cuts from the Big Beautiful Bill that was announced in July and just looking at hospital budgets to kind of rethink up and where they're at. So it's really hard to -- and different hospitals are going to deal with it in different ways. As I mentioned, several hospitals that we've been working with, that we were hoping to get closer with, have had huge layoffs. And it's really hard to really be trying to sell a brand-new innovative piece of capital equipment into these centers when they're announcing 500 layoffs plus at these academic medical centers. So I think we do get indications from some sites that it is easing up from some centers, but I think time will tell. I think the bigger thing is the uncertainty is the thing that's really kind of pushing things out. So as things become a little bit more certain, I think we'll be able to tell better from that perspective. With the U.S. market in tough spot, what are the prospects for other markets like the U.K., Europe and Asia? I think I mentioned this before. I think the prospect for us is, that we've been looking at is, really sort of the Asia market and sort of the work that we've been doing around Asia. I think we're just getting started there. But I think there are potentially some good prospects that are there. I think in general, we may have some potential in the U.K., but in Europe becomes very difficult if we're thinking from a reimbursement standpoint. I think in Europe, it really is focused more on the research perspective than it is focused on trying to bring somebody clinical, where in Asia, the reimbursement is less of an issue sort of in that -- in particular regions. So we will continue to kind of explore those areas. Chuck, maybe we could just take a few more. I think we try to answer as many as we can. Charles Osborne: I think this one that says, that you could answer, Chris, do the big MRI manufacturers continue to believe that this technology has an important future? Christopher Von Jako: Yes. What a great question. I think over the last 6 months, I felt that this has increased more and more that the big MRI companies are really focused on it. We know Philips has. I've spent a lot of time with Philips over the last couple of years and even more so in the last couple of months, having been actually over visiting with Philips a few months back, visiting some customers with them actually in the Netherlands as well, some of their big key customers. So I think that the more they hear from it and hearing actually from one of the CEOs of the MRI divisions of one of these companies is they're hearing more and more around Xenon. In fact, even in China, the guidance change for lung imaging in June in China, where they actually added Xenon as a perspective in China using MRI Xenon or Xenon MRI as a potential looking at lung function. So I think that was very big as well. So it says, will the Medicare cuts adversely impact availability of reimbursement. So it's actually Medicaid cuts, not Medicare cuts. No, I don't think that's the case. And I can say no, certainly, it's not going to be the case from a reimbursement perspective. So it was Medicaid cuts that were done. These were basically money that's given to states and then they're dolled out from each one of the states to the hospitals, these large academic medical centers. So that shouldn't -- that won't have any change on what we're doing there. So on average, how many scans per week? How many scans per week, I think it is, are you seeing in your installed base? So I think we had been trying to get to about 3 -- an average about 3. It's really hard for us to actually see that unless we're talking continuous to our sites, which we are. But from a week-to-week basis, we can't see that. We can see sort of the usage when they're ordering images from us. But I know like from a Cincinnati perspective, they're doing somewhere on the order of about 5 patients when they're looking at research. And I know at least this week, I know they're doing 3 patients this week. They're doing 2 today, I believe. And some of our centers are doing a lot when it comes to research. I think Duke is doing anywhere between 5 to 7 patients a week. So I think there's quite a bit happening from that perspective. But the real thing for us is looking at when we get orders to date from our customers. We have no way of really telling today. We are putting some things in place with our technology in the future where we'll be able to actually see what the utilization is on a per week basis, but we don't have that currently in our technology. So Chuck, with that, I think we're about 5 minutes past. Maybe we should thank everybody for joining and really value the questions that we received today and for following our story, and we're continuing to move forward. So thank you very much, everybody. Operator: Christopher, Charles, thank you for updating investors today. Can I please ask investors not to close this session as you'll now be automatically redirected to provide your feedback in order that the management team can better understand your views and expectations. This may take a few moments to complete, and I'm sure will be greatly valued by the company. On behalf of the management team of Polarean Imaging Group plc, we'd like to thank you for attending today's presentation, and good afternoon.
Operator: Greetings, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the WISeKey International Holdings 2025 Interim Financial Results Earnings Conference Call. As a reminder, this conference call contains forward-looking statements. Such statements involve certain known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, which could cause actual results, financial condition, performance or achievements of WISeKey International Holding Limited to be materially different from any future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. WISeKey is providing this communication as of this date and does not undertake to update any forward-looking statements contained herein as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. [Operator Instructions]. As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce Carlos Moreira, Founder and Chief Executive Officer of WISeKey. Mr. Moreira, you may begin. Carlos Moreira: Good afternoon to all of you joining us from Europe and the United States. I am joined today by our Chief Financial Officer, Mr. John O'Hara. And I'll start this call by providing highlights on the company performance and also on the subsidiary level initiatives for the first half of 2025. I will disclose the growth opportunities since the beginning of 2025. And moving forward, and then John will provide commentaries on our financial conditions in greater detail. Then we will open the floor to Q&A. I would like to provide now a short overview of the corporate structure. So WISeKey is a Swiss cybersecurity company created in 1999, which I am the founder. As a computer infrastructure provider, WISeKey delivers secure platforms for data and device management across various industries, including finance, health care and government, leveraging its route of trust technology and public infrastructure PKI. WISeKey is expanding its legacy technology into the quantum realm, building on the case of expertise in securing digital identities and enabled trusted communities, WISeKey continues to safeguard traditional encrypted communications and provide strong authentication services to governments, enterprises and consumer worldwide. At the same time, WISeKey is pioneering the transition toward the next generation of security through the post-quantum cryptography, what we call PQC. This dual approach ensures that existing infrastructures remain protected today while preparing them for a future where quantum computers will challenge conventional cryptographic standard, it is being projected and this will happen in 2030. So we have only a few years to get ready. By integrating PQC into semiconductors, IoT and digital identity solutions, WISeKey is setting the foundation for a quantum resilient digital ecosystem, ensuring continuity of trust and privacy in the post-quantum era. So WISeKey operates also as a holding company, encompassing several specialized operational subsidiaries, each subsidiary plays a crucial role in the WISeKey ecosystem contributing through independent research and development and expertise while integrating their technology into the overall WISeKey platform. This businesses are no longer operating as a separate businesses, but as a single interconnected ecosystem, what we call the convergent effect. Specifically, these companies are SEALSQ, which is well known now as it is a listed company on the NASDAQ under the symbol LAES, which focus on advanced semiconductor technology and it's coming with a world first in November of a post-quantum chip. WISeID, which offers Root of Trust and PKI services central to the WISeKey digital identity and encryption services and ecosystem. WISeSaT, a newcomer also in the last year, which offers space technology using and developing and securing picosatellite for secure communications from the space. We also have WISe.ART, it's the trusted blockchain and NFT segment, offering secure digital asset solution. And lastly, we have SEALCOIN AG, which is incorporated -- which was incorporated in 2024 and is developing the SEALCOIN platform and is focusing on a decentralized physical Internet with a soon-to-come token with name QAIT. In regard to the first half of 2025 has been a decisive step forward in the execution of WISeKey Quantum convergence strategy. So the WISeKey Quantum convergence strategy launched last year has the combining existency of combining different assets like proven identity, security methods with emerging quantum safe technologies to ensure a smooth transition into the post-quantum era. It maintains the protection of current infrastructure while -- sorry, classical cryptographic capabilities while progressing, integrating post-quantum cryptography, what I call PQC and quantum resilient algorithm. This strategy relies on a hybrid model, where traditional and quantum safe algorithms work together, guaranteeing backward compatibility with avoiding disruption. By applying this convergence across semiconductor, IoT, satellite, digital identities and blockchain network, it ensures that the trust and privacy remains intact. As quantum computers advances, the essence of quantum convergence is the bridge today of security with tomorrow challenges, enabling a resilient and future-proof digital ecosystem. This quantum convergence is now beginning to show its financial potential as each component drives value creation for the others, enabling WISeKey to multiply revenues, diversifying them and starting to reduce the dependency of any single line of business and to capture new recurring income streams. The foundation of this quantum conversion strategy lies in SEALSQ, which I mean before -- I mentioned before, is a major player on that ecosystem and one of the most secure and secure manufacturing capability of post-quantum chips, which is going to be released in November 2025 is a world first, the first post-quantum chip with the capability of protecting against quantum attack, so this is positioned to be the world first secure chip to embed NIST-standard quantum-resilient algorithm, the ML8-KEM CRYSTALS-Kyber on ML8-DSA-CRYSTALS-Dilithium which are the NIST standard quantum resistant algorithm that had been available for companies like SEALSQ to implementing their hardware devices. WISeKey control through its 52% of the voting rights of SEALSQ as of June 30, 2025. The Quantum Shield QS7001, which is the chip aims to secure critical applications such as cryptocurrency transaction but also defense system, healthcare infrastructure, airport security and IoT devices against future quantum computing threats. As quantum computer advances towards what we call the Q day when Quantum computers will break traditional encryption like electric curve cryptography, ECC, RSA, the QS7001 chip addresses vulnerability in systems such as Bitcoin and other blockchains that could be hacked with this new computing capability provided by Quantum. Current ECC base algorithm, including ECDSA are susceptible to quantum attack that could compromise public keys and expose funds. The quantum shield QS7001 integrates Lattice-based quantum resistant cryptography to provide secure key storage, efficient signing and key exchange operation, optimized for hardware wallet called storage and IoT devices. It also offers a migration framework with hybrid cryptography and tools to transition assistance system to quantum safe standards with minimal disruption. The chip is launched as an open hardware platform to hold personalized customer firmware, enabling full flexibility for all kinds of application. SEALSQ also plans to launch the trusted platform module version of the QVault TPM in H1 2026. While it's very few competitors only integrate post-quantum cryptography through hardware accelerators that supports PQC via software implementation, SEALSQ QS7001 embeds this quantum resistant algorithms directly at the hardware level. This approach delivers enhanced efficiency, which is around 10x faster, side-channel protection and tamper resistance without relying on software layers aiming to provide a more robust foundation for long-term security at high-stake environment. So the conversion does not stop at connectivity. Each secure device will in time be able to transact autonomously between themselves within a SEALCOIN ecosystem from which WISeKey holds 75% of the corporation created. This is creating four revenue stream through transaction fees on trusted IoT changes. Earlier this year, WISeKey proved the potential of this model with a world first space-based cryptocurrency transaction, showing, demonstrating how satellites, chips and the blockchain can combine the power on entire new digital ecosystem or new generation of WISe.ART platform, which WISeKey is owning 87.5% of the Corporation and remainder is held by The Hashguard (sic) [ Hashgraph ] Group, the Hedera blockchain company which is a pioneering Swiss-based work 3.0 technology company. So this platform adds a fifth layer by extending this infrastructure into tokenized assets generating transaction revenue from authenticated trading on both digital and physical assets. Together, this creates a diversified yet fully integrated monetization model where every element from chip to satellite to blockchain to marketplace reinforces and extends the other. So for shareholders, the value of this model lies in scalability and resilience. Hardware sales generating media revenue, while OSPT services, satellite subscription and blockchain transaction and tokenization provide recurring income streams that we expect will grow with adoption. This means that each customer or partner engagement has a compounding effect, a defense contractor, let's say, adopting SEALSQ chips could also become a client for OSPT services or it can also be a subscriber for WISeSat connectivity, a participant in the SEALCOIN transaction and potentially a user of WISe.ART for tokenized asset management. It is important to note that only few companies in our sector can offer this level of vertical integration and horizontal interoperability and monetization. So this sets us apart from most of our competitors and makes the DNA of WISeKey. Another key point are the strategic partnership in which WISeKey is building further enhancement in shareholder value by creating new addressable market, such as the Quantix Edge Security initiative in Spain, which actually has been announced this morning as a finalization company with a participation of the Spanish government invested in that company EUR 20 million, on which WISeKey is also investing together with SEALSQ EUR 10 million. And this company has already a committed revenue of EUR 25 million over the next 3 years for the company. So this is already a very concrete example on how this verticalization works, how you can create what we call decentralized value by bringing the technology at national level. So this is the -- this company is at the heart of semiconductor sovereign strategy in Europe. which is supported by public funding and demand for secure microelectronics. Also, our collaboration with the Swiss Army, which is already 3 years going, demonstrate that our convergence model is not just theoretically but already being deployed to deliver ultra secure sovereign communication, such as connecting mobile phones with our satellites and being able through those mobile phones to secure the communication directly with the satellite and to exchange the keys that they are required to ensure that both devices end-to-end are secure and authenticated or protected. And also our HUMAN-AI-T initiative, which we launched with the United Nations, extends our leadership-based technology into AI global governance, which although is not directly related to revenue generation, it is required in order to ensure that countries of the world can benefit through the AI revolution without the need of dependencies. So those initiatives are strengthening our brand, creating influence over standards and laying the foundation for future trust services where AI must rely on secure chips, authentication of data and tamper-proof transaction. So as WISeKey moves into the second half of 2025, our focus is on scaling execution. Here, I give you a few milestones. We are approaching the commercial launch of SEALSQ’ in Q4 2025. The date actually is now around the 22nd of November as a world first, which will -- which we expect will trigger new revenue growth in 2026 and beyond, as already communicated during the earnings call of SEALSQ, where these projections were disclosed. We're also expanding the WISeSat constellation to increase coverage and open new subscription. Now we have 22 operational satellites in orbit. We are testing real time those satellites on a daily basis by connecting devices to the satellite with a new launch, which is due in November, again, with SpaceX, which will include the new generation chip and will coincide with the world's first launch of VaultIC, the new generation chip for post-quantum capabilities. So we are also bringing SEALCOIN and WISe.ART from the pilot stage to commercial deployment, establishing new transactional base income stream. And we are strengthening OSPT footprint to ensure that every chip produced by SEALSQ had rapidly personalized and integrated into this global infrastructure. For shareholders, the message is loud and clear. WISeKeY convergence strategy is designed to create multiple layers of monetization from each customer relationship recurring revenue stream that compound over time and strategic partnerships that are open to us creating a new market while derisking the execution. So with $170 million robust pipeline of revenue opportunity at September 8, 2025, for the period '26 to '28, a very strong balance sheet and increased global recognition of a role of the intersection of quantum security, space connectivity, blockchain and AI, WISeKey is building a business designed to scale, resilience and long-term shareholder value. So WISeKey is not just adopting to a technology change. Actually, WISeKey is shaping it. We are building new world's sovereign trusted digital infrastructure that the world increase is dependent on as currently the move is to centralize technology in some few countries and few players, which creates a dependency issue. So for investors, this represents a unique opportunity to participate in the creation of a company positioned not only to grow revenue but to define the architecture of digital trust for the decades to come. With that, I will now turn the call over to John, who will provide further insights into our first half 2025 financial highlights. So John, please go ahead. John O'Hara: Thank you, Carlos. As Carlos mentioned earlier, WISeKey performance in the first half of 2025 is in line with our expectations. While the company is executing on its strategy moving towards next-generation semiconductors, space connectivity, transactional IoT and blockchain laying the foundation for sustainable long-term growth. For the first half of 2025, revenues grew slightly by $0.1 million to $5.3 million, which was entirely in line with our expectations reflecting the continued transition period, which is coming in ahead of the industry-wide strategic shift towards post-quantum and IoT-driven technologies. As in slide here, I would highlight that with the second half growth is already -- we've got very -- all our orders for the second half booked out at the SEALSQ level. And we actually now have roughly a 300% higher backlog of book orders for 2026 than we had at the end of 2025. So we already have much more confidence in the figures going ahead in the continued growth. Our operating losses did increase by $30.2 million to $27.3 million, but this was largely driven by a one-off stock-based compensation charge at the SEALSQ level of $10.1 million. in addition to increased investment in research and development and an increase in the general and administrative costs as a result of an investment in the infrastructure of the company to support developing verticals. The increase in the operating losses is partially offset by an increased nonoperating income due to a one-off gain on the settlement of the ExWorks loan, which we recognized a $3.7 million one-off credit as we settle for far less than the out held on our balance sheet and interest earned on our cash deposits of $1.6 million. This results in a net loss of $22.3 million for the 6 months to the end of June '25, which has increased by $6.8 million in comparison with the same period last year. As I just mentioned, we continue to invest in research and development, which for the first half of the year totaled $5.8 million, focusing on the development of SEALSQ's next-generation quantum resistant chips, the SEALCOIN transactional IoT platform, the WISeSaT expansion and Constellation and the launch of the WISeSaT 3.0 platform. Our strong balance sheet and cash balance of $124.6 million as at the end of June, will allow us to accelerate technological development and to execute strategic investments that expand our capabilities, strengthen growth pipeline and position-wise get the forefront as the transition to quantum resilient security solutions. A brief word on the outlook. We expect strong growth in the second half of the year with full year revenues expected to be in the range of $18 million to $21 million. This growth is driven by the expected return to growth in the demand for SEALSQ's traditional semiconductor products, the consolidated revenue of IC'ALPS, a subsidiary of SEALSQ since the completion of the acquisition by SEALSQ on August 4, 2025, as well as the continuing development of the revenue streams of our other business divisions. We look forward to reporting our progress in the coming months. With that, this concludes our prepared remarks. I would like to now open now the line to Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Matthew Galinko with Maxim Group. Matthew Galinko: And congrats on getting the Quantix deal done. Can you maybe touch on the contribution from Quantix. I think the press release said a relatively even revenue recognition of $20 million over 3 years. Is there anything we should think about for margins on that project revenue? And is there potential for product revenue on top of the project revenue? John O'Hara: Just to clarify, it's $25 million over 3 years. So margins in that, yes, it's -- they vary a bit because some of it is equipment and plants as we install the equipment in Murcia. So some of that will be lower margin than our traditional semiconductor work, but then other elements will relate to professional service type arrangements, the expertise of our staff, the installation of IP. So it would run, we would expect at a higher margin, something much closer to what our -- well, as a margin level, would be very high because some of these staff are already currently employed by us. But yes, we start to be somewhere in the sort of the more traditional margin range. Then yes, as the PR also hopefully highlighted, we were also agreeing that we will be looking to allow them to sell our next-generation semiconductors and other products directly beforehand so that we don't kind of lose momentum or lose too much time. So yes, we would hope that there will be product revenues coming through whilst the center is still under sort of construction. Carlos Moreira: Yes. Maybe, Matt, this is Carlos. So just maybe to develop a bit further on that point. So this deal is actually a very important deal because this is the first personalization center that we sign, right? So the logical to personalization center is that many countries now they are getting concerned about the dependency on semiconductors and they want to have some kind of control on that process. And they start with injecting the keys, although the chips might come from whatever Taiwan, Singapore, whatever, but they want to inject the keys at national level. And those are the machines that John just mentioned. So there is going to be a full transfer of knowledge, equipment, licenses, IP, royalties in order for them to be able to do that. So this is -- and that includes obviously a building ultra secure facility, which we just came actually. We were there yesterday. So we were visiting that facility. So parallel to that, there is going to be -- this investment is a private partnership with the Spanish government SETT. So SETT is sitting in EUR 18 billion, actually, to develop semiconductor capabilities in Spain. So they are investing in Cisco, got EUR 300 million in Barcelona to develop a plant. There are many companies around the world, and they are coming to Spain due to the fact that the government is willing to co-invest with companies, and they would like to develop semiconductor capabilities at national level. Which is okay, right? So they put $20 million, we put $10 million and another start-ups in Murcia, Spain put another $10 million. So obviously for us is we recover our investment, because we have $25 million commitment over the next 3 years. But in the plus of that, as John said, we're selling immediately the semiconductors even before the center is fully operational to the market, and Spain is a high user of IoT, the electrical solar power plants, all that requires IoT connectivity. It requires authentication, required chips on solar panel the agricultural business, which is huge in that area, they are using IoT sensors to monitor water irrigation. So there's a lot of very interesting new applications that we are adding to the ones that we already do with these new generation chips. In plus of that, because SETT is an investor in many other companies, not only us, it creates an ecosystem right? Because the companies where they are also investing, they are creating synergies with other companies that like us now. So we are entering into new agreements like we signed with OdinS and TProtege. Those are local companies, and they are very highly specialized in a specific sector that then we can also bring to other countries. As we are currently negotiating actually, similar experience of those personalization centers in several countries, like including the United States in Arizona, where we are also advancing, also in India also in South Korea, there was last week at MoU signed with the major of civil and many countries are coming to us to say, wow, we really want to use your technology, not only because it's unique, nobody has it in terms of having this post-quantum chip. But in plus of that, you are maybe the only company in the world that is willing to help us at a national level; other companies, they rather centralize this technology, right? So this is creating a very interesting ecosystem for us. And as I mentioned during my introduction, that creates huge synergies with the rest of the companies WISeKey Group has, right? Because once you have those chips deployed at national level, then the next thing is connectivity, then is where the WISeSat satellite makes a lot of sense because we already concrete test on how to connect the satellites directly with sensors, then they are located into IoT devices or device-to-device communication or mobile-to-satellite communication. So that is a totally new industry emerging, and actually WISeSaT is booming, thanks to that, right? And then you have the tokenization, which is also a very interesting technology world first, which is letting machine to pay each other with SEALCOINS, right? So imagine a satellite buying data for another satellite and getting paid with SEALCOINS or a connected car buying data from a plug, electrical plug and do that directly through the car connection to the plug without the need to pay with Visa, MasterCard, right, intermediaries. So this is a very complex technology. People sometimes don't grasp the complexity that we are dealing here. But the good thing is the company is really making a huge progress, right? As each of those verticals are evolving. And they are creating, as I mentioned, this convergence synergy, which is what I believe is going to be the breakthrough in revenue here, is that once you build a very large microchip infrastructure, they start to want to be connected, they start to be transactional. And that creates a very new stream of revenue for the company in the years to come. Matthew Galinko: Appreciate the answer, Carlos, and John, a lot of color and very helpful to see how everything is coming together. I guess in the follow-up, you talked about the $170 million I think the 3-year business pipeline on the SEALSQ press release and conference call, and you repeated it here. Can you talk about how significantly, the TPM is represented in the pipeline versus some of the other applications of what you're working on? Or is TPM kind of a major component of that? Carlos Moreira: It's a mixture between the three, it is a mixture between the QS7001, which is the new chip. And that chip is basically upgrading the existing security of existing chips. So clients, and they are on the legacy chips and they are buying 5 million, 10 million of those chips per year. They want to upgrade now. As you know, out of the $170 million, an important piece is the design wins that the company already have with some of our clients, right? And they are then they are getting concerned now on the new legislation in the United States, but also in Europe actually now, that by 2027, the White House actually there's going to be in a few days, I guess, in a few weeks is going to be White House, similar to what happened on AI. It's going to be on quantum and regulation of quantum, that says companies needs to be quantum resilient already before 2027 and then by 2030, legacy systems will not be authorized anymore in critical infrastructures, right? So because the risk will become huge because everybody is now kind of in agreement and Quantum day arrives in 2030. And if you wait until 2027 to start to get ready for it, it's going to be too late, right? So this regulatory push is making, obviously, and you see that on the evaluation of some Rigetti, IonQ, the wave and SEALSQ, you see that happening now. I mean companies that they are in this quantum realm, they are getting a very strong valuation because it's actually easy to project in the next 10 years, what will be the revenue and the valuation of these companies if that momentum happens and because this is a regulatory type of movement now. It's going to happen. I mean there's no way that companies will not do it because their insurance premium will increase and then the clients who will get concerned on their products are now PQC ready and things like that. So part of the $170 million comes from that. The other priority comes from the TPM, as you say, and that is a bit later on the year. And the rest is coming actually from the centers because in every center that we built, the price is between $40 million to $100 million, depending the country, right, in the United States is a $100 million project. And you need to -- and even in some cases, we might want to invest together with investors to show that we are really serious about it, and this is important to us because we provide the licensing, the technology, the chips, the machines and everything. It becomes also revenue for the company. So this is the breakdown of the $170 million. What is happening now is that clients then they are being using the VaultIC. So VaultIC has been sold already historically 1.6 billion times. So it's a massive community of companies using already our technology. Some of them on a legacy environment, they are now considering to move into post Quantum, like yesterday, we announced a Taiwanese company that is doing ledger technology for storage of Bitcoin, Hashkey storage, and everybody is getting concerned that once Quantum arrives, the blockchain can be compromised. And therefore, people can lose all the bitcoins. And we signed a deal with them where we PQC enabled those devices. They are testing on a small group of devices, but obviously, the normal step is the entire production is going to be PQC ready next year. And I'm sure you're following as analyst the PQC addressable market, which is getting bigger and bigger, because we have, for the time being, we don't really have a clear competitor on PQC. I mean, the possibilities are projecting very high revenue. It becomes very realistic. Very big company. One question I get all the time, say, "Oh, how can you do that?" And I don't know, one of those multibillion-dollar chip manufacturing company don't do it? And the reason is that these are very large companies, and it's very hard for them to defocus from the current technology to just develop a PQC technology play and that takes 3 to 5 years to do it, right? So this is the years we have that we can conquer the market or at least take as much as possible of the addressable market. Matthew Galinko: Carlos. Great color on that. Maybe just last one for me before I jump back in the queue. You touched on commercializing WISe.ART with the 3.0 release and maybe in conjunction with WISeCoin -- SEALCOIN. Can you touch on maybe how you kind of what's the path to commercializing that piece of the business? And what can we expect for that in 2026? Carlos Moreira: So WISe.ART we developed, originally, the concept was that if you have a microchip into an object and that object is secure within microchip and authenticated, let's say, a spare part of a car or a drone or a hardware device, you can create digital twins of this part. And then on the metaverse or being able to regenerate the car, right, transfer directly from the original into the digital twin environment where engineers can play with the digital twin without touching the car. So that still is the design. And obviously, it's a very early business and the people are not doing that yet. The technology is what 3.0 is a complex technology. You have to put an identity on every spare part. And that identity needs to be storing a secure element, secure element injected into the object. The object then generates the digital twin and so on. So we found that art was the easiest way to start. And actually, we were very successful in art. We have now 1,000 of artist and we have thousands of pieces of arts than they have been dematerialized. But then you have these NFT collapse during the last 2 years, NFT companies like OpenSea and others, they just totally collapsed. We have suffered a bit of the misunderstanding of the market and say, "Oh, WISe.ART is an NFT platform," which is not. So we are basically reeducating the market to really see the potential with WISe.ART, which is becoming less maybe art, it is more like industrial generator of digital twin components to be analyzed on a digital environment. And then the SEALCOIN becomes the payment method or whatever you need to do between those devices. I mentioned before it is the machine to machine. So our objective is both companies actually WISe.ART, WISeKey in the identity management. They were very close to create that identity relation. And then we have, as I mentioned, plans to bring SEALCOIN as an exchange. So SEALCOIN will soon be on a topic change. We will give more information soon about that. And that will obviously create a huge amount of potential new diversification of revenue. Also WISeKey acquired 22% of WeCan. So WeCan is another blockchain company that develops -- we did it through the direct investment on SEALSQ. That was the model which we chose at that time. But as we all know, WISeKey controls the interest of SEALSQ. So both companies are working with WeCan in a KYC compliance using blockchain. So this is a very interesting project where you can basically bring web your technology to the financial sector and simplify the process of customers or banks to provide KYC compliance processes and registration. So you see the technology is converging, and that's the beauty. I think in 3 years, you're not going to be talking so many companies, so many products, you're going to be talking really bring Web 3.0 technology and simplify the process of customers of banks to the financial sector and simplify the process of customers of banks to provide KYC compliant processes and registration. So you see the technology is converging, and that's the beauty. I think in 3 years' time, you're not going to be talking so many companies, so many products. You're going to be talking really on Web 3.0 cybersecurity, which is what it's all about and connectivity. And obviously, you need to start somewhere. And the way to start this is by creating those specialized, very focused companies, and they are solving one specific problem. But once this problem is solved, it creates a lot of synergies with the rest of the ecosystem. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Mr. Moreira it seems there are no other questions at this time. I'll turn the floor back to you for final comments. Carlos Moreira: So thank you very much for your help in organizing this call. And thank you very much to Matt and the analysts and they have been following us and also, obviously, our shareholders and investors, that they might be joining the call. If you didn't have the possibility to join, this call has been recorded. We also have, obviously, all the presentations available on our website. And John and I are here available for any further questions you might have. Thank you very much for your attention, and have all a great day. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Operator: Good evening, and welcome to the Sound Energy plc Interim Results Investor Presentation. [Operator Instructions] The company may not be in a position to answer every question received in the meeting itself; however, the company can review the questions submitted today and publish responses where it's appropriate to do so. Before we begin, I'd like to submit the following poll. I'd now like to hand you over to Executive Chairman, Graham Lyon. Good evening, sir. Graham Victor: Thank you, Alessandro. For those of you who can see, I am flanked by our new CFO, Andy Matharu, and I've also got our VP, Geoscience, John Argent with me, who are going to help me do the presentation and answer some questions. Thank you for sending them in advance. That's been very helpful. We are in a really exciting time now. We're right on the cusp of things coming good in sound. And it's actually an exciting time to be in sound at the moment. You know we are very close to production. And we -- since we did the deal with Managem last year, we're in a much healthier position. For those that are new to Sound and have come in recently or have been watching us recently because you know we're close to revenue generation. I'll just refresh a little bit of why we think we're a good investment opportunity for you. We're clearly a strong player in Morocco, and we're in the transition energy space, where we're helping Morocco move away from the fossil fuel, the coal-fired power and transition them to what in the end will be a very renewable energy dominated country, but transition energy involves gas, and we're the biggest owner of gas in -- or landowner alongside Managem, obviously, in Morocco at the moment. So we have a fantastic onshore position. We have a concession that we are about to bring on to production, and we have plenty of exploration upside and romance in Morocco. The need for gas is very compelling in Morocco and strong demand and strong pricing. And it's been like that for quite some time, not just since the issues in Europe. What we've got is a very clear development plan for our projects. If those of you who have been with us for a few years will know that we -- we eat the elephant slice by slice, and we have it for breakfast, we have it for lunch. We have it for dinner. So what we've done with this gas field is we've taken it in stages. We're onshore, so we can appraise it, we can evaluate properly, we can put our investments in, and we can expand on that as we see the successful results. We have 2 projects, one about to be producing. That's the LNG project, small-scale LNG, micro LNG, and we'll talk a little bit about that in a second. We have a second project, which is progressing, not quite as fast as we wanted to, but I think there's some exciting news coming out on that in the near term. What's very important for a small cap AIM listed company is where our financing is. As everybody knows that it's very difficult when you're in the small cap world. So we've done that in the last year, like the year, 18 months. We brought in a strong partner [ Managem Energy. ] So we are now financed for our second phase of our development. We recovered some past costs of our investments. And we've got a couple of exploration wells that are going to be drilled, which is not many people can say they've got fully funded exploration wells. So we've got a good potential, bringing these fields on to -- or this concession on to production with our first phase and our second phase gives us a long-term view, 10, 15, 20 years of revenue. The excitement is going to be when we drill a bit more and we find more gas. And as those of you have seen in the past when Sound was successful in exploring and finding more gas, the share price reacted. But moreover, we're not resting on our laurels and just waiting for the gas to come out of Tendrara. We've also expanded to our strengths in Morocco. John will be talking a little bit about the natural hydrogen that we will -- we formed a joint venture company called HyMaroc, and that's with Getech. So John will talk a little bit about in that. So very early stages, but that's very positive. The second one is really not just solar energy for the sake of doing solar. Morocco is one of the best countries in the world to do solar, but also because of the liberalization of the electricity grid and our opportunity to be one of the first movers to participate in that. So why Morocco, why do we think transition energy is good in Morocco? Well, there's been a lot of gas imported into Morocco. There's a lot of -- not much natural hydrocarbons in Morocco. We have, as I say, the biggest position. The government has decided to stop subsidizing and reduce the subsidies on the imported LPG, liquefied petroleum gas. That's the gas that the locals cook with and is used sometimes in industry. And the idea that we are partnering up and doing this business in Phase 1 with the liquefied natural gas is a substitution. So I mean, it's good for the carbon footprint as well. Local gas is always better than imported. Tell that to Edward Miliband, but he wants to import it from the rest of the world instead of using our own gas. But we will be producing liquefied natural gas for the domestic market, industrial market in Morocco. It's a growing energy need. Morocco is getting about 4% to 5% growth. I mean we would love to have that growth in the U.K. And inflation in Morocco is around about 1%. It needs energy, and therefore, everybody is hell for leather to get energy -- Moroccan energy into the Moroccan system. We also believe that moving into the transition energy and taking opportunities of our strength in Morocco, our relationships and our shareholder base in Morocco to move into the renewable energy basis. But financially, Morocco is attractive to companies like Sound to develop its gas, and there is a 10-year corporation tax holiday. So it's important for us to produce this gas and get as much out as possible in a 10-year period to optimize our tax position. So moving on to -- for those of you who are not sure where Tendrara is, we're up on the Algerian border. Quite a remote location, but we are south of the main trunk line that comes in from Algeria goes across Morocco and up into Spain. That's called the GME pipeline. Tendrara concession is a small concession in the center of a large exploration acreage position that we have. And so we're out in the east of the country, and we will be developing the second phase with the pipeline that ties into the GME. 377 Bcf of raw gas volumes, uncontracted raw gas volumes is more than that, but we have taken with our 2 signed gas sales agreements to sell around about what we will call the 1C, 1P reserve level. So there's plenty of upside to sell of our 2C resource, 377 Bcf. And a little picture at the bottom here of where we are. I've got a couple more site pictures. But where we are in this Phase 1 development, we partnered with Mana Energy. Mana Energy is a new leg to the Managem story. Managem, a mining company, I think, a $6 billion Moroccan-owned mining company that's active throughout Africa. And they've moved into the energy space as well. They've moved into the gas business by acquiring a part of our business last year. We're also partnered with Afriquia Gas, which is a big fuel distributor in Morocco, a subsidiary of the AKWA Group, which is an even bigger conglomerate. Afriquia Gas in their own right, a couple of billion dollar company. So we've got 2 very strong local partners, and we now are a 20% non-operated shareholder in that business. The other shareholder is 25% owned by the state, which is the state participant ONHYM. So Phase 1 development for those that you have been following us, it's taken some time. The wells are ready. We're up to -- we've tested them. They are completed. They're ready to go. The micro LNG plant is coming to site in pieces. It's been factory tested and it's being brought into the country and commissioning is starting any minute now. We expect to have production by the end of this year. Transportation, Afriquia Gas already. They bought their trucks. They've got their regasification -- storage facilities, and they've got their regasification facilities. We took some financing out to help it when this was owned 75% or operated by Sound and owned at various times between 47.5% and 75% owned by Sound. We have our -- sorry, our Afriquia Gas sales contract in place. We will be at the top end of that gas price, $8 around about that for gas sold at the site. And then bear in mind, Afriquia picks the gas up there, trucks it 600, 700, 800 kilometers to their sales points. The store it and they regasify it and then they sell it to their customers. A 10-year take-or-pay contract and around about 10 million cubic foot a day of sales gas, 100 million cubic meters a year. There's a few pictures. We are -- every day, there's new equipment coming to site. Every day, there's a bit of process. But the main developments now is the LNG tank is pretty ready. The -- up in the top right-hand side, you can see the flow lines that are being laid. You see here, this is a couple of months ago when we tested the well. So the well shut in now, but it's ready to go, amine units and the LNG equipment. So it's all coming together on site, and it's quite exciting. There was an interesting pre-submitted question, which I'm looking forward to answering about getting to first gas. Second phase of the development is more about the pipeline. And I think the interesting and the good news is that Mana Energy have already commissioned and started the FEED update. And in fact, information is coming to our knowledge quite regularly on that. So we expect that the FEED study will be completed by the end of the year. That triggers then -- and the main thing outstanding is now with the FEED studies, where are we in the cost estimate? Are we talking GBP 300 million? Are we talking GBP 325 million? Are we talking GBP 350 million for developing this? Bear in mind, we are carried to 24.5% of our share of the equity. The debt financing is in place with Attijariwafa Bank. And so the FEED study triggers closing of the debt financing, triggers selection of the EPC contractor and triggers the finalization of the ONEE gas sales agreement. Again, a 10-year take-or-pay contract at 300 million cubic meters a year. When this is fully on production, we're looking a couple of years after FID, it's about $90 million a year revenue. So in total, Phase 1 and Phase 2, $120 million a year. Our share of that will be 20%. So I'm going to pass over to John now to talk a little bit about where we are with the exploration because that's key to everybody's hope that the share price will rocket. John Argent: Great. Thanks, Graham. Just a bit of an introduction to some of our new shareholders and those thinking of perhaps investing in Sound. Sound Energy, we're providing some exposure to some very large areas of exploration acreage, looking for gas beneath the salt that's our niche play in Morocco. But around the TE-5 Horst development itself, and Graham has talked a lot about that development is coming on stream in those 2 phases. That's the map up in the top right hand there. That's -- we have some 23,000 square kilometers of exploration acreage surrounding that development. And through that, we've got exposure to significant exploration potential for further gas discoveries on that acreage as well. So the Phase 2, which brings in the pipeline in there that's shown on that map, really is the launch pad for opening up additional potential that this basin truly has. So it really is that infrastructure that facilitates much more rapid commercialization of further discoveries should we make those in the future. Now we've received a lot of questions about timing of the exploration drilling. As a shareholder myself and a geologist, I'm obviously extremely keen to see further drilling in this basin because I truly believe this basin will deliver. And we know that drilling is certainly a catalyst for share price movement. And what I will say is there are -- there's a bit more work to be done on the exploration permits. We need to perfect those permits before drilling operations can commence operationally on the ground. And Mana Energy, they're now the operator of those exploration permits, and they're leading those discussions with the Moroccan authorities with Sound with us in support where we're able to do so. So once those discussions are complete, under the terms of the SPA we have with them, we'll be drilling 2 exploration wells and sound, importantly, sound, we are carried for our cost contribution for those 2 wells, and that's a net carry of $6.2 million. So we'll be carried for those 2 wells moving forward. Now in parallel with those discussions to perfect those exploration licenses, I'm pleased to say Mana Energy, there's -- as one would expect, they're in the market for a rig, the most appropriate rig that's technically capable, the best commercial terms. There is a rig available stacked on TE-10, but obviously, they're going off into the wider market to secure those best technical terms that they can. So clearly, we, Mana Energy, very keen to unlock the potential of this basin. And if we're successful, we're talking about adding a Phase 3, Phase 4, really ramping up significantly those revenues that Graham is already talking about. And Sound Energy provides exposure to that potential revenue gain that we could see. Graham Victor: Yes. And I mean, let's face it. If John is successful in any of these, the -- there are 2 areas in Grand Tendrara that we've already established gas. It's really about getting the gas out of the ground. The wildcat is the M5, and that is a massive game changer if that one comes in. So -- but bear in mind, John might say Phase 3 is the exploration potential. And we can sell uncontracted gas. So there's even more in the concession, right? Okay. John has done a good job with Getech setting up a company called HyMaroc. John Argent: Yes. So talk a little bit about natural hydrogen and helium. It's nascent. It's very early days in this space. But as a number of investors will be aware, there's a lot of activity and excitement around the possibility of natural hydrogen accumulations in the ground or indeed engineered hydrogen. That's a different story. Hydrogen is -- obviously could form a very critical part of the energy transition. It's a clean burning fuel. And there's a significant need and that need for hydrogen is set to grow in the future. So there are a number of companies looking for hydrogen across the globe at the moment. We have teamed up a company called Getech Group, listed again on AIM. And the reason why we've done that is Getech, they have their own proprietary gravity and magnetics database. They also have an advanced geoscience platform as well. They have machine learning algorithms, but they have a workflow, they have the personnel and they have expertise in this area. And then what Sound brings to that arrangement is that we've got our specific expertise in Morocco. We've been operating and developing exploration wells. We drilled 5 wells. We've undertaken a number of well tests. We've acquired seismic data, we acquired airborne data, so we can deliver those operations. And obviously, we'll be working our extensive network of contacts in country as well, which we developed over that decade. So those 2 companies bring those complementary skills together, and we've formed HyMaroc. You can visit the website there that we have at the moment. And already, as we've announced previously, we've completed -- I say quite a high level, but a regional screening study of the whole of the territory of Morocco. And we're very pleased that it has identified a number of favorable areas where there could be source rocks for natural hydrogen or helium as well. So we'd like to focus on those areas. But before we take some next steps with some further work, what I want to do is secure some exploration permits across there. And we're already starting to engage Moroccan authorities as well to access and get some exposure to those permits there as well. So that would be the next steps there. So an exciting joint venture, early days, but just watch this space of these things develop. Graham Victor: Thanks, John. I'm going to ask John, if that's okay, although he's not fully involved in this, just to talk about where we are with our potential access to the medium voltage grid in Morocco and our partnership with Gaia. John Argent: Yes. So what we're doing there, that is another area where we're diversifying into the energy space in Morocco, again, leveraging our Links and our network in Morocco that stepping into the solar space. We're taking advantage of a liberalization of the medium voltage grid in Morocco. In Morocco, medium voltage is what, 22 kilovolts in there. And we're an early mover into this space. So as far as we're aware, there are only 2 other companies active in this area. So what we're looking to do is -- and we're looking to secure capacity of around about 250 to 300 megawatts in total. And to do that, we're looking at now 20 different sites of 20 megawatts each of installed capacity, 20 megawatts each, okay? So we don't expect to secure all of those 20 sites at 20 megawatts each, but we expect to secure enough to get somewhere between 250 and 300 megawatts in total. So what does the 20-megawatt solar site look like? Well, each of those could be up to 100 hectares. So you're looking at 125 football pitches in size, just to give an idea of what that would be. And each of those sites were identified as already proximal to a substation. So you can access -- get direct and close access to that medium voltage grid, and that would feed power into urban and industrial centers. So we've already identified those, and we're already working to secure the lease and the permits of that land. So clearly, energy is going to grow very quickly in the near term. People are aware that in 2030, Morocco will host the FIFA World Cup. They're building the world's largest football stadium. I mentioned football pitches there. So that's 115,000 seat capacity in there. They're upgrading 7 airports. They are upgrading the transport system. That all needs immediate energy growth in there and not all of that should come through fossil fuels, which should be looking at renewables as well, and we want to move into that space. We signed an agreement with Gaia Energy to move that forward. Graham Victor: Yes. Thanks, John. And Gaia is a Moroccan-focused developer of renewable energy. I'm going to pass over to our new CFO as of the 1st of September. Thank you for joining us, Andy. Andy has been with us for 4 months now or 3 and a bit months as an interim CFO. And I think he's been doing quite a bit of work, and he likes the company. So I'm really pleased you joined us. Thank you. Andrew Matharu: Thanks very much, Graham. As Graham said, I joined recently, and I've got really 3 areas that I'm really quite focused on. The first one is obviously the company going from being a pre-revenue a company to having operational cash flow. And that's why one of my key focuses is on ensuring that we get to production now with Phase 1. And part of that story is the contract that we changed with the Micro-LNG plant going from vendor financing to an EPC-type contract, which improved the economics and reduce the cost. So that helps us get to first gas. The second area of my focus is on the company's balance sheet. And everybody is aware that the company has a level of debt. And I'm focused on looking at ways that we may be able to restructure that, maybe reduce that to get the debt-to-equity ratio change within the enterprise value of the company. And the third area is new ventures. Because the company always has to look ahead, look at new areas outside Morocco, maybe in oil and gas and other projects, and they could be corporate opportunities, there could be asset opportunities. And the sort of areas that we're focused on is in North Africa, around the Mediterranean. And if we come across good opportunities, then we need to think about funding solutions that we can take on board to take those forward. Graham Victor: Thank you, Andy. And I think for those of you who don't know Andy, he -- he did a little interview introducing himself last week, and it's up on our corporate website. And then he also did a little podcast with VSA Capital. We're discussing more -- over a more of an extended period about businesses. And so please get a chance to learn a little bit more about Andy and a little bit more of his thoughts on how he's going to take this company forward. So one of the things that we work quite closely on and most of us are engineers by background. Fortunately, we have a geologist to keep us on the straight and narrow. But what we like to do is measure things, what gets measured gets done. So we've put out key performance indicators together with the Board at the beginning of the year, and we have essentially 5 areas that we have to deliver on, all of this under the guise of making sure we're doing things safely and in the right way. So clearly, number one is getting first gas. And the conversations we've had recently and the updates we've had recently, we know things are all coming together at the site. And this is always the way in a typical project. It's normally a slow start, and there's a very fast ramp-up and then the last 10% takes like 20% of the time. While we're doing everything we can to make that a very steep curve and then we get first gas Q4 this year. I'm pleased with the FEED update that's underway. We know the Canadian outfit GLE quite well. They're very professional, very slick, competent people, and they're doing a very good job. I mean these are people that we knew as Sound Energy as well, had already been doing some work on Tendrara. So we're very pleased that that's coming together. And I'm hopeful that the FEED will finish by the end of the year. And then that will unlock where we are with the ONEE gas sales contract, the Attijariwafa Bank there. And then we'll select the right EPC contractor with our, obviously, operators lead on that with Mana Energy. John's talked about exploration. I think it's exciting that Mana Energy are out there looking for a rig. We are working Sound as well as Mana Energy to perfect those licenses. There seems to be a little bit of a bottleneck in the ministry at the moment. Things are taking longer than normal, but we're working hard to unlock that. And as soon as those licenses are ready, we'll be pushing Mana Energy to select the rig and get going. Andy has just described the balance sheet strengthening. You know I mean, when I first joined Sound, the balance sheet looked even worse than it does today with no revenue on site, et cetera. And we've been able to restructure that bond a couple of times and kick it down the road. So we'll see where we get to on that with the bondholders, but they are supportive of us. They like what we're doing. They like the fact that we're actually within spitting distance of first revenue. And they've been supportive over the last 3, 4 years. I think if they wanted to do something nasty to us, they would have done it 5 years ago. And finally, John has been working very hard on establishing the JV, which is set up at HyMaroc and the website is up and e-mail addresses and everything is going. Gaia Energy, we need a little bit longer to formalize because it's got a little bit more extra -- outside of the U.K. registrations to be completed. But that's all moving in the right direction. And we're going to be looking at other opportunities. We have a team that we're looking at other opportunities. But let's face it, we want to strengthen our position in Morocco. We want to be strong with revenue base, and we want to play to the strength of our 2 main shareholders and our partner, Mana Energy. So Alessandro, that was a quick run-through of the presentation. Maybe we can head over to questions. Operator: Yes, of course. Well, thank you very much for the presentation. [Operator Instructions] As you can see, we have received a number of questions, both pre-submitted and throughout today's live presentation. And Graham, what I'll do is I'll hand back to you now to run through the Q&A, and I'll pick up from you at the end. Graham Victor: All right. Thanks. Well, what we'll do so you have a bit of variety is the questions are more aimed at me, I'll take first, and then we'll pass to John and Andy to carry on with some other questions. And please, if you've got any other clarification questions, we have already covered quite a lot anyway in the presentation, but any clarifications, just pop it on the live questions, and we'll try and cover that. Here we go. I've been a shareholder for over a decade. Please can give me an estimate, even a very rough estimate when we might expect the share price to rise above 25p? Well, look, at 25p per share, that means a market cap of GBP 500 million. I think if we get there, everybody is going to be very, very happy. Our core net asset value as reported by our analyst Dan Slater at Zeus. And by the way, you can see in interview that he held just recently up on our website as well. But that shows 2.2p per share. So still 4x where we are today, all right? And the risk net asset value. So the core 2.2, the risk NAV is 3.9, so 6 or 7x where we are today. This all builds in Dan's models, his understanding of where we are with our cash flows, where we are with our capital expenditures, where we are with our debt repayments. And Andy explained that to you before. There's no immediate panic about paying debt down, okay? All of that is based on where we are with the concession. It doesn't take into consideration anything that John is going to develop for us with the exploration drilling. And that's a free ride for us at Sound. So we're quite clearly keen. SBK-1, we know a structure has gas in it. The issue is, can we find the right location and get the well to produce. M5, I've said, is pure exploration. What I would say to the person who said when will we see [ $0.25? ] Actually, since the company existed, it's been over 25p per share 3 times at 3 specific times over its history, not just 3 days, but periods of time when it was over [ $0.25. ] So roll on the [indiscernible], that's all I can say. Okay. Similar sort of question, when will I see a return on my 12-year-old investment? Well, thanks for that. Definitely sounds in a much better position than we were a year ago. A year ago, we hadn't closed the deal with Managem. It was announced, but we hadn't closed. We've now got funded development. We've got cash in the bank. We've got several catalysts for news flow, whether it's perfecting the licenses, announcing that there's a rig contracted, spudding an exploration well, getting first gas, taking FID, locking in a new contract with ONEE with a good gas price. I mean -- so all of that is good news flow over the near term. So I'm hoping, depending on what you've averaged out at and maybe you've stuck and bought your shares 12 years ago and never bought a single penny. But I mean, just look back 3 months, people that bought in at 0.6, we were over 1p for a few days, but we're over 1p. So there's very thin liquidity in the market at the moment. So I think with all this news flow coming, I'm hoping that -- we all know a little news flow goes a long way in the share price. Here's a question, and I think there's a couple in the similar theme. It's like, can we have reassurance that Mana Energy isn't deliberately delaying commissioning and revenues from the LNG project with the aim of eradicating Sound from the project. Well, I was with the CEO of Mana Energy about 2 weeks ago, discussing with him, it's full focus. His team is full focused on delivering this. They put new people in. They got specialist commissioning engineers in for the project. And please don't lose fact that our former COO, Mohammed Seghiri, is still running the show down there. So Mana Energy want first gas, they want FID on Phase 2, and they are no, they are definitely not stalling first gas. They paid money to get into this project. And if they wanted Sound out, they could have bought us out completely. They didn't, and we're in the project for that. Here's a question now, what's the expected revenues from Sound for the solar project? Where is the funding coming from? Does Sound have a 50-50 share in this with its African partner, that's Gaia Energy. Is the Moroccan government having a share? Well, the simple answer to that is no, the Moroccan government isn't part of this. This is the liberalization of the medium voltage grid. And so we are 50-50 with Gaia Energy. There is actually a company formed in Morocco right now, and there will be a 50-50 joint venture company owned by Sound and Gaia Energy outside of Morocco. That is being set up. Sound Energy, for those who follow us at company's house will know we've set up our Solar Ventures company. So we've got our U.K. parent set up. We're just waiting for the intermediary company to be set up on that. To give you an idea of revenues, a 20-megawatt site gross is around GBP 2.5 million to GBP 3 million a year of revenue. So if we can get to GBP 250 million, we're looking at $225 million of gross revenue and our share of that will be 50%. So then obviously, we have to take our debt financing and everything else off on that. The difference between oil and gas and solar, particularly in Morocco, the Moroccan banks and institutions love renewable energy in Morocco, and we'll finance it. And secondly, it's not risky. If you're drilling an exploration well, you're drilling a development well, there's always a bit of subsurface risk. We know the sun shines in Morocco. That's not the issue. We know once we have grid capacity because, as John mentioned, the substations are there. As soon as we've got the capacity, there is very, very little risk, technical risk in these projects. So that can possibly attract 80% or even up to 90% debt funding. So the idea of us having to put a lot of equity into this is it's small. So yes, we think it's a good opportunity for us. And it's also a relatively short time frame from decision to develop getting the power capacity and getting the approvals and then construction and commissioning and production can be within 6 months. So that's quite good. Here's another question more along the valuation or the undervaluation of Sound. There's an increasing nationalistic movement throughout many nations, and it's expected to Morocco is keen to keep control of its resources. Sound has invested GBP 150 million in Morocco, but it's now valued at only about GBP 13 million. It would make sense for Mana Energy to take over Sound's 20% and it's 27.5% in the Eastern Morocco what's assurance that nothing like this happens? Well, we're a public company. And yes, we recognize we are way undervalued. Some costs are some costs, they're not the value of the project going forward. So the enterprise value, that's the combination of market cap and debt is around about $70 million. So that's the difference between the enterprise value and the accountants way of looking at it in book value. Andy can correct me on this if I'm going wrong. I think if management want to make an offer for Sound plc, they would -- our Board would have to consider it, but it's got to be a pretty good offer. And secondly, we would have to come to shareholders to ask their approvals. So now I see we're on the cusp of good news in Morocco, but really material good news, production, exploration spuds and 2 new development projects with Gaia Energy and HyMaroc. So any low-ball offer coming in to buy Sound, it's not only -- I think I would find it difficult to accept, especially where we are today. But I think our 2 main shareholders, that's the Oil and Gas Investment Fund and Afriquia Gas, who've been with us for a long time, don't forget, I think they will find it difficult for us to sell to any lowball offer. Similar type of question. The share price is so low, Mana Energy could purchase sound out of its stock exchange. Well, that's true if they wanted to. If we were approached for a takeover, what would we do? What's the minimum sale price? Look, we're in this business to create value for our shareholders. And we are doing that through running our job. We're doing that by trying to grow our business using as little capital as possible, but the biggest bang for our buck. Mana Energy is a Casablanca-listed company, and we're an AIM-listed company. So any approach to us will have all sorts of corporate governance issues and the merger and takeover panel, et cetera. My guess is and my conversations with Mana Energy, they are very focused on getting the gas production at Tendrara, and they're very focused on getting that pipeline built and getting the gas into the power stations. Messing around with a company like Sound at the moment is a distraction from their focus from all their corporate transactions that they're doing. So I recognize that the AIM market hasn't built in a takeover premium to our company. But as a British company in Morocco on the cusp of all these good things, I recognize we're completely undervalued. And I'm sure the market hasn't factored in any takeover premium in our share price. Is there any evidence that Mana Energy is progressing to Phase 2? Yes. Well, I discussed in the presentation that GLE, a Canadian engineering house, design engineering house is updating the FEED study. We are aware that Mana Energy is constantly being updated with new information on that. The target is to have that study finished by the end of the year. All of the experiences we've had working with GLE is they always meet their deadlines. They're a very good engineering house, fit for purpose for this project. And they've been familiar with the project for over 2 years. So this is not new to them. So yes, we're very pleased on that. And that will trigger, as I say, the ONEE contract, the Attijariwafa Bank debt and the selection of the EPC contractor. And then management are very keen to take FID. So with all those things in place, that would be good. Is there any obligation from Mana Energy to keep Sound as a minority holder informed of what the progress or lack of there is? Well, yes, there is under our agreements. We have a formal meeting sessions with what we call the management committee meeting, where our Technical Director and Andy are on the Board of that management committee. And so we have a structure for that. We have regular project reports. We have formal reports and then informal reports. But it's true to say we don't get the daily update that we used to get when we were the operator. Now what they call OBO, operated by others is quite common in the oil and gas world. and it's about relationships. It's about getting informal information and sharing information in a timely manner. And I think you've got to remember, Mohammed Seghiri is sitting there where he was sitting inside sales 6 months ago -- 9 months ago. So our Technical Director has regular calls with Mohammed. He was on the call with him yesterday, and we get e-mails every other day. So we do -- we are informed. We're not on an hourly basis step by step as we would have done as operator, but we are informed and we have structures that we can keep in place. Here's a little bit more technical question about the LNG progress, commissioning and revenues. How long before Afriquia Gas agreed minimum take-or-pay is achieved and all its various customers, will they all come online at once or are they phased in? Well, as I said to you earlier on, the LNG construction continues. Commissioning is going through. And once commissioned full production for Phase 1, the 2 wells deliver full gas now. We could have those gas -- they can deliver 15 million cubic foot a day and our gross production expected is below that. So the wells are ready, we have capacity to flow at full blast, right? The issue is taking the gas through the LNG liquefaction plant and then calling down the big tank, which has storage capacity for about 2 weeks. So you call the tank down. So you can't on the very first day, put all the capacity in and then take it all out in the trucks. So there will be a period where we load up the LNG tank and then Afriquia will take -- and their plan, and I've spoken to the representative of Afriquia, they're ready. Their head of projects. Everything is ready. They've got the trucks. They've got everything in place. They will probably bring on 1 or 2 buyers of the gas every week. So probably 1 a week. So it will take a period of time to get up to the full offtake. But from our point of view, the way the gas sales contract is, as soon as we put gas in through that plant, they pay for it, okay? So it might get stored in the LNG tank, but the system is that we get revenue from that. Then they offtake and there's a certain minimum and maximum capacity they can take it off. Essentially, it's 1 truck to 1.5 trucks an hour to come in and pick up the LNG. So -- but the key for us is as soon as we're on maximum production capacity and the LNG is being manufactured, it goes in that tank, we get paid even if Afriquia Gas don't take it. Here's the interesting question. Is Graham committed to see Tendrara project through to commissioning? I've been here 6 years. Of course, I am. I want to be there the day we load the first tanker and we sell it, maybe even the day we first commissioned. But realistically, that's going to be an operational thing. So I'm sure we'll get invited out to do a ribbon cutting or whatever it is. So very keen to stay. And plus, I think we've got a very solid base. I want to see exploration wells drilled. I want to get the solar projects going. I would love HyMaroc to get some licenses. Admittedly, I might not be around when they drill their first well. But of course -- so I plan to be here for another week or 2, but it's in your hands. If you want me to stay, it's in the hands of the shareholders. Now that was a been long thing for me. I'm going to pass to Andy for a couple of questions. And there's a couple coming on the live questions, which John will be answering. And so we'll go to Andy on the financing type questions first, and then we'll finish up with John. Andy, we made a loss on foreign exchange of nearly GBP 4 million in 6 months. Why is that? Andrew Matharu: That's quite easy to answer. Graham, our debt is denominated in the U.S. dollar. That's our loan notes with Afriquia. And our eurobonds are denominated in the euro. And so any fluctuations in the exchange rates come as an FX loss. There's been quite a fluctuation in the U.S. dollar and sterling exchange rate, and that's what's made up most of that FX loss. The important thing is that this is a P&L effect. It's not having any... Graham Victor: It's not real money, isn't it... Andrew Matharu: No, it's not having a cash flow impact. So that's the most important aspect of it. Graham Victor: I know you talked a little bit about this in your discussion, but one of the questions was, we need $25 million facility to fund the contract change from vendor financing to traditional EPC. Can you explain, please? Andrew Matharu: Yes. So the micro LNG contract that we originally have with [ Italgas ] was a vendor financing type contract, and we converted that with the operator to a more traditional engineering, procurement and construction, EPC type contracts that needed to be funded. And the way the joint venture funded that was to put in a $25 million debt facility with the local Moroccan bank. Our share of that facility is $5 million. Why did we move to that? Those sort of traditional type of EPC contracts, I think, focus the contractor better. They certainly get a better OpEx level out of it. So that overall, it enhances the project rate of return. It enhances the project economics and ultimately leads to a better valuation for the project. Graham Victor: And this was the challenge we as Sound Energy had where how would we have raised the $25 million to do that on top of the other capital that we needed to put in. We had the $18 million from Afriquia. So this shows you the strength of having somebody like Mana Energy behind you because we're using the strength of Managem and the bank is very comfortable lending to Managem. Andy, the next question is a little bit more about revenues and when are you going to run out of money. Sound investors have endured delay after delay. Money continues to drain away from the company. Still no revenues. When will the company coffers be empty? Does Sound really have the financial capacity to survive? Andrew Matharu: Yes. Well, look, it's been a long time coming to get to this point where we're on the cusp of first revenues. And as you saw in the interims, we reported a cash balance of GBP 2.8 million as of the 30th of June. We also have -- and this is important, we have a carry via debt financing and the energy carry for Phase 2 post FID. And we've got some cash coming in once we start getting into operations from Phase 1. So we haven't got that long to last to go now until we get to first gas. And we can make that cash last us until we get to that point by just covering our financials like our listing costs, compliance costs, et cetera. So we do make a little go a long way. And the important thing is that we're not that far away from having our own revenues now. Graham Victor: Yes, that's right. Will -- Sound's 20% of Phase 1 revenue, which may take months to reach full flow, I don't think so, but anyway, be sufficient for it to survive. So similar sort of question. Andrew Matharu: I mean, similar question. We're going from being a pre-revenue company into a company with operational cash flow. And coupled with all the other aspects that we've got and importantly, as I just mentioned in the previous question, the carried element that we've got from Mana Energy post FID on Phase 2 and the debt financing that's already put in there, I think that we're in a very good position to cover ourselves until we get into meaningful cash flow. Graham Victor: Thanks, Andy. A little bit more question about the bond, the Eurobond. Has any progress been made regarding payment and/or renegotiation of the GBP 24 million is 23.5 million euro bond? Andrew Matharu: Yes. Well, the bonds are not -- the euro bonds are not due until December 2027. We have a very good relationship with the representatives of the bondholders, and we're in constant discussions with them. And they're very keen, obviously, to see us get to first gas and first revenues. So they see the light at the end of the tunnel. We've restructured these bonds a couple of times. I think there's every possibility of restructuring them again, potentially to push the maturity date out so that it jives with the Phase 2 revenues in 2028. And all these sort of conversations and discussions are being had at the moment with the bondholders. Graham Victor: Yes. I have to say, since Andy has come on board, he's picked up that relationship really well. So they've got a lot of confidence in Andy joining as our CFO. Can we pass over to John now for some answers. Could the Board please clarify expected commencement projected time line for drilling campaign, including any dependencies, milestones that may influence its execution? John Argent: Okay. So I think I answered part of that question in -- during the presentation itself. But to be clear, there's some a bit of work to be done on the protection of those exploration licenses. That is -- those discussions underway. Managem Energy is leading those discussions on the back of that, and we're obviously assisting where we're able to in that. So once those are complete, we'll then move towards drilling. Having said that, I have said in parallel those discussions, Managem are out in the market looking for a rig. And in terms of what a program may look like, yes, there's 2 exploration wells, which we're all keen to see, but there's additional drilling within the development itself. So for example, for the Micro-LNG project, it's a 10-year contract, take-or-pay contract that we have. We need to feed that plant with 15, 1-5, 15 million [ scfs ] a day from those 2 wells we've got tied in. They will be able to supply that 15 million [ scfs ] a day for a period, but after which the production decline in those and they will need to drill another well to fulfill that commitment. So there's one development well there. So that's a third well in the program. And then with Phase 2, there's another 5 wells that need to be drilled for first gas on there as well. So suddenly, there's an 8-well program. So when you're going out for a rig, we have a rig contractor, there's an attractive drilling program there to put that in place, and that's putting that in schedule. And they're doing it sequentially and schedule, there are a lot of cost gains as well as from there as well from the synergies of the wells. And that's what we're putting together. So look, Managem are on it. We're moving forward. And as soon as we've got some higher schedule, we will put it out there. We'll be messaging that, but we look to the operator to provide that, and I'm sure they will in due course. Graham Victor: Thank you. We have the same question from a couple of people. So I think John has explained that. And there are a couple of new questions in. I mean it's the same sort of one. Is there an update of drilling the Anoual well? And it's the same answer, isn't it? John Argent: Yes. So I think I said there it was originally scheduled for the first semester. So we have guided how long it would take to drill a well from a standing start, 9 to 12 months in terms of long lead items, securing the rig, et cetera. But as I say, once those licenses are perfected, Managem is working in parallel to bring in long lead items. But obviously, the rig is one of those as well. Do we reactivate the current rig that's on there? Would it be better to -- commercially better to bring in another one from outside. Those options are all out on the table and the operator is working through those, and we're assisting those where we're asked to do so. So that's well covered. Graham Victor: Yes. Thanks, John. Here's a very good question. And I'm not sure if it was asked to the Getech people this afternoon in their presentation, but it is very sensitive, the answer. Has HyMaroc already identified a potential exploration zone? John Argent: Yes. So as I said before in the presentation, HyMaroc has -- we've already screened the whole country. We're using that, using the information that Getech holds, leveraging their technical expertise as well. And from that work, we have identified an area which we believe has the potential for hydrogen source rocks. We think it's got the potential perhaps to accumulate hydrogen and helium in the subsurface in that area, but it needs sort of further work. So we'll be looking to secure an exploration permit over that area to allow us to make that investment, but we secure the rights with that. And we're working with the government authorities on that. But also we're reaching in to some of the Moroccan academic community as well. We want to leverage some of their laboratories, local personnel on the ground as well to provide surveys, sampling, et cetera. So that piece as well. But as Graham said, it's sensitive for commercial reasons, we can't reveal where that area is. But as soon as we secure that permit, which we're hopeful we'll be doing that in the near term, we'll be announcing that in due course. Graham Victor: Thanks, John. Alessandro, I think with the 20-odd questions, we're sort of getting towards the end of the hour anyway. Can I pass back to you. Operator: Yes, of course. Well, thank you very much for answering those questions from investors. Of course, the company can review all the questions submitted today, and we will publish the response out on the Investor Meet Company platform. But just before redirecting investors to provide you with their feedback, which is particularly important to the company, Graham, could I just ask you for a few closing comments? Graham Victor: Well, I think guys and gals and anybody else is something else. We're on the cusp now. Sound has been an interesting journey over the last 6 years for me. And I want to see revenue. I want to see exploration wells drilled. I want to see the FIDs taken for Phase 2. So there's a lot of and what we're doing with HyMaroc and what we're looking at with the joint venture with Solar. There's a lot on our plate and a lot of news flow coming in the very near term. So I can't remember, we actually said we're on the cusp. I think we really are on the cusp and then factor in over the top of that, that our share price is at an all-time low. I'm hoping there's only one way to go. So thank you for sticking with us for the new people who are interested, keep an eye out on us, keep watch what we do. And I'm hoping that in the next few months, you're going to get some really good news flow. Operator: That's great. Well, thank you once again for updating investors today. Can I please ask investors not to close this session as you now be automatically redirected to provide your feedback in order that the management team can better understand your views and expectations. On behalf of the management team of Sound Energy plc, we'd like to thank you for attending today's presentation, and good evening to you all.
Operator: Good morning, and thank you all for attending the KNOT Offshore Partners Second Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. My name is Brika, and I will be your moderator for today [Operator Instructions] I would now like to pass this conference over to your host, our CEO, Derek Lowe. Thank you. You may proceed, Derek. Derek Lowe: Thank you, Brika, and good morning, ladies and gentlemen. My name is Derek Lowe, and I'm the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer of KNOT Offshore Partners. Welcome to the Partnership's earnings call for the second quarter of 2025. Our website is knotoffshorepartners.com, and you can find the earnings release there along with this presentation. On Slide 2, you will find guidance on the inclusion of forward-looking statements in today's presentation. These are made in good faith and reflect management's current views, known and unknown risks and are based on assumptions and estimates that are inherently subject to significant uncertainties and contingencies, many of which are beyond our control. Actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied in forward-looking statements, and the partnership does not have or undertake a duty to update such forward-looking statements made as of the date of this presentation. For further information, please consult our SEC filings, especially in relation to our annual and quarterly results. Today's presentation also includes certain non-U.S. GAAP measures, and our earnings release includes a reconciliation of these to the most directly comparable GAAP measures. On Slide 3, we have the Q2 financial and operational headlines. Revenues were $87.1 million, operating income of $22.2 million and net income $6.8 million. Adjusted EBITDA was $51.6 million. And as of June 30, 2025, we had $104 million in available liquidity, made up of $66.3 million in cash and cash equivalents, plus $38.5 million in undrawn capacity on our credit facilities. That available liquidity was $4 million higher than at March 31. We operated with full utilization, taking into account the start of 2 drydockings, which amounts to 96.8% utilization overall. Following the end of Q2, we declared a cash distribution of USD 0.026 per common unit, which was paid in August. On to Slide 4 for developments during Q2. Through a combination of new chartering, charterers' exercising options and good maneuvering by our chartering team, we made good progress in extending our charter coverage and maximizing the value of charters we already have. The Brasil Knutsen is scheduled to go on charter to Equinor next month. With that in mind, we've been able to extend the redelivery timing from Petrorio to minimize any downtime between charters. Repsol Sinopec exercised their option to extend the Raquel Knutsen through June 2028. And Windsor Knutsen commenced operations with ExxonMobil on June 4, following completion of scheduled drydocking. On Slide 5, we have developments subsequent to quarter end, some of which you will likely have seen in our early July update. On September 16, 2025, we refinanced Tove Knutsen with a sale and leaseback that netted $32 million in cash. We also purchased the Daqing Knutsen from our sponsor with a $95 million combination of cash and debt. The cash component of that was approximately $25 million, so that was $7 million less than the net proceeds released from the Tove Knutsen refinancing. The Daqing Knutsen is on time charter with PetroChina in Brazil through until July 2027, with not guaranteeing the day rate until 2032 on the same basis as if PetroChina had exercised its options through to that time. We were also pleased to have reached a point in the recovery for KNOP and the wider shuttle tanker market, where we deemed it prudent to increase our discretionary allocation of capital to include unit buybacks on the premise that the units trade at a significant discount to what we believe to be any reasonable valuation for the partnership and its prospects. We have been active under our $10 million authorization, repurchasing 226,000 common units at an aggregate cost of $1.64 million, which is an average price of $7.24 per common unit. On Slide 6, we provide an overview of the Daqing Knutsen purchase. I've covered most of the highlights here already, but the strategic and commercial implications of such a drop-down transaction include an increased pipeline of long-term contracts, fleet growth, reduced average fleet age and continued development of our fleet in the most in-demand shuttle tanker asset class. This is a high-quality vessel and contract for us to welcome into the partnership. And when taken in conjunction with the sale and leaseback of the Tove Knutsen, we're very pleased to have been able to achieve growth without any draw on the cash in hand, but instead to have obtained additional liquidity from the debt portfolio. Turning to Slide 7 for a high-level summary of developments. The shuttle tanker market is tightening in both Brazil and at long last to a degree in the North Sea as well, in either case, driven by FPSO start-ups and ramp-ups. Certain of these projects were a long time coming, and it's been encouraging to see them up and running, driving shuttle tanker demand growth. We've extended our backlog as of June 30, 2025, to $895 million of fixed contracts averaging 2.6 years and rather more if all options are exercised. At June 30, our fleet of 18 vessels had an average age of 10.1 years. With the addition of our 19th vessel just a couple of days thereafter, the average age reduced to 9.7 years. We're continuing to repay debt at $95 million or more per year, which we think is prudent with a depreciating asset base. Debt paydown also produces flexibility and optionality to take on leverage elsewhere to enable an accretive allocation of capital as with the recent sale leaseback and drop-down, which was accompanied by the initiation of the $10 million buyback program. We appreciate that ours is a business where the time lines and contract durations are long, and thus, the financial impact of chartering typically arrives quite some time later, materially behind an upturn in sentiment or spot market activity. That being said, it's clear that after a lengthy period defined by the COVID era cutbacks at energy majors, we're increasingly building positive momentum and taking actions on multiple fronts for the benefit of unitholders now and well into the future. Over Slides 9 to 12, we provide the financials for Q2, for which the headlines are revenues of $87.1 million; operating income $22.2 million; net income $6.8 million; adjusted EBITDA of $51.6 million; and availability at quarter end of $104.8 million, made up of $66.3 million in cash and cash equivalents, plus $38.5 million in undrawn capacity on our credit facilities. That's $4 million higher available liquidity than at the end of Q1. On Slide 13 is our debt maturity profile, which has been updated to reflect the Tove Knutsen sale leaseback, the NTT revolver refinancing and the July 2 backing acquisition. Notably, the average margin on our debt was 2.23% over SOFR. And while nothing can be taken for granted, the positive momentum for both KNOP and the wider sector mean that we feel quite confident about these maturities in the years ahead, particularly after seamlessly addressing similar maturities in recent years amid materially less rosy market conditions. Moreover, we may have select opportunities to raise liquidity as we did with the Tove Knutsen, though any such action will be contingent on conditions at the time. Moving on to Slide 15 and our charter portfolio. I've covered most of the updates here, but I believe it's a useful resource for investors looking to track the primary movements where change can occur in a highly stable portfolio of cash flows. That is when charters turn over and when there are drydocks that will cause off-hire and incurrence of CapEx costs. Based on current charter rates, we believe charterers' options are likely to be taken up given the strength of the charter market. As such, upcoming points of particular relevance are the Fortaleza and Recife, which operate in Brazil and are coming open in early and mid-2026, respectively. On Slide 16, you can see our strong coverage through the coming quarters, some charterers' options that market conditions suggest have a good likelihood of being exercised and a small amount of open time. In all, we have 89% of vessel time in 2026 covered by fixed contracts. On Slide 17, you can see the drop-down inventory held at the sponsor. As we have said, we believe that growth on attractive terms that benefit the partnership is a central plank of our strategy alongside sustainable payments to unitholders. We operate a fleet of depreciating assets where replenishment with younger vessels over time and on the right terms is an imperative for the business, not to mention the basis for returns to unitholders. On Slides 18 to 20, we include again some commentary from Petrobras to continue their strong offshore production growth, particularly in the shuttle tanker service fields and doing so rapidly ahead of schedule and through the deployment of assets with a decades-long use profile. From the shuttle tanker owners' perspective, there is lots of like about what Petrobras is saying and importantly, in what they're putting into action. Crucially, it's this trackable and measurable activity, including numerous additional FPSOs that have already been funded, but are expecting to come online in the years ahead that gives us comfort that the shuttle tanker demand should readily absorb the current order book. Further, we believe that the current order book still trends towards medium-term shortage of shuttle tankers and set against the forthcoming production. To summarize on Slide 21, we had strong utilization and financial results for the quarter while securing additional charter cover and paying a quarterly distribution. We subsequently purchased a vessel with 7 years of charter cover. We refinanced the vessel to release liquidity in excess of the cash we paid for the acquisition. We refinanced the first of our 2 $25 million revolvers, and we initiated our $10 million unit buyback program. And looking at our near-term priorities on Slide 22, we're focused as ever on safe operation and maintaining high scheduled operational utilization. We aim to continue growth in earnings visibility and liquidity through vessel chartering out into the medium term. And we aim to deploy incremental capital opportunistically towards a combination of accretive growth and returns of capital to unitholders. With that, I'll hand the call back to Brika for any questions. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question we have on the phone line comes from the line of Liam Burke from B. Riley Securities. Liam Burke: On the Daqing Knutsen, I know you've got customary closing events prior to taking delivery. But could you give us a sense as to when you'd expect to take delivery on that vessel? Derek Lowe: On the Daqing Knutsen, we took delivery on the day we announced it, so the 2nd of July. Liam Burke: Okay. Because it's not the customary closings. Okay, great. Second question I had was on the drop-downs. There are 4 additional vessels. You made the closing of the Daqing in a very shareholder-friendly manner. Do you anticipate to be able to continue to do that? Derek Lowe: I mean we think it's unitholder-friendly whenever we do these transactions on accretive terms. Were you alluding to the funding for the equity component in the transaction? Liam Burke: Well, that in the fact, there's 4 currently available in addition to the -- when you have the newbuilds. What I was getting at is, I mean, you were able to add one more vessel quite easily in a very friendly -- shareholder-friendly manner. I guess, more or less, do you have a sense of timing based on your financing flexibility and your desire to grow the fleet? Derek Lowe: Sure. Well, we don't have a particular sense of timing. We respond to vessels that are offered to us when that happens and on the basis of the terms that are offered and can be negotiated. But we don't have a particular timing in mind. I mean part of that is obviously our financial capacity to fund any cash component that's required in the transaction. You can also see our debt schedule, what is coming up at different times and the opportunities they can present for potential releveraging or release of some sort. So the Tove sale and leaseback would be a good example of how release can happen. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have a question from Climent Molins with Value Investor's. Climent Molins: I wanted to ask about the older Windsor Knutsen, the Fortaleza and Recife. Could you talk a bit about how contracting discussions with potential customers compare relative to your more modern tonnage? And is there maybe any appetite to dispose of these vessels over the coming years? Derek Lowe: Well, our business model relates to operating vessels rather than trading them. And I do appreciate we have engaged in vessel swaps in the past, but that was actually so that we could gear up our ownership, if anything, rather than dispose. I -- when we have active contracting discussions with our clients all the time about our vessels, I don't think I can expand on how those are going with -- in any individual case for commercial reasons, but we certainly are actively discussing those vessels with our clients. Climent Molins: Makes sense. And you've been clear that your near-term priority is to continue expanding the fleet. But could you talk a bit on how you plan to mix that with potential distribution increases in the medium term? Derek Lowe: Sure. We -- fleet growth through acquisition is partly relating to growth. And the most important element of growth there is in the charter schedule. It's only through that, that we can generate income in the medium to longer term. It also helps with rejuvenating the fleet, which is -- which contributes to that as well and returns to unitholders and deployment of capital to drop-downs, we think both of those at the same time are good deployments of capital, and we don't see them as necessarily competing with each other. I mean they both use capital. But if you look at the orders of magnitude that are involved, the buyback program, for example, is planned to use rather less than even a single vessel, if you look at just a year's worth of the buyback program. So we think they're both necessary for -- in the interest of unitholders in the medium to longer term. I mean just to give you an example on fleet rejuvenation, which we think is particularly important, with 18 vessels as of the end of June and then obviously 19 shortly after that. The vessel age -- average age in early July was down to, I think, 9.7 years. Well, that is the age that we had earlier in the year. And just simply the passage of time with the fleet the size that we have means that acquisitions are required to keep the fleet rejuvenated and to keep that average age down. Operator: [Operator Instructions] I can confirm that does conclude the question-and-answer session today. And I would like to hand it back to Derek for some final closing comments. Derek Lowe: Well, thank you again for joining this earnings call for KNOT Offshore Partners second quarter in 2025, and I look forward to speaking with you again following the third quarter results. Operator: Thank you all for joining the KNOT Offshore Partners Second Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. I can confirm today's call has now concluded. Thank you all for your participation, and you may now disconnect. Please enjoy the rest of your day.
Heinrich Richter: Good morning, and welcome to Gemfields 2025 Half Year Results Shareholder and Investor Webcast. Sean Gilbertson, CEO; and David Lovett, CFO, will present Gemfields' financial results to the end of June 2025. At the end of the presentation, we will go into Q&A. [Operator Instructions] Before we start, please take a note of the important information in our disclaimer on Slide 2 with a full disclaimer in the appendix. And with that, I'll now pass you on to Sean to start on Slide 3. Sean Gilbertson: Good morning, and welcome. Thank you very much for joining us this morning after what has been a seriously challenging first half for Gemfields. MRM experienced lower premium ruby output, while Kagem suspended mining altogether at the end of 2024 with only limited operations resuming again in May of this year. The beginning of the year was also marred by civil unrest in the wake of Mozambique's disputed general election and of course, the surprise implementation of the 15% export duty on emeralds in Zambia. Both of those issues are now thankfully resolved. These factors, combined with Chinese luxury consumption effectively being offline, contributed to cash flow pressures and certainly tested both our team and our business. With thanks to the strong support from our shareholders for our June rights issue, followed after the period end by the sale of Fabergé for a headline $50 million, we have a considerably improved balance sheet. Significantly, our new processing plant in Mozambique produced its first rubies earlier this month and is expected to be fully operational next month in October. We also reported earlier this month the remarkably strong results from Kagem's auction of higher-quality emeralds, which was a pleasure to see. And as a result, we are now on a sturdier and more optimistic footing for the year ahead. Moving on to Slide 4. It's important to note that with the suspension of the Nairoto gold project and the divestment of Fabergé, we are now better able to focus on our long-standing core strategy of being an Africa-focused miner and marketer of emeralds, rubies, and hopefully, at an appropriate point in the future, sapphires. At this point, I'll hand you over to David for an update on the financials. David? David Lovett: Thank you, Sean, and good morning, everybody. Starting on Slide 6, we will work through our 6 key financial KPIs across the past few years. Starting on the left-hand side, you can clearly see the challenges, as Sean has mentioned, that we've seen in the first half of the year and the impact that has had on the revenues. The group generated $64 million of revenue in the period, which is materially down against H1 in 2024 and H2 in 2024. Kagem contributed $21 million of the $64 million with MRM bringing in $39 million. The rest is down to direct sales. Please note that Fabergé revenues, which were $6 million in this period are not included in here. The Fabergé results were moved to discontinued operations in advance of the sale. Operating expenses in the middle of this slide are down slightly at $69 million. That is primarily based on Kagem's pause in mining between January and May in this period. If we combine the revenues and the operating expenses, we see an EBITDA loss of $4.9 million in the period. We can move to Slide 7, please. Here, we have some more of our financial KPIs, starting on the left-hand side with adjusted earnings per share, where we saw a loss of $0.015 per share when taking into account depreciation, interest costs and taxes. In the middle, we have free cash flow, where we saw a loss of $22 million in the period. This is largely based not only on reduced revenues, but also on the continued investment into PP2, the new plant at MRM. We are now coming to the end of that project, and we are past peak CapEx. We will come back to peak CapEx later in the presentation. Finally, on this slide, we have Gemfields' net debt position at 30th of June, which was $45 million. Again, we will come back to this later in the presentation. We'll now have a look at expenditure in more detail, starting with operating expenses on Slide 8. The OpEx savings seen in H1 are largely due to savings at Kagem as we paused operations between January and May. Development projects have also largely been paused with corporate costs seeing a small increase due to fees in relation to the capital raise. OpEx remains a significant focus for management. But with Kagem resuming mining operations, we should expect an increase in OpEx at Kagem and at the group level in H2. We'll now have a look at CapEx with particular focus on the new plant at MRM. Moving on to Slide 9. You have Kagem on the left-hand side and MRM on the right. Kagem has seen very little CapEx in 2025 based not only on financial constraints, but also the pause in mining. Whilst we don't expect Kagem to return to the levels seen in 2023, we would expect sustaining CapEx to increase against the current levels moving forward. MRM on the right-hand side has seen significant investment in the new plant, and that can clearly be seen in the graph. The orange bars are the expansionary CapEx. We are, as we mentioned, past peak CapEx now. There is approximately 10% due in the second half of this year moving into next year on the contract with consumer, and we'll have a look at the progress on the next slide and then later in the presentation. If we start with the financials of the plant, which is the bottom of this slide, as I mentioned, there is approximately 10% or $7 million left to pay. The final payment may run into 2026 based on progress over the next 6 months. In terms of operational updates, we are pleased to say that rubies have been produced and all key components of the plant are now operational. There are, however, ongoing delays in final completion, particularly SCADA integration, but we expect a fully operational plant by the end of October 2025. As we have mentioned previously, there is a significant stockpile of ore to be processed and ready to go. So once the plant is fully operational, we expect to be able to feed it, and we expect to see significant increases in the quantity of rubies produced. We can now have another look at the net debt position over the history of Gemfields on the next slide. As discussed earlier, we are currently sitting on a net debt position of $45 million. This has improved since December, thanks largely to the rights issue and will continue to improve with the proceeds from the sale of Fabergé and the recent emerald auction, but we have a way to go to get back to a solid net cash position. The cyclical nature of the business can clearly be seen with the yellow dotted line here, which shows your net debt or net cash with auction receivables. But it should be noted that Gemfields has only recently returned any funds to shareholders, which totaled $90 million between May '22 and June 2024. Finally for me, we have a slide on the rights issue, which completed in this period. The $30 million rights issue was completed in June with 82% of our shareholders taking up their rights. We would like to take this opportunity to thank shareholders for their understanding and support throughout this challenging period. I will now hand you back to Sean to run through the operational review for the first half. Sean Gilbertson: Thank you, David. On Slide 14, we reiterate that Gemfields is after the suspension of peripheral projects like the Nairoto Gold project, completion of the June 2025 rights issue, and the divestment of Fabergé, a more streamlined business and has a markedly improved balance sheet, allowing us to focus on optimizing value from our core assets at both Kagem and also MRM. On Slide 15, we set out the key driver of our revenues being the production of gemstones in the premium quality category. As can be seen by the red lines for 2025, Kagem's premium emerald production has been hammered by the suspension of mining during the first 5 months of 2025. That said, the recent very encouraging auction results serve to inform the market that production since the 30th of June 2025 has recovered very nicely indeed, feeding into Kagem's recent happy auction results. Moving east to Montepuez Ruby Mining in the north of Mozambique, we can see that premium ruby production has recovered very nicely. However, because the majority of these premium rubies, which hail from secondary deposits rather than primary deposits come from newer mining areas at MRM called Maningina-5 and Maningina-6, which display higher fluorescence, lighter tones and a higher proportion of pink sapphire, the jury is still out as to what medium-term market perception will be like. Slide 16 shows our production of gemstones in the next tier down from those in the premium category. These gems constitute a far lower percentage of revenue when compared with the premium category gemstones. As can be seen, Kagem has been lagging behind in the first half as a result of the suspension of mining activities during that time. And MRM is tracking well, but with the same caveat surrounding gems from Maningina-5 and Maningina-6, which have different characteristics to our rubies from the Mugloto area and are thus not yet proven in the market. On Slide 17, while our auction schedule remains dynamic depending on market conditions and available production, we hope to have 3 further auctions this year. The first is a ruby mini auction, which kicks off on Monday of next week and completes in the same week. The second is a commercial quality emerald auction likely finishing in early December. And the third is the regular November, December year-end ruby auction, although this depends on the ruby production figures we see in the near term and completion of the second processing plant. Slide 18 depicts the final construction phases of the second processing plant at MRM, showing here the dense media separation plant and its surge bins, a good illustration of the sheer scale of this plant. Slide 19 depicts the wider overview of MRM's second processing plant, an investment that has cost the group some $70 million. At the far left is the very large circular thickener and [indiscernible] unit. At the top of the image is the tunnel feeder, which feeds dry screen material to the primary scrubber. And on the right-hand side is the scavenger plant clad in green, replete with UV sorters to triple check that rubies have not been missed after concentrate is passed through the sort house. This project is a very exciting and hard-won development for MRM, and we send praise to the team at MRM with a lot of gratitude for delivering a very complex project in particularly trying circumstances over the last 2 years. On Slide 20, we summarize our ambition that the recent strength in emerald prices will yield a solid commercial quality emerald auction results in the fourth quarter of this year. We also note that the ramp-up in MRM's second processing plant is expected to materially bolster ruby revenues over the next 6 to 12 months. In summary, having enjoyed a particularly challenging first half in 2025, Gemfields is in a markedly better position than it was 6 months ago and has much to look forward to given the improvement in the emerald market and the imminent final completion of MRM's second processing plant. I'll now hand you back to Heinrich. Heinrich Richter: Thank you, Sean. [Operator Instructions] The first question received is as follows: What are production expectations at MRM in H2 2025? And what will the ramp-up look like in 2026 when at full capacity? Any guidance on expected premium ruby production? Sean Gilbertson: Thank you very much, Heinrich. Obviously, one of the difficulties in our business is the nature of our geology where we do experience 2 types of volatility. The first is in the number of carats per tonne of ore, that goes up and down. And the second type of volatility is in the actual quality of those carats. Obviously, we've built MRM specifically to increase markedly the ruby production at MRM. But with that plant being completed during the course of October, it's too early for us to start predicting precisely what kind of rubies we're going to get. And of course, we are also processing ore from the newer areas. So I hesitate to start making forecasts before we have a couple of runs on the scoreboard. Heinrich Richter: Understandable. Next question is, how much of the good result from the recent emerald auction is down to the lack of recent sales and pent-up demand? Sean Gilbertson: So good question. Thank you, Heinrich. We obviously had a really fantastic auction result for higher-quality emeralds this month. And we would say that the key driver for those results lay in the quality of the emeralds that we were able to put before our customers. So that would be the overwhelming contributing factor. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Moving on to the next question. Once cash is being generated again and a buffer built, how will it be allocated between M&A, dividends or other projects? Any steer on this would be a good thing. Sean Gilbertson: Thank you, Heinrich. In short, our principal objective right now is to bolster the balance sheet. As David indicated, we're still in a slightly net debt position. And so capital allocation will be tailored towards improving the balance sheet situation. And we would suggest that in 2026, we'll focus on doing that and the chances of a dividend, therefore, I think, are muted. Heinrich Richter: On to the next question. Why have you sold premium investment in Fabergé, thereby creating an even less diversified business, but you are holding on to your investment in Sedibelo? Sean Gilbertson: Good question. In short, wholly owned premium investments like Fabergé are far easier to sell than small minority interests in fairly difficult platinum deposits. I'm personally very sad to see Fabergé sold. But given all the uncertainty in the world today and the many surprise challenges that we've endured over the last 12 months, we needed more fuel in the tank to guard against the risk of other things going wrong. So unfortunately, we literally had to sell the family silver. Heinrich Richter: Next question that came in. What is the latest strategic developments been at your emerald competitor in Zambia, who flooded the market last year? Have they been more disciplined in supplying the market of late? And what is your expectation in this regard going forward? Sean Gilbertson: Very important question. We certainly struggled with that during the second half of last year. Our competitor is, in fact, presently running an auction in Dubai. And based on what we've seen so far this year, we would describe the situation as somewhat alleviated and definitely better than what we saw in H2 of last year. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Next question, how many auctions will it take to establish the value of the new qualities of rubies? Sean Gilbertson: Good question. We had a similar experience with the introduction many moons ago when MRM first started of the Mugloto material. We actually started MRM by mining primary rubies in the Maninginas area, whereas these newer rubies that we've been talking about today come from secondary deposit areas in Maninginas. But when we moved from the primary deposits in Maninginas across to Mugloto, we did see that it also took the market some time and a few auctions in order to understand the Mugloto material, cut and polish it, sell it to customers, see what the market reaction is like. So in order to give an estimate, and there's a degree of judgment here, of course, and perhaps some subjectivity. But I would estimate anywhere between 3 and 5 auctions would give the market a good opportunity to understand what the material does. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Moving towards the longer term, do you foresee any threat from synthetic gems now or in the future? Sean Gilbertson: Excellent and important question. That's one that we get a lot. And I am very pleased to advise that it is actually a movie that the colored gemstone industry has seen before. And lab-grown rubies were first created via the flame fusion process in 1890, not 1990, but 1890. And if you Google Geneva rubies, you will find the entire story. And by -- I think it was 1910, they were producing something like 3 tonnes a year of lab-grown ruby. And of course, as we're already seeing in the diamond business, the ruby market back then bifurcated very seriously. And as the lab-grown rubies became better and better, bigger and bigger and cheaper and cheaper, they obviously became a very different product category. And today, you can buy a lab-grown ruby on various online platforms of some size for a few hundred dollars whereas the ruby, the natural earth made ruby equivalent would cost you tens of thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. We saw the same thing happen some decades later in the emerald business. And so this is kind of very old news as it were for the colored gemstone market. And I'm pleased to say we've transcended it well before I was born. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Now on to a technical question. Does MRM's depreciation and amortization charge reflect the 5 years' life of mine? David Lovett: Thanks, Heinrich. So in short, yes, it does. I believe this question stems from the significant amount of CapEx and therefore, the capitalized costs of the new plant coming online later this year. That is something we are reviewing with our auditors to find a sensible way of accounting for that increase as a short life of mine does mean you may see very large charges going through. And so we will -- currently, the answer is yes. Hopefully, by the year-end or certainly moving into next year, we will have a slightly different way of accounting for that capitalized cost. Heinrich Richter: In terms of ERM, when will Gemfields restart that program? Sean Gilbertson: Another good question. Thank you, Heinrich. So we do have a team on site at ERM at the moment. Obviously, they spend quite a bit of time looking after the wider deposit and guarding against illegal miner entry. And we are also conducting basic geological work, including sampling, processing through Bushman jigs and getting a better understanding of the ruby profile and the size distribution and so forth. We are not yet in a position where we are going to make a further investment in, for example, a plant at ERM, which ERM would need, certainly not of the scale of the one that we've just built at MRM. And therefore, we're going to continue with the ERM as per the status quo, namely basic geological work and looking after the license area. So certainly a notch above care and maintenance, if you will. And depending on how 2026 goes, what we see in the emerald market, what happens with our ruby revenues, we will take a view as to what the correct point is to move forward with the ERM. Heinrich Richter: Staying in Mozambique, did the first half disturbances at MRM affect production? And if so, do you know by how much? Sean Gilbertson: We don't have a specific figure that we can point to. But yes, certainly, our production was affected in December of 2024. The market may recall, we actually did have to close down the mine for a period after we evacuated following the civil unrest attack. And in the wake of those disturbances, the number of illegal miners that were coming on to the concession for probably the first 90 days of this year ran in the order of 800 to 1,200 people and per day, that is, and that was certainly very disruptive to our operations. Heinrich Richter: Understood. And sticking with MRM, diving a bit deeper, what are the expectations of production costs with the increases at MRM when production triples? Will there be efficiencies? Sean Gilbertson: Yes is the answer. And those efficiencies should be material. And obviously, our unit costs, both in terms of the production of premium rubies and overall carats and of course, our total rock handling unit costs should come down significantly. David Lovett: Just one thing to add there as well, Heinrich. I think it's worth investors being aware that we are currently in discussions around possible contractor mining as we ramp up things at MRM. So that would have an impact. We don't have those quotes in front of us at this point, but we will update the market as and when we have a better idea of cost increases. . Heinrich Richter: Understood. Turning to Kagem. With the recovery of the emerald markets, can some of the recent impairment at Kagem be reversed? David Lovett: So in short, yes. We made the decision. So there is headroom, significant headroom at the interim period when we reviewed that project. We made the decision that based on effectively 1 auction and 2 months of mining, it wasn't the right time to do it. We'll then have another look at the year-end with the auditors to see where Kagem is, but that write-back is certainly possible. It's a question of timing and how confident we are that the market has truly recovered rather than a one-off good auction. . Heinrich Richter: Thank you, David. [Operator Instructions] I'm moving now on to the last question on my feed. Do you have any imminent activity that would enable a value and time line to be placed against Nairoto's licensing prospect given the present gold market and its potential scale? Sean Gilbertson: We have recently received an updated report from SRK based on the last set of drilling and assay results before we shutted the project. And the bulk of the gold mineralization that was in the inferred category has now shifted across to the indicated category in the JORC Code, which is obviously an increase in confidence. And we have essentially identified an economically mineable gold deposit for a specialist gold mining company. We identified only one of the en echelon lenses that these types of deposits are known for, and there should be further en echelon lenses containing gold mineralization, but that is work that somebody else is going to have to do. We have a number of parties that are potentially interested in the Nairoto Gold deposit. However, it is located well to the north of Montepuez Ruby Mining in Cabo Delgado province, and therefore, it is a fairly tricky jurisdiction for most mining operators to set up operations and then conduct their activities. So that's a difficulty that we're addressing at the moment, but we'll obviously keep the market updated to the extent that there's anything to say. Heinrich Richter: Well understood. And with that, we have no further questions. We'd like to thank you all for joining us this morning. If you have any further questions or would like to speak one-on-one, please reach out to us at ir@gemfields.com. Enjoy the rest of your day. We will close the call now. Thank you, and goodbye.
Operator: Good morning, everyone. Welcome to the Moving iMage Technologies Fiscal 2025 Year-end Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this conference is being recorded. At this time, I'll now turn the call over to Chris Eddy with Investor Relations to begin the conference. Christopher Eddy: Thank you, operator, and good morning to everyone joining today's call. Moving iMage Technologies' CEO, Phil Rafnson, will open the call with an industry overview followed by a business update from President and COO, Francois Godfrey; and then CFO, Bill Greene, will conclude with some financial highlights, after which we will open the call to investor questions. Today's conference is being recorded and an audio replay and written transcript will be posted to the Investors section of the Moving iMage website in the next few days. As a reminder, except for historical information, the matters discussed in this presentation are forward-looking statements that involve several risks and uncertainties. Words like believe, expect and anticipate mean that these are our best estimates as of this writing, but that there can be no assurances that expected or anticipated results or events will actually take place. Actual future results could differ materially from those statements. Further information on the company's risk factors is contained in the company's quarterly and annual reports filed with the SEC. I will now turn the call over to Moving iMage's CEO, Phil Rafnson. Philip Rafnson: Thanks, Chris, and thank you all for listening today. A few of the major exhibition companies, including AMC and Cinemark noted a surge in consumer demand and box office momentum in their remarks to investors last month. That box office momentum is the primary source of our optimism for new business opportunities over the next year as demand in our business is typically preceded by box office strength over the previous 6 to 9 months. To state the obvious our customers are generally better positioned to invest in critical systems upgrades when experienced strength in their businesses and business outlook. The domestic box office saw a substantial rebound in the June quarter, drawing in approximately $2.6 billion in revenue, representing a 37% increase over the year ago period. This increase was driven by a dynamic mix of titles, including family-friendly blockbusters, a Minecraft movie and Lilo & Stitch and the darker and equally well-reviewed Sinners. This variety of movie styles and tones is important for a few reasons. In addition to gross revenue achieved, it demonstrates that a wide variety of audiences will turn out for compelling and immersive content. While August and September are historically lower months at the box office, the outlook for ticket sales over the period of 2025 remains upbeat with approximately $9.4 billion in total domestic revenue expected for the full year per analyst consensus, supported by major year-end releases, including Zootopia 2 and the next installment of Avatar. Our customers are committed to maintaining and enhancing their theaters and auditoriums to continuously elevate their guest experience with elite, sight and sound technologies. We've identified the addressable market for our existing base products and services and are laser-focused on the tactics to convert these opportunities into revenue over the coming year. At the same time, we continue to pursue a major strategic goal, which is to reduce our exposure to the business cycles inherent in the cinema equipment industry and to find opportunities to build on our existing base of more predictable and recurring business. MiT's deep experience and strong track record of performance put us in a leadership position to execute cinema technology and upgrades, build-outs and special projects. Now I'll turn the call over to Francois Godfrey, our President and COO. Francois Godfrey: Thank you, Phil. Our marketing plan continues to focus on building brand visibility and driving qualified sales leads through a strong presence at key industry trade shows. Our attendance last month at both CinéShow in Dallas and ShowSouth in Atlanta gave our executives great opportunities to exchange ideas, develop new relationships and promote our best practices, capabilities and competitive strengths to create new revenue opportunities for MiT. The overall mood at these events continues to be cautiously optimistic with attendees acknowledging near-term challenges such as cost pressures and uncertain macroeconomic factors, along with the growing urgency to complete cinema technology upgrades to deliver best-in-class customer experiences while also preventing the risk of costly downtime from equipment failures. Our sales and engineering leaders are hard at work highlighting our capabilities and accomplishments as a trusted and innovative cinema technology partner that can meet their requirements across the country. The growing array of digital projection and audio options, each tailored to the unique attributes of individual auditoriums creates significant facilities management challenges for exhibitors of all sizes. This is exactly where our expertise and experience deliver substantial value. Building international channels represents another opportunity for Moving iMage's long-term growth and as part of our strategic growth plan. As a result, we are actively identifying and evaluating complementary products or services to expand the scope of our business and our geographical reach. Given our industry experience and capabilities, we are confident we can add value, helping international exhibitors enhance their businesses and their customers' moviegoing experience. Installing new projection and sound equipment is a complex process that extends well beyond simply swapping out old hardware for new. Each auditorium has unique architectural and acoustic characteristics that must be carefully accounted for to achieve optimal image and sound quality. Projection systems require precise calibration for brightness, contrast and alignment to the screen, while sound systems must be designed, installed and commissioned to deliver consistent clarity and immersive effects to every seat. Integration with existing infrastructure adds another layer of difficulty as technicians must ensure compatibility with electrical, HVAC, seating layouts and digital control systems. These factors demand close coordination between equipment vendors, installers and theater operators to ensure a seamless upgrade that meets both technical standards and audience expectations. MiT excels at managing complex challenges such as lead times and staging while consistently delivering quality on time and on budget. This ability is the primary reason clients have relied on us for 22 years. Our fourth quarter was negatively impacted by some customers pushing project activity into future periods. Though we remain hopeful that current customer dialogues will evolve into additional concrete projects in the coming quarters, we expect to provide details on our new business progress and outlook as the year progresses. Our Q4 2025 revenue of $5.88 million was slightly ahead of the outlook we shared in May and a solid sequential improvement from Q3 2025 revenue of $3.57 million, reflecting seasonality in our business. Turning to our Q1 2026 outlook. We have found that lingering macroeconomic headwinds and a more modest rebound in box office performance has caused many customers to delay the timing of technology refreshes and other investments. Our pipeline of projects for the balance of calendar 2025, which is our second fiscal quarter includes the remodel of a 7-screen theater complex for an operator with whom we continue to expand our relationship. We are also in dialogue with large regional exhibitors to provide premium cinema equipment over the next 12 to 24 months and beyond. Depending on their spending outlook, we hope to be in a position to provide more details on these and other potential projects in the coming months. Today's moviegoers expect a high-quality immersive audio and visual experience at an accessible price. We are proud to play a central role in enabling this through a modern ecosystem of advanced and emerging technologies, all designed to elevate and enrich the cinema experience. We believe MiT is well positioned to navigate the opportunities and challenges of our industry to pursue growth and profitability. Key to this effort are our ongoing cost management and cash preservation disciplines intended to ensure Moving iMage has sufficient resources to navigate our constantly evolving marketplace. Now I'll turn the call over to Bill Greene, our CFO, to address some financial highlights. William Greene: Thanks, Francois. We published our financial statements in our press release this morning and expect to file our Form 10-K by the end of business this afternoon. I will touch on a few of our financial results and gladly answer any questions during the Q&A session. Q4 2025 revenue declined 7.3% to $5.88 million versus $6.35 million in Q4 2024 due to reduced customer project activity in the recent period. Gross profit dollars decreased to $1.2 million in Q4 2025 versus $1.43 million in Q4 2024 due to lower revenue and gross margin. Our Q4 2025 gross margin was 20.4% versus 22.5% in Q4 2024, reflecting normal variability in the mix of product and service revenues and their related margins. We were able to reduce Q4 2025 operating expenses by 26.5% to $1.39 million compared to $1.89 million in Q4 2024. This improvement was achieved by reducing headcount and related compensation costs, greater efficiency in our selling and marketing activities and lower costs related to being a public company. Our cost management initiatives have allowed us to move forward and seek further bottom line improvements. As a result of these efforts, Moving iMage recorded a Q4 2025 operating loss of $187,000, a substantial improvement over Q4 2024 operating loss of $462,000. Net of interest income, we also reported an improved Q4 2025 net loss of $156,000 or minus $0.02 per share versus a net loss of $416,000 or minus $0.04 per share in Q4 2024. Turning to fiscal year 2025. Revenue declined 9.9% to $18.15 million versus $20.14 million in 2024, principally due to reduced customer project activity, and we are proud to note solid improvements in gross margin and operating expenses. Our gross margin percentage improved to 25.2% in 2025 from 23.3% in 2024, benefiting from our focus on higher-margin product and product opportunities as compared to the prior year. We were able to reduce 2025 operating expenses by 9.3% to $5.65 million versus $6.24 million in 2024, driven by more effective use of selling and marketing expenses and lower public company compliance costs. Moving iMage recorded a 2025 net loss of $948,000 or minus $0.10 per share, improving on our 2024 net loss of $1.372 million or minus $0.13 per share. Turning to our balance sheet. We were able to grow our net cash position to $5.7 million or approximately $0.57 per share at the close of 2025 compared to net cash of $5.3 million a year ago, and we continue to have no long-term debt. Year-end working capital was $4.3 million, putting us in a very solid position to fund our business. While we do not provide financial guidance, we currently expect revenue in the second half of 2026 to be stronger than revenue in the first half, largely due to our current window on customer projects and decision-making and anticipate revenue of approximately $4.9 million in Q1 2026. In conclusion, through our margins and cost structure, we are pleased with the progress we have made. We hope to make further progress on these key metrics for Moving iMage's future profitability. Given our operating structure improvements, combined with our active business development efforts, we hope to create stakeholder value through consistent growth and profitability. With that overview, operator, we are ready to begin the Q&A session. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have a question from Neil [ Fagan ] who is a private investor. Unknown Attendee: I've been a shareholder and followed your company for a couple of years now. I wondered if you could kind of describe the magnitude of your funnel of new opportunities, projects that have not been signed or announced but are in process. What does the size of that funnel look like today compared to the beginning of the year, January? Philip Rafnson: Francois, can you answer that? Francois Godfrey: Well, it's -- can you repeat the question again in terms of the timing? Unknown Attendee: Well, I just wondered when you look at your funnel of new opportunities, projects and so forth across the whole product category, when you look at the number, the size of the new opportunities that you're in various stages of working with customers on, how does it compare to the beginning of the year? Is it about the same size? Is it larger? Is it smaller? Francois Godfrey: It continues to grow and evolve. So we're -- we have a positive outlook as customer activity continues to grow. Unknown Attendee: Okay. And let me ask you about a couple of components of that. There was a lot of optimism around the LEA power amplifiers. I believe we have exclusive rights. We had a number of large displayers testing those amplifiers. There really hasn't been much news about them. Could you kind of give us just a brief update? Is the optimism still there that they're going to start being a major contributor to revenue? Or have you run into unexpected headwinds? Francois Godfrey: No, we are still positive with regards to LEA Professional amplifiers to enter into the operational structure of larger organizations. It goes through a lengthy testing process. And then once approved, then they're put into their operational sequence for purchasing. So we are still on track for that. The sales arc in cinema tends to be long because of that operational testing and so forth. So we are still optimistic with regards to the adoption of LEA with major exhibitors and medium and small exhibitors. And we continue to grow that portfolio in our current sales. Unknown Attendee: Okay. And if I'm correct I believe at the beginning of the year, there are a number of large sports venues and stadiums being completed, being refurbished around the country. And I think we were in the running to get a lot of -- well, some of the work at those various facilities in terms of our legacy Caddy line. Can you give us just a quick update there? Are we still kind of in the competitive process for some of those? Or what can you say about that? I'm just curious because I know that a single large sports venue can be, I believe, a couple of million dollars of business. Francois Godfrey: Yes. So we are still actively in bid on various projects. Unknown Attendee: Okay. Is the timing of those something you would expect over the next 12 months in terms of where those structures are in build-out? Francois Godfrey: I'm not prepared to comment on that at this moment. Unknown Attendee: Okay. And if you'll allow me, I'm glad to get back in the queue, but there usually aren't too many people on the line. It's rather impressive that you've got an $8 million to $9 million annual recurring revenue base. Could you just talk a little bit about what that primarily consists of? And do you expect that recurring revenue of $8 million to $9 million to steadily grow over the course of fiscal 2026? Francois Godfrey: Those products consist of operational items, and it's dependent on our customer base. As we grow our customer base, we can see that increase, but it won't be -- it's not a -- it is dependent on the customer base. And as we grow our customer base, we can see that grow, and we intend to grow the customer base. Unknown Attendee: And are the margins on that above or below your kind of corporate average of 25%? Is it higher-margin work? Or is it lower margin work or kind of right in the middle? Francois Godfrey: I'll allow Bill to speak to that point. William Greene: Yes. I would say it's customer-specific and product-specific. But in general, it should be kind of in the middle there as high-margin and low-margin products even out with each other. So it's a predictable revenue stream and predictable margin stream. Unknown Attendee: Okay. Well, that's great because I mean it's a very large percentage of your annual revenue, so investors love recurring revenue. And listen, one final question. You guys have mentioned opportunities outside the U.S. for quite some time. And I just wondered, can you give a little more clarity? The first thing I'm curious about, are you talking about going into areas outside the U.S. through partnerships and distributor agreements? Or are you talking about putting Moving iMage people on the ground in offices there? And [indiscernible] I mean when are we expecting to see meaningful revenue that you would break out in these calls coming from outside the U.S.? Francois Godfrey: I'm not -- we can't discuss any timing at this point. We continue to look whether it's products or services. And if it warrants having people outside the U.S. MiT employees, we will do so. Unknown Attendee: Okay. And is it a longer thing? Should we be -- shareholders be thinking, okay, this is a calendar year 2027, 2028 opportunity? Or are you guys hoping to start generating some level of revenue in calendar 2026? Francois Godfrey: We're actively pursuing opportunities, and I won't speak beyond that at this point. Unknown Attendee: Okay. All right. Well, listen, I appreciate you taking my call. I hope you guys can get out and with the improved environment, build a new audience of interest in the company. It's still grossly undervalued despite the modest move. Francois Godfrey: We thank you for being a shareholder, and thank you for your questions. Operator: Thank you. At this time, this does conclude our question-and-answer session and will also conclude today's conference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. We thank you for your participation, and have a wonderful day.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. This is the conference operator. Welcome to WildBrain's Fiscal 2025 Fourth and Full Year Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions]. The conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions]. I would now like to turn the conference over to Kathleen Persaud, VP of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Kathleen Persaud: Thank you, operator, and thank you, everyone, for joining us today for WildBrain's Fourth Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. Joining me today are Josh Scherba, our President and CEO; and Nick Gawne, our CFO. Before we begin, please note that matters discussed on this call include forward-looking statements under applicable securities laws, which reflects WildBrain's current expectations of future events. Such statements are based on a number of factors and assumptions that management believes are reasonable at the time they were made and information currently available. However, many of these factors and assumptions are subject to risks and uncertainties beyond WildBrain's control, which could cause actual results and events to differ materially from those that are disclosed or implied by such forward-looking statements. Such risks and uncertainties include, but are not limited to, changes in general economic, business and political conditions. WildBrain undertakes no obligation to update such forward-looking information, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as expressly required by applicable law. Please note that all currency numbers are in Canadian dollars unless otherwise stated. After our remarks, we will open the call for questions. I will now turn the call over to our President and CEO, Josh Scherba. Josh Scherba: Thanks for joining us today. I'm excited to walk you through our performance in fiscal 2025 and share why we continue to grow increasingly confident about the opportunities ahead. We delivered strong results this year, sharpening our operating focus and reinforcing the foundation for growth in fiscal 2026 and beyond. Starting with Licensing, 2025 was a year of significant global growth. We delivered growth of 33% in the year across our portfolio, but Strawberry Shortcake was the clear breakout story, growing revenue nearly 200% year-over-year. Strawberry is now a meaningful contributor to our Licensing segment. As we highlighted last quarter, Strawberry historically generated over USD 800 million in retail sales, and we have surpassed USD 200 million this year, underscoring its significant upside as the franchise continues to scale. That momentum is showing up directly in our P&L. Strawberry grew from under $5 million last year to $14 million this year in high EBITDA licensing revenue. We're seeing growing interest from licensees and retailers across broad categories, validating our investment in revitalizing the brand and giving us confidence in Strawberry's long runway for profitable growth. Much of this momentum has been driven by innovation in our social and digital strategy, which requires a lower upfront investment but has proven highly effective in driving engagement and consumer demand. Our franchise management team, which oversees Walgreens owned brands, has been central to this effort, developing and executing digital-first strategies that have meaningfully grown engagement and translated into stronger financial performance across our portfolio. Engagement on Strawberry Shortcake and Teletubbies is up 66% and 56%, respectively, year-over-year across social media platforms, a strong sign of the growing connection between our brands and fans. And importantly, this increase in engagement is translating into consumer product success and giving licensees greater confidence to invest behind our brands, both of which fueled the continued revenue growth we're seeing in our numbers. Engagement isn't just a vanity metric for us. It is a leading indicator of franchise health, powering the 360-degree wheel that drives demand for content, consumer products and partnerships. We've had a number of recent brand activations for Strawberry Shortcake. Our Berry Besties campaign is producing meaningful new collaborations from a Roblox cake decorating experience to music streaming partnerships to co-branded fashion and accessories with Crocs and others. We also have new fragrance and cosmetic lines in development with global distribution in sight. Meanwhile, the upcoming Perfect Pets theme for fall 2026 builds off the Berry Besties campaign and gives us a fresh runway to continue building on that momentum with pets for Strawberry and her friends. Teletubbies is another solid driver of growth in our licensing business, growing more than 60% in the year. While a smaller contributor than Strawberry at the moment, we continue to see ample opportunity to grow and build this brand globally. We are ramping up to the brand's 30th anniversary in 2027, with a global activation program designed to celebrate and amplify the strong fan affinity for these iconic quirky characters. New licensing partners like Pop Mart are helping us expand accessories, fashion, digital-first and nostalgic product offering, all with strong localization in key markets. Early feedback on the Pop Mart products has been very positive, and our franchise and marketing teams are executing well globally, leveraging our full platform to ensure Teletubbies continues to resonate with fans worldwide. This gives us confidence in both the near-term growth and the long-term brand opportunity for Teletubbies. Turning to Peanuts. Fiscal 2025 was a banner year for the brand. We saw widespread demand across categories and geographies, establishing what we believe is a new baseline for Peanuts going forward. When we acquired the brand, Peanuts was already iconic. But since then, we've grown it into a global powerhouse. Over the past 8 years since acquisition, we have reignited growth at Peanuts, delivering consistent compounding growth across consumer products, publishing, live experiences and content, expanding its reach to audiences worldwide. This year, in particular, we saw strong momentum across every major market with outperformance in Asia, especially China, where the brand continues to grow and build relevance. This momentum gives us confidence that China and Asia will remain a long-term growth engine for Peanuts. Closing out Global: Licensing, our agency, WildBrain CPLG, experienced very strong growth in the year. CPLG is a unique and highly differentiated business within the licensing industry. Unlike most agencies, it combines the scale and sophistication of a global licensing operation with the flexibility and local expertise of regional teams. That structure gives us the ability to manage a broad portfolio of IP across categories and geographies while also tailoring execution for local markets and retail environments. This unique approach has driven stronger execution for partners and reinforce CPLG's position as a trusted partner of choice across the global licensing landscape. Our top brands in CPLG continue to reflect both the stability of long-term partnerships and the momentum of new wins. We've seen enduring success with major partners like Paramount, Amazon MGM and Dr. Seuss as well as exciting new relationships such as Supercell and Peter Rabbit, further expanding our portfolio. These additions highlight the strength of CPLG's value proposition as a trusted partner for IP owners seeking to maximize their brands globally. WildBrain CPLG is also a powerful complement to our own brands. Having the agency under the same roof enables us to apply its expertise and retail reach to franchises like Peanuts, Strawberry Shortcake and Teletubbies, accelerating their global impact. That combination, global agency strength and owned IP is what makes WildBrain CPLG a unique growth engine in our portfolio. Turning to Content Creation and Audience Engagement. This was a year during which we sharpened our production capabilities and scaled our digital distribution and ad sales business. On the content side, we returned to growth even as industry headwinds remained. Our studio is one of the leading independent kids and family studios globally. Our team produces high-quality animation and live-action programming from preproduction through to the end product with top partners like Netflix, Apple TV+ and LEGO. Another one of our beloved brands, Degrassi, returned to the spotlight recently with the global premiere of our new documentary produced with Peacock Alley Entertainment, Degrassi: Whatever It Takes. The documentary, which generated over 1,800 media hits and features interviews with Drake alongside numerous other Degrassi alumni, underscores the enduring cultural relevance of Degrassi and highlights the opportunity to reboot the iconic franchise for a new generation of fans. In Audience Engagement, our AVOD and FAST channels continue to grow steadily, up 55% in the fourth quarter to 5.7 billion minutes compared to the prior year, extending the global reach of our IP and giving us more direct access to audiences. These platforms build awareness and affinity for our brand, create incremental monetization opportunities and extend the life cycle of our content. Old franchises like Degrassi and Strawberry Shortcake as well as partner brands such as Pok mon remain consistently in front of fans worldwide, keeping them top of mind and fueling demand that carries through to licensing. Our channels are distributed across major platforms, including Samsung, Roku and Amazon, ensuring our content reaches audiences wherever they are watching. As the FAST ecosystem matures, WildBrain is well positioned to be a scale and trusted partner for platforms seeking high-quality kids and family content. Finally, I want to touch on Media Solutions, our in-house advertising and brand partnership arm. We're increasingly confident in the growth potential for this business. As a reminder, this business is responsible for creating, selling and executing integrated campaigns across our AVOD, FAST and YouTube networks, helping brands connect with millions of kids and families worldwide in a safe and engaging environment. It's a differentiated capability within WildBrain. Very few kids media companies combine global brand management and channel reach with in-house media sales and activation at this scale. This addresses a long-standing gap in the marketplace for brands seeking to reach kids safely in the digital ecosystem. Over the past year, we've taken steps to align and strengthen the Media Solutions leadership team, and we now have the right people in place to scale this business. We've broadened our advertiser base, deepened relationships with global brands and secured a healthy pipeline of opportunities across key verticals. The early results are encouraging with the pipeline showing strong momentum. With the combination of premium content, growing AVOD, FAST distribution and Media Solutions' ability to monetize through tailored and brand activations, we believe this business is increasingly well positioned to be a meaningful contributor to WildBrain's growth in fiscal 2026 and beyond. The rising engagement across our digital platforms, growing pipeline of Media Solutions and the significant growth in licensing all underscore we are building a meaningful platform at the center of kids digital media. Our scale across YouTube, FAST and AVOD not only keeps our brands front and center with global audiences, but also demonstrates the strength of our model in driving awareness, engagement and monetization. In Television, as we announced last month, we've made the strategic decision to exit our Canadian broadcast business following the removal of our channels from Rogers and Bell. While this was not our preferred outcome, it simplifies our business and enables us to focus on higher growth, more scalable areas. Once we are no longer subject to Canadian control restrictions under the Broadcasting Act, we will move to a single class share structure, providing greater strategic flexibility for the future. Before I wrap up, I wanted to briefly touch on the asset sales we've previously discussed. We've approached this process with three objectives in mind: first, to simplify and focus the business; second, to improve the balance sheet; and third, to drive shareholder value. Our exit from the Television business marks a pivotal step toward our simplification goal. Combined with our clear focus on key brands and profitability drivers, these actions have opened the door to actively considering strategic options that would unlock additional value for WildBrain and its stakeholders. We are actively in dialogue with a handful of parties to this end and expect to have more to report in the near term, all the while remaining committed to building a more focused, resilient and growth-oriented company. We made huge steps forward over the past 18 months. We successfully refinanced our debt, refreshed our senior leadership team and sharpened our focus on key brands meaningfully growing our owned IP. I'm incredibly proud of what our teams have accomplished in this period. The resilience and creativity will make this company stronger. Of course, the industry continues to evolve from tariffs to the rise of AI and ongoing consolidation. But we view these as opportunities as much as challenges. With our unique 360-degree capabilities, we use YouTube, AVOD and FAST, deepen audience engagement and then leverage our franchise management and CPLG teams to translate that engagement into sizable consumer products programs. What sets us apart is the combination of global strategy with strong local execution, the winning formula that enables us to build lasting franchises. We're already seeing this play out with Strawberry Shortcake, where digital-first engagement has fueled retail growth, and I'm confident in our ability to build on this momentum and deliver sustained growth and value for years to come. With that, I'll turn it over to Nick to review our results. Nick Gawne: Thanks, Josh. A short preamble on the presentation of our financials before I start on the financials themselves. In accordance with IFRS accounting rules, in Q2 and Q3 of this year, we have classified Canadian Television Broadcasting as held for sale and presented the historical results of this business unit as discontinued operations. With the termination of the Television sale agreement, the segment no longer met the threshold that held for sale. We have reinstated it into held for use. When Television ceases operations in Q2 '26, it will return to discontinued operations. All the results I'll be referencing include Television, unless I specifically refer to them as being excluding Television. Fiscal year 2025 revenue was $523 million, up 13% year-over-year. Revenue excluding Television, was $487 million, up 14% year-over-year. Revenue in the fourth quarter was $139 million, up 7% year-over-year, and revenue excluding Television, was $129 million, up 6% year-over-year. Global licensing revenue in the year was $284 million, up 33%. Global licensing revenue in the quarter was $69 million, up 29%. The growth in licensing reflects management's deliberate focus on high-growth, higher-margin brands. By leveraging our expertise to drive engagement through social and digital strategies, we've expanded consumer reach, attracted new licensees and translated that momentum directly into revenue and profitability. Revenue for Content Creation and Audience Engagement in the year was $203 million, down 5%. Revenue for the segment in the quarter was $60 million, down 12% year-over-year. The revenue decrease in the period was driven by a reduction in distribution revenue in the quarter, offset by stronger production revenue as compared to the prior year. Television revenue for the year was $36 million. Revenue from Television was $10 million in the quarter. As a reminder, as we did last quarter, for comparability purposes, supplemental information for results, including and excluding Television can be found in the earnings release. Gross margin percentage for fiscal year '25 was 46% compared to 48% in the prior year, driven by a mix shift between production and distribution revenues. Gross margin percentage in the quarter was lower with higher marketing costs and franchise management. SG&A in the year was $112 million, an increase of 9%. Absent a Q1 '24 benefit of $2.8 million arising from the reversal of a bad debt expense and the impact of translating foreign currency-denominated expenses at less favorable rates than in prior year, SG&A expenses increased slightly due to increased investment in our growth businesses. SG&A was $30 million in the quarter, up 9%. Adjusted EBITDA was $92 million, up 5%. Adjusted EBITDA, excluding television, was $69 million, up 3%. Adjusted EBITDA in the fourth quarter was $25 million, up 3%. Adjusted EBITDA, excluding Television, was $19 million, down 1%. As we've noted previously, the timing of distribution deals can be difficult to predict. In Q4, certain deals we anticipated shifted to the subsequent quarter, which created a timing headwind that has now been resolved. This timing headwind put us below our expected 5% to 10% continuing adjusted EBITDA guidance range. Net loss in the year was $90 million compared to a net loss of $106 million in the prior year period. Net income in the quarter was $10 million compared to a net loss of $81 million in the prior year period. As we noted last quarter, the quality of earnings we were driving would lead us to see free cash flow for the year as strongly positive despite some weak -- despite some expected working capital outflows. Fiscal 2025 free cash flow was positive $50 million compared to negative $30 million in '24. Free cash flow in the quarter was negative $17 million compared to negative $7 million in the fourth quarter of '24. Free cash flow is subject to variability arising from working capital timings and our interim production financing payables. Our leverage at the end of the quarter was 4.76x, comfortably in compliance with our financial covenants. Turning to guidance and our outlook for fiscal year '26. We expect strong growth in the core underlying businesses. In the core business, which excludes Television, we expect revenue growth of approximately 15% to 20% and adjusted EBITDA growth of approximately 15% to 20%. Let me give you some more detail on our growth drivers. Within Global Licensing, we expect growth across the full portfolio of our own brands as well as growth within WildBrain CPLG. Fiscal '25 was a banner year for Peanuts, contributing to the 33% growth we saw in licensing, but this level of growth will be difficult to repeat. We expect continued growth across all three areas in '26. With Peanuts, we are building on our social media strategy, expanding category presence and deepening penetration in key markets. With WildBrain Brands, we expect growth in new territories, while CPLG is expected to deliver growth both through representation of our owned brands as well as third-party brands, with WildBrain Brands and CPLG themselves contributing at higher EBITDA margin levels. Fully capturing the growth opportunity we're seeing across our Global Licensing segment requires upfront investment, both in franchise marketing and in SG&A, which acts as a headwind in fiscal '26. However, for Peanut, Strawberry Shortcake and Teletubbies, the data points, demand and pace of growth we've seen over the past 12 months, in addition to third-party research we've undertaken, tell us that the upside opportunity is significantly larger. The headwind today with SG&A as expected 10% creates a tailwind for the future. In Audience Engagement, we expect Media Solutions, our direct advertising business to meaningfully grow. As Josh mentioned, we've built out a high-quality team who are in market executing on a pipeline that could see revenues double year-on-year. In FAST, we expect new third-party revenue opportunities as brands like Pok mon look to leverage our established presence in the market. Monetization still lags the engagement we're seeing, but we're fully confident that this discrepancy will resolve into a significant opportunity in the future. Traditional distribution remains constrained across the broader industry and timing on this part of the business is always variable due to the point-in-time revenue recognition. In fiscal '26, we have the benefit of some deals that slipped from fiscal '25, but the underlying market remains soft and poses a headwind to growth in '26. This headwind is contemplated in the guidance we've given. In Content Creation, we expect continued growth driven by the Peanuts feature and episodic content for high-quality partners like LEGO. Television has historically been a headwind as the linear TV business has been in steady decline. We have made the strategic decision last year to exit this business. And although shutting down the channels was not our preferred path, we had always intended to simplify our business with focus on higher growth areas. Television will cease operations in Q2 '26. Including the Television business, we expect revenue of approximately $560 million to $590 million and adjusted EBITDA of approximately $80 million to $85 million. Moving on to our expectations for free cash flow. This is subject to material timing variances. Fiscal '25 did have some timing benefits, which we do not expect to repeat in the coming fiscal year. Additionally, with Television ceasing operations, we expect free cash flow to be down year-over-year. Throughout fiscal '25, we've delivered quality EBITDA growth versus prior year and materially better cash creation. We still have much work to do, but have built a strong foundation for significant growth in our core businesses for years to come. I'll hand it over to Josh as we wrap up. Josh Scherba: Thank you, Nick. Fiscal 2025 was a pivotal year for WildBrain. We delivered strong results across our portfolio, highlighted by the breakout success of Strawberry Shortcake, meaningful growth in Peanuts and solid contributions from Teletubbies and our third-party brands. The success we've seen in global licensing reinforces the power of our 360-degree platform, particularly across our digital platforms, which reflect the investments we've made to revitalize our IP to drive long-term profitable growth. At the same time, we strengthened our cash conversion, improved working capital cycles, and we'll be moving forward with our strategic goal to simplify the company by exiting our Television business. These accomplishments underscore the strength of our model and the effectiveness of our strategy to focus on and deliver high growth across high-margin profit opportunities. Looking ahead to fiscal 2026, we expect this momentum to continue with strong underlying growth driven by licensing and by the scaling of our digital business across AVOD, FAST and Media Solutions. The exit from Television enables us to fully concentrate resources on the opportunities with the greatest returns, while our studio continues to fuel the pipeline with premium content for top global partners. We believe these steps, combined with the scalability of our digital platforms and the cultural resonance of our brands, position WildBrain for double-digit growth in both the coming fiscal year, but also for many years to come. With a more streamlined business, a clear strategy and the right resources, we are excited about the opportunities ahead to deliver sustainable growth and long-term value for shareholders. With that, I'll open it up to questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions]. The first question comes from Dan Kurnos with The Benchmark Company. Daniel Kurnos: A lot to unpack, Josh and Nick. Maybe just from a high level, you guys gave a lot of color on sort of the growth trajectories of the segments and some incremental upfront investment. For either of you, can you just put a finer point on where you guys are looking to deploy money and what kind of ROI you are anticipating once you put that money to use. So if it's headcount ramp, if it's incremental capabilities, platform expansion, just anything there would be helpful and how you -- how quickly you expect it to contribute to growth in fiscal '26 and beyond. Josh Scherba: Dan, thanks for the question. So maybe I'll kick it off, and then I'll hand it over to Nick for a little bit more detail. But certainly, directionally, the growth that we're seeing in our core brands, particularly Strawberry and Teletubbies, we see an opportunity to put more dollars into digital marketing, into digital content that allows us to direct with our highly successful social channels to continue to fuel that growth and that engagement that we're seeing is translating through to success at retail. So I would say that, that's one area in particular. Our Media Solutions team has also been an area of investment for us. We're very much encouraged by our growing engagement numbers on YouTube, AVOD and FAST. But as we've talked about on previous calls, our monetization has lagged, particularly on AVOD and FAST. We see that as a tremendous opportunity for Media Solutions, but it's required investment to get the right people around the table with the right skill set to allow us to really build out that business. And we're now seeing it. Our pipeline is growing nicely. So we're really encouraged by it, but it has required some additional investment. Nick Gawne: Yes. Just to put some additional color. So underlying SG&A growth in '25 was broadly neutral as we look to make savings in our -- across certain businesses to fund some of our growth businesses, Media Solutions and CPLG and WildBrain brands in particular. And we see that continuing a little bit next year. We don't think about percentage ROIs. We think about the size of the prize. And the work we've done on the TAMs, the total addressable markets, for our brands this year and the experience that the management has of brands that have driven really significant revenue opportunity, plus the experience that our Media Solutions team have in building really big businesses give us confidence that the kind of 10% SG&A growth that we're seeing next year, which is primarily in the licensing and SG&A -- licensing and Media Solutions business is going to return multiple times in terms of revenue growth and EBITDA going forward. Daniel Kurnos: Got it. That's helpful. And I know this next question is really for comp -- more for the content guys, but every media and I guess we can consider you guys having some tech platforms. Are there any savings you guys can generate from AI adoption and/or development across the platform or any incremental revenue opportunities you can foresee by implementing it throughout the company? Josh Scherba: Yes. Look, I think there's lots of opportunity for automation and AI implementation across various aspects of the company. I mean, as it relates directly to content, the low-hanging fruit we see there is in social content. So our ability to turn short-form videos around at a quick pace that can then feed our YouTube and AVOD channels as well as socials like TikTok. We've been actively kind of working on ways to do this over the past several months, and we expect to be able to be in a position to start to roll some of that content out in fiscal '26. As it relates to our more traditional studio, we are an artist-led studio, and they will continue to be so. But we do look for areas that could aid artists in allowing them to perform more kind of high-value work. And so those are tools that we continue to look at. And in the future, we do think there will be opportunities to adopt. Nick Gawne: Okay. Just let me add one thing to what Dan said. So we -- you asked about SG&A investment in the growth areas of the business in '26. We see increased automation, whether that be AI-powered or not as being a kind of a real tool that we can use to cap any SG&A growth going forward and even reduce SG&A going into the future. So we're a little bit early for it to really drive to kind of cap off the impact of '26. But when we think about '27 and beyond, then every conversation we're in at the moment and when we think about structure includes conversations about automation and efficiencies, which ultimately are going to lead to cost reduction. Daniel Kurnos: Got it. Super helpful. Any chance, Nick, I'll take a shot at it, that you want to put a slightly finer point on the segment contributors to your growth outlook. You gave us directional, I guess, for both the two primary segments, but any kind of brackets you want to give just on how we should be thinking about growth contribution from the segments? Nick Gawne: Look, we're seeing continued growth in our Licensing business and we're seeing growth all around. Growth in our Licensing business, as I said, a little bit of a headwind from the SG&A investments we've got. We're trading off some very high-margin revenue, some passive licensing revenue that we had from kind of content deals that we did in the late teens when the market was very different. Absent of that, license is growing really well. On the Content side, we always have this -- the margin profile of that business is very different year-to-year. So we're very excited about our live action portfolio in the next 12 months, which is a somewhat lower margin than our studio. Both sides of those ledgers are growing. And then within Distribution, we've got a few big deals, but just those deals are on shows that are perhaps lower margin. So I think there's growth across the business, but the margin profile is not consistent due to just the type of mix. Daniel Kurnos: Got it. And last one, Josh, I'm sure you would be upset if I didn't ask about the broader industry. Obviously, there have been rumors that PSKY is going to buy Warner. It feels like maybe somebody with some deep pockets is going to come back in and start investing. I know all the big companies have been throwing money at sports, but building out all these portfolios right now seems to be maybe a reawakening. I know you guys talked about a soft distribution landscape, but I think we're all kind of hopeful that the spigot gets turned back on a little bit. Any conversation with partners around redeploying capital, getting -- rebuilding some of these franchises. And I do think kids will be a huge focus as we start seeing some consolidation and bundling and trying to get some differentiated content going forward in the streaming universe. Josh Scherba: Yes. Look, there's no question it's been a historically difficult content market for kids. And we've really pivoted over the past few years to focus on our core IP, licensing revenue and digital distribution as well as kind of refocusing our studio to have capabilities that better set the opportunities that Apple and Netflix were pursuing. So I'm really proud of how we've pivoted through what has been a challenging time in the traditional kids market. But looking forward, yes, I'm optimistic that these deals, Paramount and the Skydance ownership, that deal closing and then whatever happens with Warner Bros. Discovery, ultimately giving more certainty to the market. And as you say, investors with deep pockets who are going to want to win. And there has been an underinvestment, we believe, in kids and family content from these platforms over the past several years, and that's going to correct at some point. So in the meantime, we built this really strong growing, sustainable business. And if the content market heats up again, that's all on top of what we're forecasting at this point. Daniel Kurnos: Nothing like having the second richest man in the world come to a new playground, Josh. Operator: [Operator Instructions]. This concludes the question-and-answer session and today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines. Thank you for participating, and have a good day.
Operator: Greetings, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the WISeKey International Holdings 2025 Interim Financial Results Earnings Conference Call. As a reminder, this conference call contains forward-looking statements. Such statements involve certain known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, which could cause actual results, financial condition, performance or achievements of WISeKey International Holding Limited to be materially different from any future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. WISeKey is providing this communication as of this date and does not undertake to update any forward-looking statements contained herein as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. [Operator Instructions]. As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce Carlos Moreira, Founder and Chief Executive Officer of WISeKey. Mr. Moreira, you may begin. Carlos Moreira: Good afternoon to all of you joining us from Europe and the United States. I am joined today by our Chief Financial Officer, Mr. John O'Hara. And I'll start this call by providing highlights on the company performance and also on the subsidiary level initiatives for the first half of 2025. I will disclose the growth opportunities since the beginning of 2025. And moving forward, and then John will provide commentaries on our financial conditions in greater detail. Then we will open the floor to Q&A. I would like to provide now a short overview of the corporate structure. So WISeKey is a Swiss cybersecurity company created in 1999, which I am the founder. As a computer infrastructure provider, WISeKey delivers secure platforms for data and device management across various industries, including finance, health care and government, leveraging its route of trust technology and public infrastructure PKI. WISeKey is expanding its legacy technology into the quantum realm, building on the case of expertise in securing digital identities and enabled trusted communities, WISeKey continues to safeguard traditional encrypted communications and provide strong authentication services to governments, enterprises and consumer worldwide. At the same time, WISeKey is pioneering the transition toward the next generation of security through the post-quantum cryptography, what we call PQC. This dual approach ensures that existing infrastructures remain protected today while preparing them for a future where quantum computers will challenge conventional cryptographic standard, it is being projected and this will happen in 2030. So we have only a few years to get ready. By integrating PQC into semiconductors, IoT and digital identity solutions, WISeKey is setting the foundation for a quantum resilient digital ecosystem, ensuring continuity of trust and privacy in the post-quantum era. So WISeKey operates also as a holding company, encompassing several specialized operational subsidiaries, each subsidiary plays a crucial role in the WISeKey ecosystem contributing through independent research and development and expertise while integrating their technology into the overall WISeKey platform. This businesses are no longer operating as a separate businesses, but as a single interconnected ecosystem, what we call the convergent effect. Specifically, these companies are SEALSQ, which is well known now as it is a listed company on the NASDAQ under the symbol LAES, which focus on advanced semiconductor technology and it's coming with a world first in November of a post-quantum chip. WISeID, which offers Root of Trust and PKI services central to the WISeKey digital identity and encryption services and ecosystem. WISeSaT, a newcomer also in the last year, which offers space technology using and developing and securing picosatellite for secure communications from the space. We also have WISe.ART, it's the trusted blockchain and NFT segment, offering secure digital asset solution. And lastly, we have SEALCOIN AG, which is incorporated -- which was incorporated in 2024 and is developing the SEALCOIN platform and is focusing on a decentralized physical Internet with a soon-to-come token with name QAIT. In regard to the first half of 2025 has been a decisive step forward in the execution of WISeKey Quantum convergence strategy. So the WISeKey Quantum convergence strategy launched last year has the combining existency of combining different assets like proven identity, security methods with emerging quantum safe technologies to ensure a smooth transition into the post-quantum era. It maintains the protection of current infrastructure while -- sorry, classical cryptographic capabilities while progressing, integrating post-quantum cryptography, what I call PQC and quantum resilient algorithm. This strategy relies on a hybrid model, where traditional and quantum safe algorithms work together, guaranteeing backward compatibility with avoiding disruption. By applying this convergence across semiconductor, IoT, satellite, digital identities and blockchain network, it ensures that the trust and privacy remains intact. As quantum computers advances, the essence of quantum convergence is the bridge today of security with tomorrow challenges, enabling a resilient and future-proof digital ecosystem. This quantum convergence is now beginning to show its financial potential as each component drives value creation for the others, enabling WISeKey to multiply revenues, diversifying them and starting to reduce the dependency of any single line of business and to capture new recurring income streams. The foundation of this quantum conversion strategy lies in SEALSQ, which I mean before -- I mentioned before, is a major player on that ecosystem and one of the most secure and secure manufacturing capability of post-quantum chips, which is going to be released in November 2025 is a world first, the first post-quantum chip with the capability of protecting against quantum attack, so this is positioned to be the world first secure chip to embed NIST-standard quantum-resilient algorithm, the ML8-KEM CRYSTALS-Kyber on ML8-DSA-CRYSTALS-Dilithium which are the NIST standard quantum resistant algorithm that had been available for companies like SEALSQ to implementing their hardware devices. WISeKey control through its 52% of the voting rights of SEALSQ as of June 30, 2025. The Quantum Shield QS7001, which is the chip aims to secure critical applications such as cryptocurrency transaction but also defense system, healthcare infrastructure, airport security and IoT devices against future quantum computing threats. As quantum computer advances towards what we call the Q day when Quantum computers will break traditional encryption like electric curve cryptography, ECC, RSA, the QS7001 chip addresses vulnerability in systems such as Bitcoin and other blockchains that could be hacked with this new computing capability provided by Quantum. Current ECC base algorithm, including ECDSA are susceptible to quantum attack that could compromise public keys and expose funds. The quantum shield QS7001 integrates Lattice-based quantum resistant cryptography to provide secure key storage, efficient signing and key exchange operation, optimized for hardware wallet called storage and IoT devices. It also offers a migration framework with hybrid cryptography and tools to transition assistance system to quantum safe standards with minimal disruption. The chip is launched as an open hardware platform to hold personalized customer firmware, enabling full flexibility for all kinds of application. SEALSQ also plans to launch the trusted platform module version of the QVault TPM in H1 2026. While it's very few competitors only integrate post-quantum cryptography through hardware accelerators that supports PQC via software implementation, SEALSQ QS7001 embeds this quantum resistant algorithms directly at the hardware level. This approach delivers enhanced efficiency, which is around 10x faster, side-channel protection and tamper resistance without relying on software layers aiming to provide a more robust foundation for long-term security at high-stake environment. So the conversion does not stop at connectivity. Each secure device will in time be able to transact autonomously between themselves within a SEALCOIN ecosystem from which WISeKey holds 75% of the corporation created. This is creating four revenue stream through transaction fees on trusted IoT changes. Earlier this year, WISeKey proved the potential of this model with a world first space-based cryptocurrency transaction, showing, demonstrating how satellites, chips and the blockchain can combine the power on entire new digital ecosystem or new generation of WISe.ART platform, which WISeKey is owning 87.5% of the Corporation and remainder is held by The Hashguard (sic) [ Hashgraph ] Group, the Hedera blockchain company which is a pioneering Swiss-based work 3.0 technology company. So this platform adds a fifth layer by extending this infrastructure into tokenized assets generating transaction revenue from authenticated trading on both digital and physical assets. Together, this creates a diversified yet fully integrated monetization model where every element from chip to satellite to blockchain to marketplace reinforces and extends the other. So for shareholders, the value of this model lies in scalability and resilience. Hardware sales generating media revenue, while OSPT services, satellite subscription and blockchain transaction and tokenization provide recurring income streams that we expect will grow with adoption. This means that each customer or partner engagement has a compounding effect, a defense contractor, let's say, adopting SEALSQ chips could also become a client for OSPT services or it can also be a subscriber for WISeSat connectivity, a participant in the SEALCOIN transaction and potentially a user of WISe.ART for tokenized asset management. It is important to note that only few companies in our sector can offer this level of vertical integration and horizontal interoperability and monetization. So this sets us apart from most of our competitors and makes the DNA of WISeKey. Another key point are the strategic partnership in which WISeKey is building further enhancement in shareholder value by creating new addressable market, such as the Quantix Edge Security initiative in Spain, which actually has been announced this morning as a finalization company with a participation of the Spanish government invested in that company EUR 20 million, on which WISeKey is also investing together with SEALSQ EUR 10 million. And this company has already a committed revenue of EUR 25 million over the next 3 years for the company. So this is already a very concrete example on how this verticalization works, how you can create what we call decentralized value by bringing the technology at national level. So this is the -- this company is at the heart of semiconductor sovereign strategy in Europe. which is supported by public funding and demand for secure microelectronics. Also, our collaboration with the Swiss Army, which is already 3 years going, demonstrate that our convergence model is not just theoretically but already being deployed to deliver ultra secure sovereign communication, such as connecting mobile phones with our satellites and being able through those mobile phones to secure the communication directly with the satellite and to exchange the keys that they are required to ensure that both devices end-to-end are secure and authenticated or protected. And also our HUMAN-AI-T initiative, which we launched with the United Nations, extends our leadership-based technology into AI global governance, which although is not directly related to revenue generation, it is required in order to ensure that countries of the world can benefit through the AI revolution without the need of dependencies. So those initiatives are strengthening our brand, creating influence over standards and laying the foundation for future trust services where AI must rely on secure chips, authentication of data and tamper-proof transaction. So as WISeKey moves into the second half of 2025, our focus is on scaling execution. Here, I give you a few milestones. We are approaching the commercial launch of SEALSQ’ in Q4 2025. The date actually is now around the 22nd of November as a world first, which will -- which we expect will trigger new revenue growth in 2026 and beyond, as already communicated during the earnings call of SEALSQ, where these projections were disclosed. We're also expanding the WISeSat constellation to increase coverage and open new subscription. Now we have 22 operational satellites in orbit. We are testing real time those satellites on a daily basis by connecting devices to the satellite with a new launch, which is due in November, again, with SpaceX, which will include the new generation chip and will coincide with the world's first launch of VaultIC, the new generation chip for post-quantum capabilities. So we are also bringing SEALCOIN and WISe.ART from the pilot stage to commercial deployment, establishing new transactional base income stream. And we are strengthening OSPT footprint to ensure that every chip produced by SEALSQ had rapidly personalized and integrated into this global infrastructure. For shareholders, the message is loud and clear. WISeKeY convergence strategy is designed to create multiple layers of monetization from each customer relationship recurring revenue stream that compound over time and strategic partnerships that are open to us creating a new market while derisking the execution. So with $170 million robust pipeline of revenue opportunity at September 8, 2025, for the period '26 to '28, a very strong balance sheet and increased global recognition of a role of the intersection of quantum security, space connectivity, blockchain and AI, WISeKey is building a business designed to scale, resilience and long-term shareholder value. So WISeKey is not just adopting to a technology change. Actually, WISeKey is shaping it. We are building new world's sovereign trusted digital infrastructure that the world increase is dependent on as currently the move is to centralize technology in some few countries and few players, which creates a dependency issue. So for investors, this represents a unique opportunity to participate in the creation of a company positioned not only to grow revenue but to define the architecture of digital trust for the decades to come. With that, I will now turn the call over to John, who will provide further insights into our first half 2025 financial highlights. So John, please go ahead. John O'Hara: Thank you, Carlos. As Carlos mentioned earlier, WISeKey performance in the first half of 2025 is in line with our expectations. While the company is executing on its strategy moving towards next-generation semiconductors, space connectivity, transactional IoT and blockchain laying the foundation for sustainable long-term growth. For the first half of 2025, revenues grew slightly by $0.1 million to $5.3 million, which was entirely in line with our expectations reflecting the continued transition period, which is coming in ahead of the industry-wide strategic shift towards post-quantum and IoT-driven technologies. As in slide here, I would highlight that with the second half growth is already -- we've got very -- all our orders for the second half booked out at the SEALSQ level. And we actually now have roughly a 300% higher backlog of book orders for 2026 than we had at the end of 2025. So we already have much more confidence in the figures going ahead in the continued growth. Our operating losses did increase by $30.2 million to $27.3 million, but this was largely driven by a one-off stock-based compensation charge at the SEALSQ level of $10.1 million. in addition to increased investment in research and development and an increase in the general and administrative costs as a result of an investment in the infrastructure of the company to support developing verticals. The increase in the operating losses is partially offset by an increased nonoperating income due to a one-off gain on the settlement of the ExWorks loan, which we recognized a $3.7 million one-off credit as we settle for far less than the out held on our balance sheet and interest earned on our cash deposits of $1.6 million. This results in a net loss of $22.3 million for the 6 months to the end of June '25, which has increased by $6.8 million in comparison with the same period last year. As I just mentioned, we continue to invest in research and development, which for the first half of the year totaled $5.8 million, focusing on the development of SEALSQ's next-generation quantum resistant chips, the SEALCOIN transactional IoT platform, the WISeSaT expansion and Constellation and the launch of the WISeSaT 3.0 platform. Our strong balance sheet and cash balance of $124.6 million as at the end of June, will allow us to accelerate technological development and to execute strategic investments that expand our capabilities, strengthen growth pipeline and position-wise get the forefront as the transition to quantum resilient security solutions. A brief word on the outlook. We expect strong growth in the second half of the year with full year revenues expected to be in the range of $18 million to $21 million. This growth is driven by the expected return to growth in the demand for SEALSQ's traditional semiconductor products, the consolidated revenue of IC'ALPS, a subsidiary of SEALSQ since the completion of the acquisition by SEALSQ on August 4, 2025, as well as the continuing development of the revenue streams of our other business divisions. We look forward to reporting our progress in the coming months. With that, this concludes our prepared remarks. I would like to now open now the line to Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Matthew Galinko with Maxim Group. Matthew Galinko: And congrats on getting the Quantix deal done. Can you maybe touch on the contribution from Quantix. I think the press release said a relatively even revenue recognition of $20 million over 3 years. Is there anything we should think about for margins on that project revenue? And is there potential for product revenue on top of the project revenue? John O'Hara: Just to clarify, it's $25 million over 3 years. So margins in that, yes, it's -- they vary a bit because some of it is equipment and plants as we install the equipment in Murcia. So some of that will be lower margin than our traditional semiconductor work, but then other elements will relate to professional service type arrangements, the expertise of our staff, the installation of IP. So it would run, we would expect at a higher margin, something much closer to what our -- well, as a margin level, would be very high because some of these staff are already currently employed by us. But yes, we start to be somewhere in the sort of the more traditional margin range. Then yes, as the PR also hopefully highlighted, we were also agreeing that we will be looking to allow them to sell our next-generation semiconductors and other products directly beforehand so that we don't kind of lose momentum or lose too much time. So yes, we would hope that there will be product revenues coming through whilst the center is still under sort of construction. Carlos Moreira: Yes. Maybe, Matt, this is Carlos. So just maybe to develop a bit further on that point. So this deal is actually a very important deal because this is the first personalization center that we sign, right? So the logical to personalization center is that many countries now they are getting concerned about the dependency on semiconductors and they want to have some kind of control on that process. And they start with injecting the keys, although the chips might come from whatever Taiwan, Singapore, whatever, but they want to inject the keys at national level. And those are the machines that John just mentioned. So there is going to be a full transfer of knowledge, equipment, licenses, IP, royalties in order for them to be able to do that. So this is -- and that includes obviously a building ultra secure facility, which we just came actually. We were there yesterday. So we were visiting that facility. So parallel to that, there is going to be -- this investment is a private partnership with the Spanish government SETT. So SETT is sitting in EUR 18 billion, actually, to develop semiconductor capabilities in Spain. So they are investing in Cisco, got EUR 300 million in Barcelona to develop a plant. There are many companies around the world, and they are coming to Spain due to the fact that the government is willing to co-invest with companies, and they would like to develop semiconductor capabilities at national level. Which is okay, right? So they put $20 million, we put $10 million and another start-ups in Murcia, Spain put another $10 million. So obviously for us is we recover our investment, because we have $25 million commitment over the next 3 years. But in the plus of that, as John said, we're selling immediately the semiconductors even before the center is fully operational to the market, and Spain is a high user of IoT, the electrical solar power plants, all that requires IoT connectivity. It requires authentication, required chips on solar panel the agricultural business, which is huge in that area, they are using IoT sensors to monitor water irrigation. So there's a lot of very interesting new applications that we are adding to the ones that we already do with these new generation chips. In plus of that, because SETT is an investor in many other companies, not only us, it creates an ecosystem right? Because the companies where they are also investing, they are creating synergies with other companies that like us now. So we are entering into new agreements like we signed with OdinS and TProtege. Those are local companies, and they are very highly specialized in a specific sector that then we can also bring to other countries. As we are currently negotiating actually, similar experience of those personalization centers in several countries, like including the United States in Arizona, where we are also advancing, also in India also in South Korea, there was last week at MoU signed with the major of civil and many countries are coming to us to say, wow, we really want to use your technology, not only because it's unique, nobody has it in terms of having this post-quantum chip. But in plus of that, you are maybe the only company in the world that is willing to help us at a national level; other companies, they rather centralize this technology, right? So this is creating a very interesting ecosystem for us. And as I mentioned during my introduction, that creates huge synergies with the rest of the companies WISeKey Group has, right? Because once you have those chips deployed at national level, then the next thing is connectivity, then is where the WISeSat satellite makes a lot of sense because we already concrete test on how to connect the satellites directly with sensors, then they are located into IoT devices or device-to-device communication or mobile-to-satellite communication. So that is a totally new industry emerging, and actually WISeSaT is booming, thanks to that, right? And then you have the tokenization, which is also a very interesting technology world first, which is letting machine to pay each other with SEALCOINS, right? So imagine a satellite buying data for another satellite and getting paid with SEALCOINS or a connected car buying data from a plug, electrical plug and do that directly through the car connection to the plug without the need to pay with Visa, MasterCard, right, intermediaries. So this is a very complex technology. People sometimes don't grasp the complexity that we are dealing here. But the good thing is the company is really making a huge progress, right? As each of those verticals are evolving. And they are creating, as I mentioned, this convergence synergy, which is what I believe is going to be the breakthrough in revenue here, is that once you build a very large microchip infrastructure, they start to want to be connected, they start to be transactional. And that creates a very new stream of revenue for the company in the years to come. Matthew Galinko: Appreciate the answer, Carlos, and John, a lot of color and very helpful to see how everything is coming together. I guess in the follow-up, you talked about the $170 million I think the 3-year business pipeline on the SEALSQ press release and conference call, and you repeated it here. Can you talk about how significantly, the TPM is represented in the pipeline versus some of the other applications of what you're working on? Or is TPM kind of a major component of that? Carlos Moreira: It's a mixture between the three, it is a mixture between the QS7001, which is the new chip. And that chip is basically upgrading the existing security of existing chips. So clients, and they are on the legacy chips and they are buying 5 million, 10 million of those chips per year. They want to upgrade now. As you know, out of the $170 million, an important piece is the design wins that the company already have with some of our clients, right? And they are then they are getting concerned now on the new legislation in the United States, but also in Europe actually now, that by 2027, the White House actually there's going to be in a few days, I guess, in a few weeks is going to be White House, similar to what happened on AI. It's going to be on quantum and regulation of quantum, that says companies needs to be quantum resilient already before 2027 and then by 2030, legacy systems will not be authorized anymore in critical infrastructures, right? So because the risk will become huge because everybody is now kind of in agreement and Quantum day arrives in 2030. And if you wait until 2027 to start to get ready for it, it's going to be too late, right? So this regulatory push is making, obviously, and you see that on the evaluation of some Rigetti, IonQ, the wave and SEALSQ, you see that happening now. I mean companies that they are in this quantum realm, they are getting a very strong valuation because it's actually easy to project in the next 10 years, what will be the revenue and the valuation of these companies if that momentum happens and because this is a regulatory type of movement now. It's going to happen. I mean there's no way that companies will not do it because their insurance premium will increase and then the clients who will get concerned on their products are now PQC ready and things like that. So part of the $170 million comes from that. The other priority comes from the TPM, as you say, and that is a bit later on the year. And the rest is coming actually from the centers because in every center that we built, the price is between $40 million to $100 million, depending the country, right, in the United States is a $100 million project. And you need to -- and even in some cases, we might want to invest together with investors to show that we are really serious about it, and this is important to us because we provide the licensing, the technology, the chips, the machines and everything. It becomes also revenue for the company. So this is the breakdown of the $170 million. What is happening now is that clients then they are being using the VaultIC. So VaultIC has been sold already historically 1.6 billion times. So it's a massive community of companies using already our technology. Some of them on a legacy environment, they are now considering to move into post Quantum, like yesterday, we announced a Taiwanese company that is doing ledger technology for storage of Bitcoin, Hashkey storage, and everybody is getting concerned that once Quantum arrives, the blockchain can be compromised. And therefore, people can lose all the bitcoins. And we signed a deal with them where we PQC enabled those devices. They are testing on a small group of devices, but obviously, the normal step is the entire production is going to be PQC ready next year. And I'm sure you're following as analyst the PQC addressable market, which is getting bigger and bigger, because we have, for the time being, we don't really have a clear competitor on PQC. I mean, the possibilities are projecting very high revenue. It becomes very realistic. Very big company. One question I get all the time, say, "Oh, how can you do that?" And I don't know, one of those multibillion-dollar chip manufacturing company don't do it? And the reason is that these are very large companies, and it's very hard for them to defocus from the current technology to just develop a PQC technology play and that takes 3 to 5 years to do it, right? So this is the years we have that we can conquer the market or at least take as much as possible of the addressable market. Matthew Galinko: Carlos. Great color on that. Maybe just last one for me before I jump back in the queue. You touched on commercializing WISe.ART with the 3.0 release and maybe in conjunction with WISeCoin -- SEALCOIN. Can you touch on maybe how you kind of what's the path to commercializing that piece of the business? And what can we expect for that in 2026? Carlos Moreira: So WISe.ART we developed, originally, the concept was that if you have a microchip into an object and that object is secure within microchip and authenticated, let's say, a spare part of a car or a drone or a hardware device, you can create digital twins of this part. And then on the metaverse or being able to regenerate the car, right, transfer directly from the original into the digital twin environment where engineers can play with the digital twin without touching the car. So that still is the design. And obviously, it's a very early business and the people are not doing that yet. The technology is what 3.0 is a complex technology. You have to put an identity on every spare part. And that identity needs to be storing a secure element, secure element injected into the object. The object then generates the digital twin and so on. So we found that art was the easiest way to start. And actually, we were very successful in art. We have now 1,000 of artist and we have thousands of pieces of arts than they have been dematerialized. But then you have these NFT collapse during the last 2 years, NFT companies like OpenSea and others, they just totally collapsed. We have suffered a bit of the misunderstanding of the market and say, "Oh, WISe.ART is an NFT platform," which is not. So we are basically reeducating the market to really see the potential with WISe.ART, which is becoming less maybe art, it is more like industrial generator of digital twin components to be analyzed on a digital environment. And then the SEALCOIN becomes the payment method or whatever you need to do between those devices. I mentioned before it is the machine to machine. So our objective is both companies actually WISe.ART, WISeKey in the identity management. They were very close to create that identity relation. And then we have, as I mentioned, plans to bring SEALCOIN as an exchange. So SEALCOIN will soon be on a topic change. We will give more information soon about that. And that will obviously create a huge amount of potential new diversification of revenue. Also WISeKey acquired 22% of WeCan. So WeCan is another blockchain company that develops -- we did it through the direct investment on SEALSQ. That was the model which we chose at that time. But as we all know, WISeKey controls the interest of SEALSQ. So both companies are working with WeCan in a KYC compliance using blockchain. So this is a very interesting project where you can basically bring web your technology to the financial sector and simplify the process of customers or banks to provide KYC compliance processes and registration. So you see the technology is converging, and that's the beauty. I think in 3 years, you're not going to be talking so many companies, so many products, you're going to be talking really bring Web 3.0 technology and simplify the process of customers of banks to the financial sector and simplify the process of customers of banks to provide KYC compliant processes and registration. So you see the technology is converging, and that's the beauty. I think in 3 years' time, you're not going to be talking so many companies, so many products. You're going to be talking really on Web 3.0 cybersecurity, which is what it's all about and connectivity. And obviously, you need to start somewhere. And the way to start this is by creating those specialized, very focused companies, and they are solving one specific problem. But once this problem is solved, it creates a lot of synergies with the rest of the ecosystem. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Mr. Moreira it seems there are no other questions at this time. I'll turn the floor back to you for final comments. Carlos Moreira: So thank you very much for your help in organizing this call. And thank you very much to Matt and the analysts and they have been following us and also, obviously, our shareholders and investors, that they might be joining the call. If you didn't have the possibility to join, this call has been recorded. We also have, obviously, all the presentations available on our website. And John and I are here available for any further questions you might have. Thank you very much for your attention, and have all a great day. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Heinrich Richter: Good morning, and welcome to Gemfields 2025 Half Year Results Shareholder and Investor Webcast. Sean Gilbertson, CEO; and David Lovett, CFO, will present Gemfields' financial results to the end of June 2025. At the end of the presentation, we will go into Q&A. [Operator Instructions] Before we start, please take a note of the important information in our disclaimer on Slide 2 with a full disclaimer in the appendix. And with that, I'll now pass you on to Sean to start on Slide 3. Sean Gilbertson: Good morning, and welcome. Thank you very much for joining us this morning after what has been a seriously challenging first half for Gemfields. MRM experienced lower premium ruby output, while Kagem suspended mining altogether at the end of 2024 with only limited operations resuming again in May of this year. The beginning of the year was also marred by civil unrest in the wake of Mozambique's disputed general election and of course, the surprise implementation of the 15% export duty on emeralds in Zambia. Both of those issues are now thankfully resolved. These factors, combined with Chinese luxury consumption effectively being offline, contributed to cash flow pressures and certainly tested both our team and our business. With thanks to the strong support from our shareholders for our June rights issue, followed after the period end by the sale of Fabergé for a headline $50 million, we have a considerably improved balance sheet. Significantly, our new processing plant in Mozambique produced its first rubies earlier this month and is expected to be fully operational next month in October. We also reported earlier this month the remarkably strong results from Kagem's auction of higher-quality emeralds, which was a pleasure to see. And as a result, we are now on a sturdier and more optimistic footing for the year ahead. Moving on to Slide 4. It's important to note that with the suspension of the Nairoto gold project and the divestment of Fabergé, we are now better able to focus on our long-standing core strategy of being an Africa-focused miner and marketer of emeralds, rubies, and hopefully, at an appropriate point in the future, sapphires. At this point, I'll hand you over to David for an update on the financials. David? David Lovett: Thank you, Sean, and good morning, everybody. Starting on Slide 6, we will work through our 6 key financial KPIs across the past few years. Starting on the left-hand side, you can clearly see the challenges, as Sean has mentioned, that we've seen in the first half of the year and the impact that has had on the revenues. The group generated $64 million of revenue in the period, which is materially down against H1 in 2024 and H2 in 2024. Kagem contributed $21 million of the $64 million with MRM bringing in $39 million. The rest is down to direct sales. Please note that Fabergé revenues, which were $6 million in this period are not included in here. The Fabergé results were moved to discontinued operations in advance of the sale. Operating expenses in the middle of this slide are down slightly at $69 million. That is primarily based on Kagem's pause in mining between January and May in this period. If we combine the revenues and the operating expenses, we see an EBITDA loss of $4.9 million in the period. We can move to Slide 7, please. Here, we have some more of our financial KPIs, starting on the left-hand side with adjusted earnings per share, where we saw a loss of $0.015 per share when taking into account depreciation, interest costs and taxes. In the middle, we have free cash flow, where we saw a loss of $22 million in the period. This is largely based not only on reduced revenues, but also on the continued investment into PP2, the new plant at MRM. We are now coming to the end of that project, and we are past peak CapEx. We will come back to peak CapEx later in the presentation. Finally, on this slide, we have Gemfields' net debt position at 30th of June, which was $45 million. Again, we will come back to this later in the presentation. We'll now have a look at expenditure in more detail, starting with operating expenses on Slide 8. The OpEx savings seen in H1 are largely due to savings at Kagem as we paused operations between January and May. Development projects have also largely been paused with corporate costs seeing a small increase due to fees in relation to the capital raise. OpEx remains a significant focus for management. But with Kagem resuming mining operations, we should expect an increase in OpEx at Kagem and at the group level in H2. We'll now have a look at CapEx with particular focus on the new plant at MRM. Moving on to Slide 9. You have Kagem on the left-hand side and MRM on the right. Kagem has seen very little CapEx in 2025 based not only on financial constraints, but also the pause in mining. Whilst we don't expect Kagem to return to the levels seen in 2023, we would expect sustaining CapEx to increase against the current levels moving forward. MRM on the right-hand side has seen significant investment in the new plant, and that can clearly be seen in the graph. The orange bars are the expansionary CapEx. We are, as we mentioned, past peak CapEx now. There is approximately 10% due in the second half of this year moving into next year on the contract with consumer, and we'll have a look at the progress on the next slide and then later in the presentation. If we start with the financials of the plant, which is the bottom of this slide, as I mentioned, there is approximately 10% or $7 million left to pay. The final payment may run into 2026 based on progress over the next 6 months. In terms of operational updates, we are pleased to say that rubies have been produced and all key components of the plant are now operational. There are, however, ongoing delays in final completion, particularly SCADA integration, but we expect a fully operational plant by the end of October 2025. As we have mentioned previously, there is a significant stockpile of ore to be processed and ready to go. So once the plant is fully operational, we expect to be able to feed it, and we expect to see significant increases in the quantity of rubies produced. We can now have another look at the net debt position over the history of Gemfields on the next slide. As discussed earlier, we are currently sitting on a net debt position of $45 million. This has improved since December, thanks largely to the rights issue and will continue to improve with the proceeds from the sale of Fabergé and the recent emerald auction, but we have a way to go to get back to a solid net cash position. The cyclical nature of the business can clearly be seen with the yellow dotted line here, which shows your net debt or net cash with auction receivables. But it should be noted that Gemfields has only recently returned any funds to shareholders, which totaled $90 million between May '22 and June 2024. Finally for me, we have a slide on the rights issue, which completed in this period. The $30 million rights issue was completed in June with 82% of our shareholders taking up their rights. We would like to take this opportunity to thank shareholders for their understanding and support throughout this challenging period. I will now hand you back to Sean to run through the operational review for the first half. Sean Gilbertson: Thank you, David. On Slide 14, we reiterate that Gemfields is after the suspension of peripheral projects like the Nairoto Gold project, completion of the June 2025 rights issue, and the divestment of Fabergé, a more streamlined business and has a markedly improved balance sheet, allowing us to focus on optimizing value from our core assets at both Kagem and also MRM. On Slide 15, we set out the key driver of our revenues being the production of gemstones in the premium quality category. As can be seen by the red lines for 2025, Kagem's premium emerald production has been hammered by the suspension of mining during the first 5 months of 2025. That said, the recent very encouraging auction results serve to inform the market that production since the 30th of June 2025 has recovered very nicely indeed, feeding into Kagem's recent happy auction results. Moving east to Montepuez Ruby Mining in the north of Mozambique, we can see that premium ruby production has recovered very nicely. However, because the majority of these premium rubies, which hail from secondary deposits rather than primary deposits come from newer mining areas at MRM called Maningina-5 and Maningina-6, which display higher fluorescence, lighter tones and a higher proportion of pink sapphire, the jury is still out as to what medium-term market perception will be like. Slide 16 shows our production of gemstones in the next tier down from those in the premium category. These gems constitute a far lower percentage of revenue when compared with the premium category gemstones. As can be seen, Kagem has been lagging behind in the first half as a result of the suspension of mining activities during that time. And MRM is tracking well, but with the same caveat surrounding gems from Maningina-5 and Maningina-6, which have different characteristics to our rubies from the Mugloto area and are thus not yet proven in the market. On Slide 17, while our auction schedule remains dynamic depending on market conditions and available production, we hope to have 3 further auctions this year. The first is a ruby mini auction, which kicks off on Monday of next week and completes in the same week. The second is a commercial quality emerald auction likely finishing in early December. And the third is the regular November, December year-end ruby auction, although this depends on the ruby production figures we see in the near term and completion of the second processing plant. Slide 18 depicts the final construction phases of the second processing plant at MRM, showing here the dense media separation plant and its surge bins, a good illustration of the sheer scale of this plant. Slide 19 depicts the wider overview of MRM's second processing plant, an investment that has cost the group some $70 million. At the far left is the very large circular thickener and [indiscernible] unit. At the top of the image is the tunnel feeder, which feeds dry screen material to the primary scrubber. And on the right-hand side is the scavenger plant clad in green, replete with UV sorters to triple check that rubies have not been missed after concentrate is passed through the sort house. This project is a very exciting and hard-won development for MRM, and we send praise to the team at MRM with a lot of gratitude for delivering a very complex project in particularly trying circumstances over the last 2 years. On Slide 20, we summarize our ambition that the recent strength in emerald prices will yield a solid commercial quality emerald auction results in the fourth quarter of this year. We also note that the ramp-up in MRM's second processing plant is expected to materially bolster ruby revenues over the next 6 to 12 months. In summary, having enjoyed a particularly challenging first half in 2025, Gemfields is in a markedly better position than it was 6 months ago and has much to look forward to given the improvement in the emerald market and the imminent final completion of MRM's second processing plant. I'll now hand you back to Heinrich. Heinrich Richter: Thank you, Sean. [Operator Instructions] The first question received is as follows: What are production expectations at MRM in H2 2025? And what will the ramp-up look like in 2026 when at full capacity? Any guidance on expected premium ruby production? Sean Gilbertson: Thank you very much, Heinrich. Obviously, one of the difficulties in our business is the nature of our geology where we do experience 2 types of volatility. The first is in the number of carats per tonne of ore, that goes up and down. And the second type of volatility is in the actual quality of those carats. Obviously, we've built MRM specifically to increase markedly the ruby production at MRM. But with that plant being completed during the course of October, it's too early for us to start predicting precisely what kind of rubies we're going to get. And of course, we are also processing ore from the newer areas. So I hesitate to start making forecasts before we have a couple of runs on the scoreboard. Heinrich Richter: Understandable. Next question is, how much of the good result from the recent emerald auction is down to the lack of recent sales and pent-up demand? Sean Gilbertson: So good question. Thank you, Heinrich. We obviously had a really fantastic auction result for higher-quality emeralds this month. And we would say that the key driver for those results lay in the quality of the emeralds that we were able to put before our customers. So that would be the overwhelming contributing factor. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Moving on to the next question. Once cash is being generated again and a buffer built, how will it be allocated between M&A, dividends or other projects? Any steer on this would be a good thing. Sean Gilbertson: Thank you, Heinrich. In short, our principal objective right now is to bolster the balance sheet. As David indicated, we're still in a slightly net debt position. And so capital allocation will be tailored towards improving the balance sheet situation. And we would suggest that in 2026, we'll focus on doing that and the chances of a dividend, therefore, I think, are muted. Heinrich Richter: On to the next question. Why have you sold premium investment in Fabergé, thereby creating an even less diversified business, but you are holding on to your investment in Sedibelo? Sean Gilbertson: Good question. In short, wholly owned premium investments like Fabergé are far easier to sell than small minority interests in fairly difficult platinum deposits. I'm personally very sad to see Fabergé sold. But given all the uncertainty in the world today and the many surprise challenges that we've endured over the last 12 months, we needed more fuel in the tank to guard against the risk of other things going wrong. So unfortunately, we literally had to sell the family silver. Heinrich Richter: Next question that came in. What is the latest strategic developments been at your emerald competitor in Zambia, who flooded the market last year? Have they been more disciplined in supplying the market of late? And what is your expectation in this regard going forward? Sean Gilbertson: Very important question. We certainly struggled with that during the second half of last year. Our competitor is, in fact, presently running an auction in Dubai. And based on what we've seen so far this year, we would describe the situation as somewhat alleviated and definitely better than what we saw in H2 of last year. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Next question, how many auctions will it take to establish the value of the new qualities of rubies? Sean Gilbertson: Good question. We had a similar experience with the introduction many moons ago when MRM first started of the Mugloto material. We actually started MRM by mining primary rubies in the Maninginas area, whereas these newer rubies that we've been talking about today come from secondary deposit areas in Maninginas. But when we moved from the primary deposits in Maninginas across to Mugloto, we did see that it also took the market some time and a few auctions in order to understand the Mugloto material, cut and polish it, sell it to customers, see what the market reaction is like. So in order to give an estimate, and there's a degree of judgment here, of course, and perhaps some subjectivity. But I would estimate anywhere between 3 and 5 auctions would give the market a good opportunity to understand what the material does. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Moving towards the longer term, do you foresee any threat from synthetic gems now or in the future? Sean Gilbertson: Excellent and important question. That's one that we get a lot. And I am very pleased to advise that it is actually a movie that the colored gemstone industry has seen before. And lab-grown rubies were first created via the flame fusion process in 1890, not 1990, but 1890. And if you Google Geneva rubies, you will find the entire story. And by -- I think it was 1910, they were producing something like 3 tonnes a year of lab-grown ruby. And of course, as we're already seeing in the diamond business, the ruby market back then bifurcated very seriously. And as the lab-grown rubies became better and better, bigger and bigger and cheaper and cheaper, they obviously became a very different product category. And today, you can buy a lab-grown ruby on various online platforms of some size for a few hundred dollars whereas the ruby, the natural earth made ruby equivalent would cost you tens of thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. We saw the same thing happen some decades later in the emerald business. And so this is kind of very old news as it were for the colored gemstone market. And I'm pleased to say we've transcended it well before I was born. Heinrich Richter: Understood. Now on to a technical question. Does MRM's depreciation and amortization charge reflect the 5 years' life of mine? David Lovett: Thanks, Heinrich. So in short, yes, it does. I believe this question stems from the significant amount of CapEx and therefore, the capitalized costs of the new plant coming online later this year. That is something we are reviewing with our auditors to find a sensible way of accounting for that increase as a short life of mine does mean you may see very large charges going through. And so we will -- currently, the answer is yes. Hopefully, by the year-end or certainly moving into next year, we will have a slightly different way of accounting for that capitalized cost. Heinrich Richter: In terms of ERM, when will Gemfields restart that program? Sean Gilbertson: Another good question. Thank you, Heinrich. So we do have a team on site at ERM at the moment. Obviously, they spend quite a bit of time looking after the wider deposit and guarding against illegal miner entry. And we are also conducting basic geological work, including sampling, processing through Bushman jigs and getting a better understanding of the ruby profile and the size distribution and so forth. We are not yet in a position where we are going to make a further investment in, for example, a plant at ERM, which ERM would need, certainly not of the scale of the one that we've just built at MRM. And therefore, we're going to continue with the ERM as per the status quo, namely basic geological work and looking after the license area. So certainly a notch above care and maintenance, if you will. And depending on how 2026 goes, what we see in the emerald market, what happens with our ruby revenues, we will take a view as to what the correct point is to move forward with the ERM. Heinrich Richter: Staying in Mozambique, did the first half disturbances at MRM affect production? And if so, do you know by how much? Sean Gilbertson: We don't have a specific figure that we can point to. But yes, certainly, our production was affected in December of 2024. The market may recall, we actually did have to close down the mine for a period after we evacuated following the civil unrest attack. And in the wake of those disturbances, the number of illegal miners that were coming on to the concession for probably the first 90 days of this year ran in the order of 800 to 1,200 people and per day, that is, and that was certainly very disruptive to our operations. Heinrich Richter: Understood. And sticking with MRM, diving a bit deeper, what are the expectations of production costs with the increases at MRM when production triples? Will there be efficiencies? Sean Gilbertson: Yes is the answer. And those efficiencies should be material. And obviously, our unit costs, both in terms of the production of premium rubies and overall carats and of course, our total rock handling unit costs should come down significantly. David Lovett: Just one thing to add there as well, Heinrich. I think it's worth investors being aware that we are currently in discussions around possible contractor mining as we ramp up things at MRM. So that would have an impact. We don't have those quotes in front of us at this point, but we will update the market as and when we have a better idea of cost increases. . Heinrich Richter: Understood. Turning to Kagem. With the recovery of the emerald markets, can some of the recent impairment at Kagem be reversed? David Lovett: So in short, yes. We made the decision. So there is headroom, significant headroom at the interim period when we reviewed that project. We made the decision that based on effectively 1 auction and 2 months of mining, it wasn't the right time to do it. We'll then have another look at the year-end with the auditors to see where Kagem is, but that write-back is certainly possible. It's a question of timing and how confident we are that the market has truly recovered rather than a one-off good auction. . Heinrich Richter: Thank you, David. [Operator Instructions] I'm moving now on to the last question on my feed. Do you have any imminent activity that would enable a value and time line to be placed against Nairoto's licensing prospect given the present gold market and its potential scale? Sean Gilbertson: We have recently received an updated report from SRK based on the last set of drilling and assay results before we shutted the project. And the bulk of the gold mineralization that was in the inferred category has now shifted across to the indicated category in the JORC Code, which is obviously an increase in confidence. And we have essentially identified an economically mineable gold deposit for a specialist gold mining company. We identified only one of the en echelon lenses that these types of deposits are known for, and there should be further en echelon lenses containing gold mineralization, but that is work that somebody else is going to have to do. We have a number of parties that are potentially interested in the Nairoto Gold deposit. However, it is located well to the north of Montepuez Ruby Mining in Cabo Delgado province, and therefore, it is a fairly tricky jurisdiction for most mining operators to set up operations and then conduct their activities. So that's a difficulty that we're addressing at the moment, but we'll obviously keep the market updated to the extent that there's anything to say. Heinrich Richter: Well understood. And with that, we have no further questions. We'd like to thank you all for joining us this morning. If you have any further questions or would like to speak one-on-one, please reach out to us at ir@gemfields.com. Enjoy the rest of your day. We will close the call now. Thank you, and goodbye.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to Quhuo '25 H1 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Qishu Wang. Please go ahead. Qishu Wang: Thank you, operator. Hello, everyone. Welcome to Quhuo's First Half Year of 2025 Earnings Conference Call. The company's results were released earlier today and are available on our website. On this call today are Leslie Yu, Chairman and CEO; and CFO, Barry Ba. Leslie will review business operations and company highlights followed by Barry, who will discuss financials and guidance. They will be available to answer your questions in the Q&A session that follows. Before we begin, I would like to remind you that this call may contain forward-looking statements made under the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Ligation Reform Act of 1995. Such statements are based on management's current expectations and current market and operating conditions related to the events that involve known or unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, all of which are different to predict -- are difficult to predict and many of which are beyond the company's control, which may cause the company's actual results, performance or achievements to differ materially from those in the forward-looking statements. Further information regarding these and other risks, uncertainties and factors is included in the company's filings with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. The company does not undertake any obligation to update any forward-looking statements as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required under the law. With that, I will now turn the call over to our Chairman and CEO, Mr. Leslie Yu. Please go ahead. Leslie Yu: Thank you, Qishu, and thank you all for joining our 2025 first half earnings conference call. In the first half of 2025, China's local service industry experienced significant structural shifts with intense market competition becoming the new normal. Against this backdrop, Quhuo has adhered to a clear dual track strategy. First, optimizing the structure of our core business to pursue quality growth. And second, accelerating the development of second core business to strengthen the group's earnings foundation. I will now share our operating performance and the strategic progress over the first 6 months of 2025 along these two dimensions. And also look ahead to Quhuo's future vision. For the first half of 2025, Q4 achieved total revenue of RMB 1.13 billion. Let me begin with our core business, on-demand delivery solutions. During the first half of 2025, particularly in the second quarter, the domestic food delivery market saw significant changes in the competitive landscape. These changes were mainly reflected in two areas. First, the delivery was surpassed a part of the cost burden to service providers. To respond to rapid order fluctuation and safeguard service quality, we made targeted investments in workforce management and operations. Second, structural adjustments by major upstream customers received the competitive landscape, leveraging our long-standing service capabilities and reputation, we took on new business share, while integrating and launching this new sites added short-term costs. Beginning in May this year, we observed signs of increased market share, which we believe will lay a solid foundation for scalable profitability. Although these measures placed pressure on short-term profitability, we believe the company's overall financials remain sound. At the same time, we proactively closed a number of underperforming sites, and concentrated resources on higher return areas in order to further strengthen our overall network health. These initiatives reflect both our confidence in and commitment to the long-term value of on-demand delivery business. We believe that as the integration period ends and operating efficiency improves, the scale benefits and the profit potential of the business may become more evident in the second half of 2025. While consolidating our core business, our second core business housekeeping and accommodation solutions and vehicle export solutions are now contributing meaningful profitability. In the first half of 2025, our housekeeping and accommodation segment reported strong growth, with revenue up 70.8% year-over-year, and gross profit up 63.4% year-on-year, becoming an important driver in optimizing Quhuo's profit structure. This performance was primarily driven by our two business units. First, Chengtu Homestay achieved 83.6% revenue growth, and 390.8% gross profit growth with gross margin rising to 55.2%. We believe this strong performance reflects our replicable operating model and effective marketing. Our self-developed mini program now fully rolled out, allow users to browse and search for home listings, communicate with hosts and complete reservation and payments in one seamless process. This closed-loop system greatly improves the booking experience, making it faster, more transparent and more reliable for both guests and hosts, while also enhancing operational efficiency. Based on this mature system, Chengtu plans to open that platform to more homestay operations in China, providing standardized management tools and marketing support and transitioning from a property management service provider to a platform operator. Second, LaiLai's accommodation business recorded a 63.6% year-over-year increase in revenue, primarily supported by its new cooperation with Beike, a leading housing transactions and service platform in China. This cooperation extends beyond the traditional sales with LaiLai providing a more comprehensive property service solution for the properties listed on Beike's platform, covering property preparation and maintenance, ongoing household services and tailored offerings. In service delivery, LaiLai has translated years of localized service experience and technological advantage into practice. By leveraging its proprietary digital dispatch system, it integrates cleaning, repair and other service orders into a unified scheduling platform, supporting efficient management and high-quality fulfillment. This cooperation already covers Chengdu, Beijing, Shanghai, Ningbo and Jinan, and is expected to expand to Shenzhen, Guangzhou, and other cities. We believe it may generate scalable and sustainable revenue growth for LaiLai. LaiLai's ability to deliver standardized high-quality property services provider provides a solid foundation for new initiatives. Building on this, we also participate in the Better Life #1 Fund Trust plan initiated by China Foreign Economy and Quhuo Trust. Phase 1 and Phase 2 of this plan totaled RMB 60 million are designed to enhance the quality and the rental value of intrusted properties through standardized renovation and long-term asset management, ultimately generating stable returns for investors. Within this project, LaiLai is responsible for upgrading property quality and providing ongoing property management services, ensuring continuous value creation and compliant operations. Meanwhile, Quhuo in its role as a strategic partner works alongside the Trust Fund to design the pathway from operating assets to data assets, and ultimately to financial assets and jointly manage and share in the returns. Through this cooperation, we have put into practice the four pathways from business operations to financial value. Leverage the standardized renovation and service capabilities built by LaiLai as solid operating assets, reply on the real and valuable data assets continuously accumulated through operations for risk pricing and asset management and optimally achieve asset financialization through trust corporation, completing a critical upgrade to financial assets. This process not only broadens the Qihuo's business foundry, but also provides new direction for the integration of industry and finance. These advances in the housekeeping and accommodation segment not only provide financial returns, but also support our business model initiatives, provide opportunities for longer-term growth for Qihuo. Our third major growth driver comes from international business. In the first half of 2025, used car exports achieved 17.8% gross profit growth with gross margin improving from 4.2% to 7.0%. We believe this reflects the continued optimization and upgrading of our business model. We currently operate with two models in Quhuo. The first is traditional sales model, under which vehicles are sold upon export with a cash cycle about 3 to 4 months with a gross margin typically at around 7%. The second is the technological empowerment and resources cooperation model, which we believe to carry greater potential. Here, we leverage our accumulated technology, operations and management expertise from domestic ride building sector and package solutions for overseas partners to jointly operate vehicles and share with long-term higher margin income. This model offers significantly higher profitability and unique economics with a payback period of roughly 24 months, which means revenue growth may be realized more gradually, but on a stronger foundation. Our cooperation in Azerbaijan with Volt Auto and Bolt provides an example of this model. By deploying our SaaS platform and management expertise, we are helping partners shift from onetime vehicle sales to a recurring service-based model. Till now, hundreds of vehicles have been under management with a project level margin of 43%, well above the project model. The success of this pilot has already led partners to place multiple follow-on orders, validating its replicability and long-term profit potential. Looking ahead, we plan to draw on the asset financialization experience gained in the accommodation segment to address cash cycle challenges in this model, enabling broader expansion into new markets, driving our international business to evolve from linear growth based on vehicle sales to a higher quality development model of maintaining scale through sales and creating profit through operations. We believe this approach building a global automotive ecosystem through technology empowerment and management expertise will raise our earnings ceiling and establish more durable competitive advantages. To conclude, in the first half of 2025, despite pressures in the on-demand delivery business, we maintained resistance in our core business and made progress in our second business. We believe these results reflect further the soundness of our strategy and the strength of our execution. Looking forward, we plan to remain focused on our dual track strategy of optimizing core operations and cultivating new growth. On our core business side, we recently entered into a cooperation with JD, Jingdong Takeaway, to provide delivery services in some cities. We believe this not only demonstrates recognition of our operational capabilities, but may also substantially add incremental volume under the new competitive landscape in on-demand delivery. On the new initiative side, our supply chain empowerment partnership with New World has been progressing steadily. Since May this year, it has generated approximately RMB 14.4 million in revenue and is expected to contribute approximately RMB 60 million for the full year. We view this as an early milestone in our transition from a fulfillment service provider to a supply chain enabler, which may create new opportunities to capture additional value from our delivery network. We plan to continue focusing on our operational efficiency and refining our business models while seeking key market opportunities in order to deliver more sustainable long-term returns for our investors. This concludes my remarks. I will now turn the call over to our CFO, who will provide a detailed overview of our financial performance. Zhen Ba: Thanks, Leslie. Hello, everyone. This is Barry Ba, the CFO of Quhuo Technology Limited. Welcome to Q2, First Half of 2025 conference call. Please be reminded all the amounts told here will be in RMB unless stated otherwise. Total revenue decreased by 30.2% from RMB 1.619 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2024, to RMB 1,131.4 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2025, due to the following reasons. Revenue from on-demand delivery solutions were RMB 1,039 million, representing a decrease of 30.7% from RMB 1,499 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2024, primarily because we optimized our business by disposing of several underperforming service stations, which led to a decrease in the revenue scale. Revenue from mobility service solutions, consisting of shared-bike maintenance, ride-hailing, vehicle export solutions and freight service solutions were RMB 57.4 million, representing a decrease of 42.8% from RMB 100.5 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2024, primarily due to one, a decrease in units of vehicles sold in our vehicle export solutions business as a result of introduction of new business model and a decrease in purchase of vehicles for sales; and second, optimization of our business by ceasing from our ride-hailing solutions service in several underperforming service cities. Revenue from housekeeping and accommodation solutions and other services were RMB 34.8 million, representing a sharp increase of 70.8% from RMB 20.4 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2024, primarily due to the adoption of online promotion channels in addition to traditional platform-based customer acquisition. Cost of revenues were RMB 1,127 million, representing a decrease of 29.3% Y-o-Y, primarily attributable to the decrease in our labor costs and the service fees paid to service station managers in line with the decrease in the revenue. As a result of foregoing, our gross profit were RMB 24.8 million and compared with RMB -- sorry, as a result of foregoing, our gross profit were RMB 24.8 million and RMB 4.1 million in the 6 months ended 2024 and 2025, respectively. G&A expenses were RMB 76.3 million, representing an increase of 7.7% from RMB 70.9 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2024, primarily attributable to: one, an increase of professional service fee from RMB 14.5 million in the first half of 2024 to RMB 25.2 million in the first year of -- first half of 2025, due to the issuance cost of ADSs occurred in the first half of 2025 of RMB 9.7 million; and the second, increase of welfare and business development expense and office expense from RMB 12.4 million in the first half of 2024 to RMB 15.1 million in the first half of 2025, resulting from the expansion into new cities for its housekeeping service and offset by a decrease of labor cost from RMB 36.6 million in the first half of 2024 to RMB 30.6 million in the first half of 2025 as a result of our expense control through technological optimization. R&D expenses were RMB 3.6 million, representing a decrease of RMB 27.3 million from RMB 4.9 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2024, primarily due to the decrease in the average compensation level for our R&D personnel as we restructured our R&D team. We recorded a gain of disposal of assets, net of RMB 7 million and RMB 5.7 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2024 and 2025, respectively, primarily due to the transfer of certain long-term assets to third parties. Our interest expense remained stable at RMB 2.2 million and RMB 2.3 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2025 and 2024, respectively, primarily relating to the stability in our average short-term bank borrowings. We recorded other income, net of RMB 1 million in the 6 months ended by June 30, 2025, compared to other loss, net, of RMB 3.1 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2024, primarily due to the disposal of investment in the mutual fund in the second half of 2024. We recorded income tax benefit of RMB 17.9 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2025, as compared to income tax benefit of RMB 2.6 million in the 6 months ended June 30, 2024, primarily due to the reversal of unrecognized tax benefit recognized in the previous years and has been passed the retroactive period. As a result of foregoing, we have net loss of RMB 53 million in the 6 months ended of June 30, 2025, compared to an increase of 14% from RMB 46.5 million in the 6 months by June 30, 2024. EBITDA loss were RMB 60.2 million as compared to EBITDA loss of RMB 34.8 million in the first half of 2024. In terms of balance sheet, as of June 30, 2025, the company has cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash of RMB 33.1 million and short-term debt of RMB 118 million. And this concludes my prepared remarks. Thank you for your attention. We are now pleased to take your questions. Operator, please go ahead. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question today comes from [ Sally Gao ] of Private Investor. Unknown Analyst: My question is, could you explain Quhuo's specific role in the Trust corporation and what impact this cooperation may have on future financial performance? Leslie Yu: Okay. This is Leslie, and thank you for the question. Our cooperation with the Trust builds on our traditional BPO fulfillment services, but we take a step further. We're turning business revenues into data assets and then into investor financial assets. So this is not only strengthen liquidity, but also increase asset returns. Quhuo is one of the initiator of this project and core operator. To be more specific, that is operational base, it makes sure that our properties are upgraded and managed at a higher standard, creating stable rental income. On top of that, Quhuo Group works to pool the receivables generated. And through trust structures, we monetize the future cash flows in advance and unlock capital. The financial impact is quite direct. First, it brings in higher margin income such as asset management fees and capital gains, which is very different from traditional labor services and improves our profit mix. Second, it also improves cash flow, giving us more flexibility to expand both our core and new business. So this is not just a single business success. It proves our new model of combining on-the-ground operations with financial empowerment, opening up a lighter, more profitable and sustainable growth path for the company. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session and concludes our conference call. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to Fractyl Health REMAIN-1 Midpoint Cohort Data Call. As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I will now turn the call over to Brian Luque, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Development at Fractyl. Brian, you may begin. Brian Luque: Thank you. This morning, we issued a press release that outlines the topics we plan to discuss today. This release is available at www.fractyl.com under the Investors tab. Presenting today will be Dr. Harith Rajagopalan, Co-Founder and Chief Executive Officer of Fractyl Health. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that during this call, we make forward-looking statements, which involve risks and uncertainties that may cause actual results to differ materially from our forward-looking statements. We provide a comprehensive list of risk factors in our SEC filings, including the quarterly report on Form 10-Q filed on August 12, 2025, which I encourage you to review. Any forward-looking statements on the call are subject to substantial risks and uncertainties, speak only as of the call's original date, and we undertake no obligation to update or revise any of the statements, even if subsequent events cause the company's views to change. It is now my pleasure to call -- to pass the call over to Harith. Harith Rajagopalan: Thank you, Brian. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us this morning. Today is a milestone moment for Fractyl and for the field of obesity. For the first time ever, we are presenting the first prospective randomized double-blind controlled data from the REMAIN-1 midpoint cohort, in which we showed that Revita prevented weight regain 3 months after GLP-1 discontinuation. The data we're presenting today represent the beginning of a new potential therapeutic category in obesity post GLP-1 weight maintenance, a field that we believe Fractyl is uniquely positioned to lead. And today's results are the start of a period of momentum and acceleration with 4 weight maintenance data readouts in the next year, culminating in top line pivotal data and potential PMA filing in the second half of 2026. Today, we've also announced that we expect to have cash to fund operations into early 2027 through these key milestones. We believe this is a moment where Fractyl could step into the forefront of what comes next after GLP-1s, persistent weight loss maintenance. When we founded Fractyl, we started with a bold hypothesis that duodenal dysfunction is a root cause in obesity and that mucosal ablation can lead to a safe, scalable and durable effect. Decades of diet-induced injury caused duodenal dysfunction, disrupt gut brain signaling, fuel insulin resistance and to drive weight gain in millions of people. By resurfacing and regenerating the duodenal lining, we believe we can restore normal signaling, reset hunger control and create a durable metabolic reset. In prior clinical studies, Revita has been shown to lead to sustained improvements in weight and hemoglobin A1C that lasted for up to 2 years of durable metabolic benefit, and Revita has a large safety database showing excellent tolerability with side effects that have generally been mild, infrequent and transient. Revita's effects in these clinical studies also occurred rapidly within 1 to 3 months and were sustained for up to 2 years. The question now is whether Revita can prevent weight regain after the discontinuation of GLP-1 drugs because this has become the single most important need in obesity today. Even though they are effective, most patients stop GLP-1 drugs within a year and weight and metabolic rebound occur rapidly upon discontinuation. The first symptoms are profound hunger and food noise, often occurring within weeks of treatment discontinuation. Patients stopping GLP-1s represent the hardest-to-treat patient population within obesity. And for this reason, Revita was granted breakthrough device designation for post GLP-1 weight maintenance from the FDA and why this is a hard-to-treat population is a compelling first population for Revita's first clinical demonstration in obesity. Our REMAIN-1 program is modeled off Eli Lily's SURMOUNT-4 study, in which patients who were given tirzepatide for 36 weeks quickly regained almost all of the weight they had lost after stopping therapy. Let's start with the key takeaways from our data today. The REMAIN-1 midpoint cohort randomized 45 subjects to Revita versus sham after stopping GLP-1, and the results are a resounding success, supporting the potential safety, efficacy and strategic positioning of Revita in a post-GLP-1 weight maintenance category. First, there was clear and unmistakable evidence of Revita's activity already at 3 months. Revita patients actually lost 2.5% more body weight even after stopping tirzepatide, while sham patients regained 10% of their weight. That is a meaningful and clinically significant 12.5% treatment difference with strong statistical significance and a p-value of 0.014. Second, just as important, Revita has continued to show an excellent safety and tolerability profile through 3 months, no device-related serious adverse events have been reported, and side effects, again, were infrequent, transient and mild. Third, the midpoint cohort was deliberately designed to replicate the pivotal cohort with the same protocol, patient population, inclusion and exclusion criteria, clinical trial sites and treating physicians, with the goal of ensuring the greatest possible similarity to our ongoing pivotal cohort. Today's data also represent important evidence that if Revita can succeed in this hard-to-treat population, we believe it also opens the door for Revita as a potential backbone therapy across a spectrum of obesity and metabolic disease. Our development path has been disciplined and staged with multiple clinical cohorts studied in weight maintenance concurrently. REVEAL-1 is an open-label cohort designed to evaluate Revita's potential benefit in the real world with patients who need to or want to stop GLP-1s. The REMAIN-1 midpoint cohort is a pilot, randomized, sham-controlled proof-of-concept study in post-GLP-1 weight maintenance, and the pivotal cohort is a single registrational study required for approval in the U.S., with randomization expected to be complete in early 2026 and top line data and potential PMA filing expected in the second half of '26. As a reminder, in June, we presented open-label data from the REVEAL-1 open-label cohort, suggesting that Revita can potentially prevent weight regain after stopping GLP-1s. REVEAL-1 showed at the time that 12 of 13 patients maintained weight loss at 3 months after stopping tirzepatide, with 6 of 13 actually losing further weight. This is far better than the expected 5% to 6% weight regain that would have been predicted at that time point. These were intriguing data, but they were 13 subjects and they were only open label. For this reason, we enrolled the midpoint cohort, a randomized sham-controlled study, which enrolled 45 adults with obesity without type 2 diabetes, GLP-1 naive, started on tirzepatide and titrated to achieve greater than 15% weight loss. Once they hit 15% weight loss, tirzepatide was stopped and patients were then randomized 2:1 Revita versus sham. In the midpoint cohort of the 45 patients who were randomized, 29 were in the Revita arm versus 16 in sham, with 100% retention through 3 months across multiple clinical trial sites. Procedures were executed consistently and with high quality, showing the feasibility and scalability of this technique. All 45 randomized subjects are included in the safety and efficacy analysis today. Screening demographics show that our patients mirror the real-world GLP-1 population with an average BMI of 37, 100 kilograms prior to starting a GLP-1, 80% of the population were female, many had pre-diabetes. These are the patients doctors see every day, meaning that the REMAIN-1 study is broadly relevant to the obesity crisis as it exists today in the United States. After tirzepatide, both arms lost 18% of their body weight over a period of 4 to 6 months. They lost 40 pounds in that period of time before the tirzepatide was taken away. This study was designed to create some of the world's hungriest humans. The physiologic drive to regain weight after stopping tirzepatide is enormous, and this was the toughest possible test of Revita's potential to maintain weight loss, a rigorous stress test, if you will, for Revita in weight maintenance. And that's why the results we're about to show you are so striking. At 3 months post discontinuation, Revita patients lost an additional 2 kilograms of body weight on top of the 18 kilograms of body weight that they lost during the tirzepatide run-in period. Sham patients on the other hand, regained 8 of the 18 kilograms that they had lost. That is a 10-kilogram treatment difference with strong statistical significance of p equals 0.014. The sham curve looks like one would expect, an immediate steady weight regain. But the Revita curve is different. Patients not only maintain their weight loss, but they actually lost more weight even after stopping tezeptide. Here are the same data in terms of percent total body weight and confidence intervals, unmistakable evidence that Revita prevented weight regain with clinically and statistically significant results with an end of only 45 randomized patients. This is the first randomized blinded study, suggesting that weight maintenance can be possible without chronic drug therapy. This is a game changer because it challenges the core assumption that obesity care must orbit around lifelong medical therapy. It shows that a metabolic reset may in fact be possible. Now as compelling as a demonstration of Revita activity is, the tolerability profile and safety data are equally compelling. Here's what we saw, no device-related serious adverse events, just 4 mild, self-limited, procedure-related adverse events often seen with endoscopy. These excellent tolerability data are consistent with Revita's prior clinical study experience and are a huge asset when compared to GLP-1 drugs themselves in the management of the disease. That's it. We believe the data suggests that Revita could offer a potential off-ramp that can be safe, tolerable, scalable and importantly, consistent with the type of procedures that endoscopists deliver for their patients every day. That's why safety here is more important than a data point. It's a key market enabler. The midpoint cohort is designed to mirror the design and execution of the ongoing pivotal study, same inclusion and exclusion criteria, same sites, same physicians and same endpoints. In the pivotal cohort, we will measure the percent of patients -- percentage of total body weight regained at 6 months and the responder rate in the Revita arm at 12 months. This pivotal study is fully enrolled, and we are randomizing ahead of our previously reported schedule. We anticipate completing randomizations in early 2026, whereas we had previously guided to H1 2026, with top line pivotal data and potential PMA filing expected in the second half of '26. This is a disciplined path to potential commercialization. The midpoint cohort has already strengthened confidence in Revita's potential to safely and effectively maintain weight loss, and the pivotal cohort is the next logical step and it is running ahead of schedule. At 3 months, we have already seen clear statistically significant evidence of Revita's effect, with a 12.5% treatment difference compared to sham. In our prior clinical work, early weight maintenance signals at 1 to 3 months were highly durable at longer time points. Meanwhile, the sham arm would be predicted to continue to gain weight based on the results from tirzepatide withdrawal from Lilly's SURMOUNT-4 study. And because the midpoint cohort was deliberately designed to mirror our pivotal cohort, again, same protocol, same site, same treating physicians; these results today provide strong read-through to what we may expect to see at the pivotal's 6-month primary endpoint. Taken together, the midpoint cohort gives us confidence in the pivotal study design and reinforce Revita's potential to be the first therapy for post GLP-1 weight maintenance. Enrollment in our pivotal study was incredibly fast and finished 3 months ahead of our most optimistic scenarios. At some centers, demand outstripped capacity, and it became obvious to us there is clearly extraordinary demand for a product that has the potential to be an off-ramp from GLP-1s. For investors, we believe this should be seen as an early proxy for potential commercial adoption if we successfully develop and obtain approval. And for physicians, it validates that this procedure can fit into existing clinical practice. It underscores the incredible unmet need that we are targeting. Patients are not just willing, they are eager to find a durable alternative that will help them maintain their body weight loss after stopping medicines. Now let's take a step back and talk about the potential commercial implications of what you have just seen. If approved, we believe Revita could be commercially attractive because it can fit seamlessly into existing endoscopy practice. GI suites already have the infrastructure, and endoscopists already perform similar procedures at scale. On the payer side, the story is just as compelling. Health plans are grappling with the sustainability of lifelong GLP-1 spending. Revita has the potential to offer something that they are actively seeking, a durable solution for long-term weight maintenance. Early payer feedback has been encouraging, and we believe our pivotal data will be an inflection point for reimbursement and coverage. From a go-to-market perspective, if approved, we are planning to deploy a proven sales model. A sales force would place Revita into hospitals and endoscopy centers. And it is worth noting that there are 800,000 patients with obesity who are on a GLP-1, who will get an endoscopy this year already for other reasons. Endoscopy suites are already calling patients and telling them to stop their GLP-1 prior to these endoscopies. And most of these patients do not want to be on a GLP-1 drug for the rest of their lives. We believe many of them would choose Revita, and this is a readily accessible patient population who are already in the clinics of our treating physicians. To summarize, the midpoint cohort achieved its goal at 3 months, one, clear evidence of activity in maintaining weight after stopping GLP-1 in the hardest-to-treat obesity population with highest unmet need; two, a clean safety profile and tolerability thus far; three, strengthened confidence in the potential for success in the pivotal cohort. Looking ahead, we look forward to 4 major weight maintenance readouts in the next 4 quarters. The randomized midpoint cohort will have 6-month data readout in Q1 2026, the pivotal cohort is randomizing ahead of schedule. We expect to have top line data and potential PMA filing in H2 2026. And it's worth asking, what does this mean for where Revita can go from here? The clinical data are highly compelling and the potential commercial value proposition to stakeholders is clear. We believe that Revita has a potential to have a place, not just for maintenance, but also for induction, not just for GLP-1, but also alongside GLP-1 as a potentially true new backbone therapy in the management of obesity. This is a rare opportunity to develop and establish such a backbone therapy. We are not competing in the GLP-1 race, we are aiming to build what comes next. With Revita, Fractyl is positioned to lead the new era of obesity and metabolic disease care. And with that, I would like to thank the people who make this work possible. To our employees, thank you for your relentless drive and belief in our mission. To the physicians and investigators advancing our clinical programs with care and commitment, we are so proud to partner with you. And to the patients participating in our trials, thank you for your courage and your trust. To our investors, thank you for your continued support and conviction. Operator, we are now ready to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Rohit [ Basin ] with Morgan Stanley. Unknown Analyst: This is Rohit on for Mike. Congratulations on the great data. So just in terms of the patients that you saw lose weight, can you just talk about what percentage of the 29 patients lost weight? And was there anything unique about these patients? Harith Rajagopalan: Rohit, as you know, when we saw the open-label data, you -- there was a significant plurality of the patients who lost weight and most of the patients maintained body weight. We're seeing a similar profile in the Revita patients -- in the Revita arm in the study as well. Unknown Analyst: Got it. Okay. And then just a second question, just any read-throughs to the 6-month data? What did you learn from this study? Harith Rajagopalan: I think we've given ourselves a lot of confidence in our biostatistical powering and in the design and in our teams and the site execution of this study. And I think that we will have important 6-month readouts coming. In Q4, we'll have open-label data from the REVEAL-1 cohort. And in Q1, we'll be able to report these 45 patients, randomized patients' 6-month data. And so we look forward to being able to elaborate that profile in our upcoming milestones. Operator: Our next question comes from Umer Raffat with Evercore ISI. Umer Raffat: Congrats on the data. Can we touch up on three points, if I may. First, the data is obviously very unique and very intriguing at month 3. Can you speak to the relevance of what we see on weight gain through month 3 and the implications on a longer follow-up? Number one. Number two, there's some standard error data that's disclosed here. If you try to back out the implied standard deviation using the ends we do know, could you just speak to sort of the standard deviation around the data points being shown and if there's any outlier effect driving that? And then finally, look, the expectations were that this may result in half the weight gain as the tirzepatide arm. And clearly, we exceeded way beyond that, not only is it flat, it's actually down. I guess what is the implication for -- what's the true positioning in terms of treatment? Is it for maintenance only? Or would you consider optionality more upfront as well? Harith Rajagopalan: Thank you, Umer. Let's tackle those one by one. So you asked about weight gain through 3 months. In this study, we specifically randomized patients who had achieved meaningful weight loss on tirzepatide. The average weight loss was 40 pounds. And we're seeing that these patients, within 3 months, when they stop tirzepatide; are regaining nearly 10% of their body weight. That's a new data point, and I think it's an important contribution to the field because I think it speaks to the magnitude of the unmet need. When you have 10 million people or more on a GLP-1, more than half of them are going to stop within a year. This is the kind of weight regain that you may reasonably expect in those who most successfully lose weight in the first place. Imagine how frustrating that is for a patient. On the other hand, what we are seeing is not only weight maintenance, but actually some incremental weight loss. That's a highly compelling observation. The treatment difference is substantial in a short amount of time. And the read-through to 6 months for what you would expect the sham arm to continue to gain weight because that is what we have seen in prior clinical studies of GLP-1 withdrawal. You would also reasonably expect the Revita arm to be able to continue to maintain the weight loss that we are seeing because 3-month results have historically been very predictive of 6-, 12- and 24-month experience in our prior clinical studies. So obviously, thank you for saying it's unique and very intriguing. We agree. We also think that this portends very well for what we hope to see in the future. Your second question on standard deviation and outliers. The fact is that when you stop tirzepatide, standard deviation arms are very broad. You look at the SURMOUNT-4 study. I think it's supplementary Appendix 2. It is very clear how broad that is. I would actually point you to how tight our effect size is with the number of patients that we're looking at relative to the expected extraordinarily broad splay that one would normally expect from stopping trazepatide in the first place. That was a concern that we had, had going into the study. Now for both REVEAL open label and our randomized data, we're actually feeling quite encouraged about standard deviations. And if I think about our biostatistical powering for the pivotal, these standard deviations are lower than what we were planning for, and that also portends well for the powering assumptions in the full pivotal. Third, you asked me about the magnitude of effect and its implications. We feel incredibly encouraged for what this means for what Revita can do in obesity. We think of this not just for weight loss maintenance, but also induction of weight loss in the first place, which we've seen in type 2 diabetes, we would be eager to see in an obese population as well. We think of this as having a GLP-1 independent mechanism of action, which means that you can use it as a stand-alone therapy or in conjunction with GLP-1s. And so when you think about induction, maintenance, stand-alone or combination with pharmacology, I think what we're setting up is a true potential backbone therapy, one that offers the unique differentiating characteristic of being able to potentially offer a durable metabolic reset by fixing the underlying physiology for the very first time in obesity. We think that it's incredibly powerful. We think that the market does not yet appreciate how potentially impactful this is for the entire disease category, especially when you take into consideration how scalable this technique actually is. Operator: Our next question comes from Whitney Ijem with Canaccord Genuity. Whitney Ijem: I'll add my congrats on the data really, really exciting. I guess one question, thinking ahead to the 6-month data that will be coming, I believe we're expecting DEXA results. So obviously, the weight loss and maintenance data you showed today is really exciting. But can you speak to how we should be thinking about DEXA data? And any other kind of supportive endpoints that will be coming in the next update? And how we should be thinking about that? Harith Rajagopalan: Open-label data -- the next major update is going to be 6-month open-label data from the REVEAL cohort in Q4. And we will also have 6-month randomized data from this REMAIN midpoint. There is an optional DEXA scan that patients can undergo in the midpoint and in the pivotal cohorts. And we will have -- we will also have metabolic assessments that we will be able to share on glucose, insulin and cardiovascular risk factors. So over the course of time, you're going to see a further elaboration of what is already a very compelling signal where today's emphasis is really on how potent Revita may be in the primary endpoint for the core pivotal studies' objectives. Whitney Ijem: Awesome. That's helpful. And then just to go back to some of the commercial comments you made, which were helpful. I guess, should we all be thinking about kind of the initial market opportunity here as those patients who are already going in for an endoscopy and kind of getting that call from the docs to stop the GLP-1s, and that's the kind of initial call point? Or are patients going to be seeing commercials and calling endoscopy centers themselves to try to schedule this? Just kind of help us understand that a little bit, though I appreciate it's still early. Harith Rajagopalan: Yes. So absolutely, what we are hearing from GI physicians is that a substantial fraction of patients who are coming in for endoscopies are already on a GLP-1 and already being asked to stop their GLP-1s prior. Some of the physicians with whom we're working are saying, we're going to offer this to every single patient who's coming in for an endoscopy, and that's why that 800,000 number is so compelling. I have another new data point to share, which is, as you know, we signed a letter of intent with Bariendo earlier in the summer. And one of the physicians involved in Bariendo told us that when they run an ad in a community for their bariatric and metabolic services, somewhere between 50% and 80% of the people who respond to that ad are on a GLP-1 and looking for an off-ramp. And what that suggests to us is that direct-to-consumer advertising could actually be a very efficient way in order to build upon the practice that already exists within the GI practices themselves. And I don't want to ignore the fact that primary care physicians who are actually managing the condition, the single biggest question they're getting from patients is, "When can I stop taking the GLP-1?" And we have found that they are incredibly receptive to the idea that a durable metabolic reset could be a very compelling treatment alternative because they themselves know patients don't want to be on medicines for the rest of their life to control their weight. So we think that all three are viable channels. We point out that 800,000 number because it's such a huge opportunity that does not require 1 iota of change in human behavior from what they're already currently doing. Operator: Our next question comes from Jason Gerberry with Bank of America. Jason Gerberry: Given you'd be in a position to file a PMA second half next year, potentially data supportive here, I'm wondering what's most critical in your view, in terms of the ultimate 6 months, in terms of really bolstering more of an upside case, in your view, on the peak revenue potential here? Is it the spread of drug and sham arm or I guess, like coming off of trazepatide arm versus Revita, I should say, and/or the importance of just length and durability of benefit? I'm just kind of wondering if you can revisit some of those measures. As you kind of think about filing, what really would support potentially blockbuster plus revenue opportunity? Harith Rajagopalan: Well, I think that there's likely three things, Jason, that would drive that. Number one is the magnitude of the treatment effect. We believe we'll have a huge market opportunity if we simply blunt the rate of weight regain by 50%. Though we are seeing something much more impressive than that here, doesn't change the fact that that's what the market needs for this to be an extraordinary opportunity. Obviously, the bigger the treatment delta, the more impressive that will be. We will also have 12-month data in the label, we would anticipate. And as a result, like the strength of that durability signal would also support upside scenarios. And the third, I would say, are the ancillary data that Whitney asked about. What are -- what's happening to the risk of the development of diabetes? As you saw here, there are 40% to 50% of these individuals are prediabetic, but most of those are undiagnosed prediabetic. So bolstering the cardiometabolic profile around the benefits of being able to maintain weight versus those who discontinue and lose those benefits very rapidly as we know, coupled with potential body composition sort of benefits of not just become -- regaining fat mass and continuing to lose the lean mass as we expect is occurring in people who stop GLP-1s; I think that sort of ancillary set of benefits would also support a very -- like very compelling clinical and medical argument around what we are offering here. Jason Gerberry: Okay. And one just follow-up for me, the single SAE, the cholecystitis that was adjudicated not related to device or procedure. Just can you talk a little bit about how that was adjudicated? Harith Rajagopalan: Yes. There's an independent clinical endpoint committee that adjudicated this case, occurred 65 days or so after the randomization procedure. And the fact is, if you look at the demographics of those who are enrolled in the study, largely -- mostly women who are in their 40s and who are overweight and not yet menopausal, those are the four biggest risk factors for gallbladder disease anyway. So you're going to -- we're going to have some amount of gallbladder disease in patients as we enroll more of them. This demographic is exactly those people who are already predisposed. And given the time disparity between the Revita procedure, mucosal healing and the absence of any symptoms through the randomization to when the cholecystitis appeared, this was adjudicated independently as unrelated. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from Joe Pantginis with H.C. Wainwright. Joseph Pantginis: Congratulations on the data. A couple of questions on the trial itself. So first, do you have information as to how long patients were previously on tirzepatide or what the range was? And how that might impact interpretation of the data? Harith Rajagopalan: Sure. So as a reminder, this study took GLP-1-naive individuals. And we initiated them on tirzepatide, titrated them to 15% total body weight loss, and it took between 16 weeks and 26 weeks for these 45 individuals to get to 15% weight loss. Joseph Pantginis: Perfect. Okay. And then I was curious if you could just remind because I know it does not definitely -- it does not impact the sham data, but can you describe the sham procedure? Harith Rajagopalan: These patients are only randomized after the catheter is inserted into the body and the catheter dwells. In the sham procedure, the catheters left there for a fixed duration that mimics the total length of the procedure. And the GI physician who performs this procedure, never sees the patient again once they are wheeled out of the room and into the recovery room. And so this is a true double blind. And I think it's about as rigorous as sham as humanly possible. Joseph Pantginis: Great. That's fantastic. I appreciate that clarity again. And then lastly, for the actual procedure, and the time of doctor assessments, are there any scheduled visits or follow-up exams with the doctor before the final primary endpoint time point? Harith Rajagopalan: There are visits -- in-office visits at 1 month and 3 months and then the next in-office visit is 6 months, which is the primary endpoint. Operator: Our next question comes from William Wood with B. Riley Securities. William Wood: Congratulations on the very, very nice data. Just trying to sort of tease out the effects that we're seeing here. And so I was kind of curious that alongside the weight loss improvements, you mentioned that you're also going to be collecting data on glucose and insulin. But I was also curious if there is any -- going to be any analysis on, say, biomarkers, thinking specifically like a GLP-1, PYY, maybe ghrelin? Are there anything that could sort of support the actual benefits, this weight loss or even the weight maintenance that you're seeing? Yes. Harith Rajagopalan: We've tested these hormones in the past in prior studies and have not seen changes that correlate with the fact. And so we don't see serum levels of these hormones as being a driving mechanism here. We are collecting the blood for this type of an analysis, and we'll likely do that as a sub-study in the future. William Wood: Okay. And then also sort of just thinking in terms of -- have you been -- or are there plans or are you incorporating PROs into this just with the data we're seeing both in your REVEAL, but also now in the REMAIN? It looks like, in my opinion, that the patients might be feeling a lot better or having a very positive result. So I was just curious, how that data or those -- that perception, whatever it may be from the patients may be being collected? Harith Rajagopalan: We're collecting and tabulating PRO data. We look forward to sharing that when it's available. William Wood: Should we expect that a 6-month readout for REMAIN? Or is that only in the pivotal? Harith Rajagopalan: Let me get back to you on that. I'm quite confident we're collecting them in the midpoint cohort as well. William Wood: Okay. And then lastly, if I may. You obviously have a very nice cadence here between REVEAL and REMAIN between fourth quarter than first quarter, both at 6 months and then longer term, the 1 year. So I'm just trying to -- how should investors and people looking at the data sort of going between an open label and then your RCT, how should we sort of be trying to read through from REVEAL to REMAIN and then eventually to the pivotal? Harith Rajagopalan: Well, when we showed 3-month data in June from the open-label cohort, it was highly intriguing, and investors -- some investors got excited about it. And I think some remained skeptical because they wanted to see randomized data. Now that we've shown randomized data and the Revita arm is performing as well or better than the open-label cohort, I think we would then look at the 6-month open-label data that will be coming and view it through the lens of what we have just seen. I hope that what all of this serves to provide are complementary pieces of evidence around the potential effect for Revita in both a real-world registry-type setting, which is what the REVEAL-1 open-label cohort is, as well as on controlled conditions. And my view that the market, payers and the other stakeholders can benefit from seeing the totality of all of that evidence because they are slightly [indiscernible] to one another in their design. But the consistency of what we are seeing so far clearly gives us a lot of encouragement as we go into the upcoming milestones. And my last point would be that by this time next year, with 1 year open label data from REVEAL and 6-month randomized data from the pivotal cohort, one could feel reasonably confident that the entire clinical profile for Revita in weight maintenance will have been substantially derisked and can take that to also then think about the fact that we have breakthrough device designation, which portends regulatory sort of timelines and expectations and the potential for reimbursement through the TCET pathway at CMS. So we're very excited for what's to come in the year ahead. We're very excited that we announced this morning that we project having cash through all of these major milestones that we're talking about today. So exciting time with a lot of fantastic catalysts in the quarters ahead. Operator: Our next question comes from Jeffrey Cohen with Ladenburg Thalmann. Jeffrey seems not to be there. I'm showing no further questions at this time. I'd like to turn the call back over to Dr. Rajagopalan for closing remarks. Harith Rajagopalan: Thank you. Thanks, everyone. You've seen the signal, you've seen the safety profile, you've seen the potential scalability and the enthusiasm of patients and sites to enroll our studies. Our next steps are clear with Revita: To deliver 6-month midpoint cohort data, to complete the pivotal cohort randomizations early in 2026, drive to pivotal cohort top line data and potential PMA submission next year. We believe that Revita has an extraordinary potential to be a new backbone therapy in obesity care, and we look forward to updating you on all of our progress in the coming months. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect. Good day.
Michael Helm: Good morning and welcome to the BlackBerry second quarter fiscal year 2026 results conference call. My name is Michael Helm and I will be your conference moderator for today's call. During the presentation, all participants will be in a listen-only mode. We will be facilitating a brief question and answer session towards the end of the conference. Should you need assistance during the call, please signal a conference specialist by pressing star zero. As a reminder, this conference is being recorded for replay purposes. I would now like to turn today's call over to Martha Gonder, Director of Investor Relations, BlackBerry. Please go ahead. Martha Gonder: Thank you, Michael. Good morning, everyone, and welcome to BlackBerry's second quarter fiscal year 2026 earnings conference call. Joining me on today's call is BlackBerry's Chief Executive Officer, John Giamatteo, and Chief Financial Officer, Tim Foote. After I read our cautionary note regarding forward-looking statements, John will provide a business update and Tim will review the financial results. We will then open the call for a brief Q&A session. This call is available to the general public via call-in numbers and via webcast in the investor information section at BlackBerry.com. A replay will also be available on the BlackBerry.com website. Some of the statements we'll be making today constitute forward-looking statements and are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of applicable U.S. and Canadian securities laws. We'll indicate forward-looking statements by using words such as expect, will, should, model, intend, believe, and similar expressions. Forward-looking statements are based on estimates and assumptions made by the company in light of its experience and its perception of historical trends, current conditions, and expected future developments, as well as other factors that the company believes are relevant. Many factors could cause the company's actual results or performance to differ materially from those expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. These factors include the risk factors that are discussed in the company's annual filings and MD&A. You should not place undue reliance on the company's forward-looking statements. Any forward-looking statements are made only as of today, and the company has no intention and undertakes no obligation to update or revise any of them, except as required by law. As is customary during the call, John and Tim will reference non-GAAP numbers in their summary of our quarterly results. For a reconciliation between our GAAP and non-GAAP numbers, please see the earnings press release published earlier today, which is available on the Edgar, SEDAR+ and BlackBerry.com websites. With that, let me turn the call over to John. John Giamatteo: Thanks, Martha, and thanks to everyone for joining today's call. Q2 was another strong quarter for BlackBerry, with all three of our divisions meeting the top end of guidance. The company revenue for the quarter was stronger than expected, growing 3% year over year to $129.6 million. BlackBerry delivered another quarter of solid profitability, with total company-adjusted EBITDA reaching 20% of revenue and GAAP net income being positive for the second consecutive quarter at $13.3 million. Likewise, non-GAAP EPS beat guidance at positive $0.04. Despite the headwinds of significant tax payments in the quarter, we were able to return to positive cash flow earlier than anticipated, with operating cash flow at $3.4 million. At a divisional level, QNX beat expectations for both revenue and adjusted EBITDA to achieve a rule of 40 quarter. We delivered 15% year-over-year revenue growth and a 32% adjusted EBITDA margin for Q2. QNX revenue for the quarter was $63.1 million, primarily driven by strong royalties. These solid results are a testament to how the QNX team continues to successfully navigate what remains an uncertain macro environment. This is further evidenced by QNX design wins being ahead of plan in Q2 after a slower start to the year in Q1. The pipeline for potential design wins in the second half of this fiscal year looks solid. In the quarter, we secured a number of noteworthy design wins, including a mid-eight-figure design win in the Chinese market with a leading global tier-one supplier to power ADAS applications. QNX is also progressing with ecosystem partners. BMW and Qualcomm announced that they have jointly developed a scalable platform called Snapdragon RidePilot, which is built on QNX. This product, offered by Qualcomm to all global automakers and tier-one suppliers, enables an active safety system that is continually updated with cloud-based information from global fleets. We secured another win for our cloud-based development platform, Cabin, with one of the top five global automakers. This was also a significant quarter for our QNX sound product, where we had a pivotal win to deliver software-defined audio with a leading domestic Chinese automaker and a leading branded audio partner. This marks a significant step forward in adoption of this product. Like in auto, we continue to see growth in a number of high-performance, safety-critical use cases in the general embedded space. In particular, we're seeing progress in the verticals where we've been increasing focus and investment, namely medical instrumentation, industrial automation, and robotics. During this past quarter, we secured a significant win with a leading North American camera and vision module supplier for QNX to be used globally in automated mobile robots and subsequently in humanoid robotics. This is another data point that our investment strategy is showing returns. During the quarter, the latest version of our QNX operating system passed the safety and security audits conducted by TÜV Rheinland, and QNX OS for Safety 8.0 was formally released on July 31, 2023. Having the product fully certified by arguably the leading body in this space allows customers to demonstrate the product's compliance with rigorous international standards. The QNX-8 pipeline continues to grow and remains approximately 50/50 between auto and general industry. This pipeline is being converted. In Q2, a top global automaker purchased new QNX-8 development seat licenses. We also announced that QNX OS for Safety 8.0 will power NVIDIA's DRIVE AGX Thor development kit. This kit enables software development on the NVIDIA AGX Thor SoC, a truly powerful next-generation chip that facilitates generative AI. QNX forms the foundation for NVIDIA's DRIVE OS that is often used in conjunction with NVIDIA chipsets in the car. There was also meaningful progress for the vehicle software platform that we're investing in and have partnered with Vector Informatik to develop. The platform pre-integrates our operating system with a number of middleware components. We believe that this platform will help automakers accelerate their path to software-defined vehicles, greatly expanding QNX's addressable market and increasing our overall software content in the car. We were excited to launch the first early access version of this product this past quarter, and we're working closely with Vector to implement and accelerate our go-to-market strategy. We continue to see momentum with QNX everywhere. Our initiative to accelerate the growth of the QNX developer and ecosystem community through the availability of our products for non-commercial use and the development of QNX-centric training programs. We see this as a strategically important program that aims to significantly strengthen the position of QNX in the market for the long term. This past quarter, MIT was one of six universities to sign up to using QNX in their engineering curriculums, with more than 4,000 students having already attended QNX learning sessions globally. In summary, despite the continued uncertainty in the automotive market, BlackBerry's QNX division delivered strong results in Q2 and progress across all our key growth initiatives, and we have a solid pipeline of opportunities for the second half of the fiscal year. Moving now on to the Secure Communications division, which had another solid quarter beating the top end of our guidance range and finishing higher sequentially with quarterly revenue of $59.9 million. The better than expected results were driven by a combination of slowing customer churn for UEM as well as some upside for both ad hoc and SecuSmart. Annual recurring revenue, or ARR, grew by $4 million in the quarter to $213 million, and the dollar-based net retention rate, or DVNRR, improved to 93%. Although the revenue was down year over year due to a significant device refresh cycle last fiscal year, this was a good quarter for sales of SecuSmart to the German government, including a five-year deal with a key government agency for hosted secure voice services. Offering a hosted service is a new recurring revenue business model for BlackBerry that, together with more software-only sales, can help create a more predictable revenue profile for the SecuSmart business. This deal can serve as a test case and open the door for future deals of this nature. We also saw traction with the deployment of SecuSmart on iOS devices. In the past, SecuSmart was largely limited to Android. The R&D effort to add support for iOS has significantly increased the size of our potential opportunity within the German government. Outside of Germany, this quarter we secured a deal with a Canadian government entity, and the pipeline of opportunities globally remains robust. During Q2, we secured a large renewal and upsell with the U.S. State Department for our ad hoc critical events management platform. This deal includes four option years, which could result in this being a five-year renewal. FedRAMP High approval and new features added to the ad hoc platform recently were key for the State Department in expanding their relationship with BlackBerry for their emergency notification and accountability platform. In addition, we secured ad hoc wins with the U.S. Coast Guard and Veteran Affairs, among others. As mentioned, this quarter we saw the continuation of the trend for reduced customer churn for UEM. An increased focus on data sovereignty plays to BlackBerry UEM's strength, especially with on-premise deployments. In particular, we secured a number of non-government renewals that helped solidify the base. Renewals include a number of major financial institutions, as well as Rolls Royce, leading law firm Hogan Lovells, defense engineering firm Babcock, the IRS, and the Department of Homeland Security, just to name a few. During the quarter, BlackBerry UEM became the first solution to be certified by Germany's Federal Office for Information Security, or BSI. Meeting these very rigorous standards shows BlackBerry's commitment to this market and opens up potential for UEM expansion opportunities in Germany. Overall, this was another solid quarter for secure comms. The pipeline of potential large deals with government customers continues to be strong, however, sales cycles remain relatively long. Touching briefly on IP licensing, in addition to the run-rate revenue from pre-existing arrangements, which remains solid, we secured a net new one-time deal in the quarter that helped revenue to beat expectations at $6.6 million. With that, let me now turn the call over to Tim for more color on our financials. Tim Foote: Thank you, John, and good morning, everyone. As John mentioned, revenue for the total company in the quarter exceeded the top end of guidance at $129.6 million. Operating leverage driven by the strong top line, combined with tight cost control, enabled us to deliver expanded profit margins. Total company adjusted gross margins expanded by 4% year over year to 75% and remained flat sequentially despite a greater proportion of SecuSmart hardware in the mix. Adjusted operating expenses were approximately 5% lower year over year at $74.8 million. This reduction is in spite of increased investment in strategic growth drivers for QNX, namely our GEM expansion and the vehicle software platform, as well as FX headwinds from a weaker U.S. dollar this fiscal year. This demonstrates how we're successfully controlling costs and driving efficiencies across the business. As was the case in Q1, this past quarter we benefited from approximately $4 million of grant funding from the Canadian Government Strategic Innovation Fund. We do not expect to receive any further P&L benefit from this program for the remainder of the fiscal year. As a result of top-line growth, expanded gross margins, and reduced operating expenses, total company adjusted EBITDA grew a very strong 72% year over year to $25.9 million. Adjusted net income for Q2 was $24.2 million, and GAAP net income was $13.3 million. This is a $33 million turnaround in GAAP net income from the $19.7 million loss in the prior year. Indeed, it is also a significant expansion from the $1.9 million of positive GAAP net income we achieved in Q1. Adjusted EPS also beat expectations at positive $0.04. QNX revenue beat the top end of the guidance range at $63.1 million, representing 15% year-over-year growth. QNX gross margins expanded by 2% sequentially and were flat year over year at a strong 83%. QNX's adjusted EBITDA in Q2 marked the most profitable quarter in the division's history with a 32% margin. Adjusted EBITDA exceeded the top end of guidance at $20.5 million, a 56% year-over-year increase. Revenue for secure communications exceeded the top end of guidance in the quarter at $59.9 million. Gross margin was higher year over year and lower sequentially at 66% as a result of revenue mix. Secure communications remains solidly profitable despite the SecuSmart hardware component in the product mix for Q2, delivering stronger than expected adjusted EBITDA at $9.7 million, or 16% of revenue. Finally, our licensing division delivered better than expected revenue of $6.6 million, leverage from which drove adjusted EBITDA higher to $5.6 million. Adjusted corporate operating costs, excluding amortization, came in at $9.9 million in Q2, in line with guidance. Despite paying $19 million of tax due from prior years, the company had better than expected conversion of profits into cash and was able to deliver positive operating cash flow of $3.4 million and free cash flow of $2.6 million in the quarter. Total cash and investments increased year over year by $99.2 million and decreased by $18.4 million sequentially to $363.5 million. The sequential decrease was as a result of us continuing to take advantage of what we believed to be an undervalued share price and repurchasing approximately $20 million, or approximately 5 million shares at an average price per share of $3.97 in the quarter. These shares have been subsequently canceled, bringing the total number of shares removed by the program to date to 7.6 million. As you know, we're investing for growth, especially in our QNX business. Despite this investment, we expect to deliver positive cash flow this fiscal year, further increasing our net cash position. As a result, we will continue to consider where it makes sense to buy back additional shares. Turning now to financial outlook for the third fiscal quarter and the full fiscal year. Overall, we have seen a stronger than expected first half of fiscal year 2026 for both the QNX and Secure Comms divisions, and we're very pleased to be able to raise expectations for both revenue and adjusted EBITDA for the full year as a result. When we first presented full-year guidance during last fiscal year's Q4 earnings call, there were a significant number of unknowns. We faced a backdrop of significant tariff uncertainty and possible threats from DOGE and other potential government policy changes. While these changes have not gone away, we feel that the level of uncertainty has decreased. As a result, we are pricing in less downside risk in today's guidance than previously, and the top end of the range requires further improvement on the macro and other secular trends. We expect revenue for QNX in Q3 to be in the range of $66 to $70 million and for adjusted EBITDA to be in the range of $13 to $17 million. As I mentioned, we are increasing our full-year revenue guidance by $3 million at the midpoint, while also narrowing the range to $256 to $270 million. Likewise, we're raising our full-year adjusted EBITDA guidance by $11 million at the midpoint to be between $64 and $73 million, as QNX continues to deliver a combination of double-digit growth and strong profit margins. For secure communications, we expect revenue for Q3 to be in the range of $60 to $64 million and for adjusted EBITDA to be between $12 and $16 million. For the second quarter in a row, we are raising our full-year revenue guidance for secure communications such that the range is now $239 to $247 million. We're also raising our guidance for adjusted EBITDA with it now expected to be between $38 and $48 million. For licensing, we reiterate our prior guidance for revenue to be approximately $6 million and adjusted EBITDA to be approximately $5 million per quarter. For the full fiscal year, we're holding revenue guidance at approximately $24 million and adjusted EBITDA at approximately $20 million. We continue to expect adjusted corporate OpEx, excluding amortization, to be approximately $10 million a quarter or $40 million for the full fiscal year. At the total company level, we expect revenue for Q3 to be in the range of $132 to $140 million and adjusted EBITDA to be between $20 and $28 million. Given the increased full-year guidance for both QNX and secure communications revenue, as well as adjusted EBITDA, we are raising guidance for the total company as well. For the full fiscal year 2026, we're raising the midpoint for total company revenue by $7 million and now expected to be between $519 and $541 million, and we're raising guidance for adjusted EBITDA at the midpoint by $12 million, to be in the range of $82 to $101 million. For non-GAAP EPS, we expect it to be between $0.02 and $0.04 in the third quarter and to now be between $0.11 and $0.15 for the full fiscal year. Now that most of the restructuring and tax payments for prior years are behind us, we expect to be cash flow positive for the remainder of fiscal 2026. We expect positive operating cash flow for Q3 in the range of a solid $10 to $20 million. For the full fiscal year, we're raising our guidance and expect to generate between $35 and $40 million in operating cash flow. This does not include the additional $38 million of cash from the second tranche of proceeds from the sale of Cylance to Arctic Wolf that we expect to receive in Q4. This is classified separately as cash flows from investing activities. With that, let me now turn the call back to John. John Giamatteo: Thank you for that, Tim. Before we move to Q&A, let me quickly summarize what was another strong quarter for BlackBerry. We delivered year-over-year top-line growth and expanded gross margins while simultaneously decreasing OpEx. This combination allowed BlackBerry to deliver rock-solid profitability in Q2. QNX delivered a rule of 40 quarter with 15% revenue growth and 32% adjusted EBITDA margin. Secure Comms saw improvement in its key metrics and delivered a solid 16% adjusted EBITDA margin. We exit the first half of the fiscal year having delivered top-line growth, expanded profit margins, and positive cash flow generation. With that, let's now move to Q&A. Operator, could you please open up the lines? Michael Helm: We will now begin the question and answer session. To ask a question, please press star one on your telephone keypad. Please make sure your line is unmuted. Again, press star one to ask a question. We'll pause for just a moment to allow everyone an opportunity to signal for questions. We request that you limit yourself to one question and one follow-up. Your first question comes from Luke L. Junk with Baird. Please go ahead. Luke Junk: Good morning. Thanks for taking the question. A couple of QNX questions for me. Tim, maybe to start with, could you just double-click on how we should think about operating leverage in QNX from here? Growing in the mid-teens year over year this quarter, but OpEx in terms of R&D and sales and marketing still coming down year over year in aggregate, which gave you really good leverage. I know some of that was the R&D credit. If we just pull in that string, what does it say about the business from here from a leverage standpoint and maybe specific to guidance in the sequential walk, just anything we should be keeping in mind, one-timers or seasonality into the third quarter? Thank you. Tim Foote: Yeah, great question, Luke, and good morning. I see a lot of leverage in the QNX model. We're already at gross margins of 83%, and over time, we should see that improve, particularly as the mix of royalties starts to increase as we start to see some of these bigger programs move into production. On the cost, the OpEx side, you're right, we had a $4 million benefit this quarter from the CIF funding. Generally speaking, we are investing in both R&D and sales and marketing, particularly sales and marketing to drive that GEM opportunity that we've been talking about. Regardless of that investment, I still see leverage through the model. I think the investment we're putting into R&D will start to stabilize, and whilst we'll continue to invest in sales and marketing, it won't be at the scale that we hope to grow the top line. You add all that together, very strong gross margins, leverage coming out of OpEx, we should see some pretty strong adjusted EBITDA margins going forward. Luke Junk: Got it. For my follow-up, John, you mentioned that I think it was a mid-eight-figure design win in China with the tier one for ADAS applications. Just be curious if you could maybe expand on your overall approach to the China market, you know, just strategically. Certainly, that's a market in automotive that's at the bleeding edge of software-defined vehicles right now. Just curious how you lean into that in China specifically, and then sort of the offshoot of that would be, you know, some benefit. I would anticipate repatriating that into the rest of the world as well. Thanks, John. John Giamatteo: Thanks, Luke. I think one of the interesting dynamics with the China market in particular is we're seeing, due to some incidents, some safety issues, and some concern, that market shift more towards safety-critical software and the need for a high-performance type of capability where maybe a few years ago, the demand for those kinds of capabilities wasn't quite as rich. I think that has really opened up. There are some high-profile accidents that happened that have really awakened that market to the need of something to the magnitude of our SDP8 and some of our capabilities, which we think really are differentiated from everybody else in the market. I think that trend is a positive one for us, and it certainly enabled us to make some progress this particular quarter. In general, as more of that shift goes towards safety-critical and the higher-end, higher compute, higher performance capabilities, we think that plays into our strength and how we're performing in the marketplace. It's also further evidenced by how the Silicon players, the ecosystem partners, are leaning in with us with our relationships with Qualcomm and NVIDIA and the progress we're making there. Hopefully, that gives you a little bit more color on why we feel we're making a little more progress, not only in China, but around the world. Luke Junk: Yeah, very interesting. I'll leave it there. Thanks, John. Michael Helm: Your next question comes from Paul Michael Treiber with RBC Capital Markets. Please go ahead. Paul Treiber: Thanks very much, and good morning. Just a couple of questions on QNX as well. On the outlook for the year, the outlook continues to be back-end loaded for QNX. Can you remind us again of what you see as a driver of the pickup in the back half of the year? Does that specifically reflect either licensed or professional services, which is more one-time in nature, or is it a ramp in royalties? Tim Foote: Yeah, good question, and good morning, Paul. If you look at the trends, the revenue trend or pattern really for QNX for the last couple of years, it has been back-end loaded. It's pretty much a sequential increase all the way through, with Q1 always being the lowest and Q4 always being the highest. Some of that is seasonality around when design work begins. Obviously, you know, the biggest kind of moving part from quarter to quarter is development seat licenses, and that is driven really by the start of programs and design work. That tends to be towards the back end of the year. We probably expect to see that pattern, generally speaking, going forward, but we'll have to see. That's really what's driving it. Over time, we're also seeing growth in royalties as some of these programs start to come online. Quarter over quarter, generally, you start to see growth in royalties as well. Paul Treiber: Big picture on QNX in the auto market, you mentioned a lot of uncertainty at the beginning of the year. The feedback that you're getting from auto OEMs in terms of the prioritization of new platform development, like you mentioned, the potential for seeing the move of big programs into production. Are you hearing that these big programs are back on track and the plans have moved maybe back to where they were previously, whereas there's concern that they might have been pushed out? Tim Foote: I wouldn't go as far as to say back on track because I think everything is no doubt shifted to the right. I would say programs are starting to come online, obviously not as quickly as we would have liked at the beginning. I don't want to kind of paint the picture that we're totally through all of the headwinds that we saw. The tariff uncertainty has now become kind of really just a more certain tariff headwind. The challenges of developing software remain complex, and those have certainly not gone away. I think inevitably over time, you're going to see problems get solved and vehicles come online. I wouldn't paint the picture that we're totally out of the woods. I think everyone's got just a little bit more certainty than we had at the beginning of the year when we gave guidance on Liberation Day. John Giamatteo: Yeah, just to further to that, what Tim has outlined, you know, the S&P took a global light vehicle production, and we're feeling, you know, that's increased. The OEMs maintaining their guidance is another kind of data point that things are starting to stabilize. April, May, June, it kind of feels like the pause button was pressed, and it's not quite completely ramped, but we definitely feel like it's being unpressed, and there's a little more kind of momentum going on as we look at the second half of the year. Paul Treiber: That's great to hear. I'll pass the line. Michael Helm: Again, if you have a question, please press star, then one. Your next question comes from Todd Adair Coupland with CIBC. Please go ahead. Todd Coupland: Yeah, good morning, everyone. I had a question on QNX. I was wondering if you could update us on the backlog and the backlog growth in the quarter. As a follow-up, with 15% growth in QNX in Q2 and double-digit implied in the second half of the year, are you comfortably in double-digit growth range for QNX now? Just talk about the sustainability of that. Thanks a lot. Tim Foote: I'll take the first part. Maybe, John, you want to take the second. In terms of backlog, obviously, this is not a quarterly business. You have some fairly wild volatility in the design win dollars that you get from quarter to quarter, and that's really just timing of when those decisions take place. That's why we give that metric on an annual basis to kind of normalize from some of that movement. The color I'd give is that Q1, John mentioned the pause button. I think there was a challenge for a lot of OEMs, and hence a certain reluctance to commit to new designs. Q1 was weaker, but Q2 has come back pretty well, and we're actually ahead of plan for Q2. When we look at the second half, the pipeline of opportunities looks really solid. We're feeling really good about where we are going forward, but obviously, we had to navigate through what was a challenge in Q1. We'll give you an update on backlog as normal at the end of Q4. On the growth, John. John Giamatteo: Yeah, you know, I really feel between Todd, the progress that we've gotten in terms of what we've already booked and some of the new programs that are coming online, our vehicle platform initiative, the adoption of SDP8. You know, we talked about the sound win, QNX Sound, which is another. We're very excited about the diversification into GEM with some of the wins that we have in some of the robotics space. I mean, all of that, I think, lines up to what we've given from a guidance standpoint as a solid second half of the year. You know, between that and the pipeline that Tim's talking about, we're optimistic that we're going to keep the momentum going into not only the second half of the year, but as we think about next year as well. Todd Coupland: Great, thank you. Michael Helm: This concludes our question and answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to John Giamatteo, CEO of BlackBerry, for closing remarks. John Giamatteo: Very good. Thanks, Michael. Before we end the call, I just wanted to mention some upcoming events that we're excited about that BlackBerry is going to be in attendance. The QNX team will be at ELIV in Bonn, Germany, the American Medical Device Summit in Chicago in October, and Embedded World North America in November. Our Secure Communications division will be at ITSA Expo and Congress in Nuremberg, Germany, and at GITEX Global in Dubai next month. If you're in any of these locations, please stop by the events at our booth. We look forward to hosting you and talking to you more about the exciting developments that are happening all across BlackBerry. Thanks, everyone, for joining the call today, and we look forward to talking to you next time. Michael Helm: This concludes today's call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning. My name is Tiffany. I will be your conference operator today. I would like to welcome everyone to the TD SYNNEX Third Quarter Fiscal 2025 Earnings Call. Today's call is being recorded and all lines have been placed on mute to prevent any background noise. After the speaker's remarks, there will be a question and answer session. At this time, for opening remarks, I would like to pass the call over to David Jordan, America's CFO and head of investor relations at TD SYNNEX. David? You may begin. Thank you. David Jordan: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us on today's call. With me today is Patrick Zammit, our CEO, and Marshall Witt, our CFO. Before we continue, let me remind you that today's discussion contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the federal securities laws including predictions, estimates, projections, or other statements about future events, including statements about our strategy, demand, plans and positioning, growth, cash flow, capital allocation, and stockholder return, as well as our financial expectations for future fiscal periods. Actual results may differ materially from those mentioned in these forward-looking statements as a result of risks and uncertainties discussed in today's earnings release, in the Form 8-Ks we filed today, in the risk factors section of our Form 10-K, and our other reports and filings with the SEC. We do not intend to update any forward-looking statements. Also, during this call, we will reference certain non-GAAP financial information. Reconciliations of GAAP to non-GAAP results are included in our earnings press release and the related Form 8-Ks on our Investor Relations website ir.tdsynex.com. This conference call is the property of TD SYNNEX and may not be recorded or rebroadcast without our permission. I will now turn the call over to Patrick. Patrick? Thank you, David. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. Patrick Zammit: I'm excited to report that our third quarter non-GAAP gross billings and diluted earnings per share established new records for our company. Our performance is a clear result of our team's strong execution, a differentiated go-to-market strategy, and a global end-to-end portfolio of products and services that is unrivaled. Beginning with our financial performance for the quarter, consolidated gross billings were $22.7 billion, growing 12% in constant currency. And non-GAAP diluted earnings per share of $3.58 exceeded the high end of our guidance, representing a 25% increase year over year. Within TD SYNNEX, excluding HIVE, gross billings increased 9% year over year, with gross profit and operating income each increasing by double digits. Hive had a strong quarter, with gross billings increasing in the mid-thirties year over year, and ODM Centimeters gross billings increasing 57% year over year, fueled by continued strength in hyperscaler investments in cloud infrastructure. Hive total gross margins returned to historical levels, operating profit exceeded expectations. The majority of our technology products and services in endpoint and advanced solutions experienced an increase in gross billings year over year. Highlighting a few key areas, software continued to be a standout experiencing a 26% increase in gross billings, fueled by cybersecurity and infrastructure software. Additionally, we are still experiencing strong demand in PCs driven by a higher mix of AI PCs and the Windows 11 refresh cycle. We experienced healthy momentum across each of our regions, exceptionally dynamic performance in Latin America and Asia Pacific and Japan, each increasing strong double digits in gross billings in the quarter and exceeding expectations. Broad-based adoption of IT products and services continues to build in these geographies, validating the strength of our go-to-market strategy and positioning us to continue to capture profitable growth. Moving to our diversified customer end markets, we're experiencing broad-based strength in SMB and MSPs, which grew substantially above the company average in most of our geographies. By developing bespoke value propositions and deploying dedicated commercial teams with deep industry knowledge, we have successfully positioned ourselves as a trusted partner for this strategic customer segment. Enterprise demand remains largely stable, with balanced revenue growth throughout the majority of this customer base. Our US public sector business increased its gross billings low single digits in the quarter. Strength in state and local was offset by anticipated softness in federal, as our customers navigate a dynamic environment led by the revaluation of budgets and expected changes to federal funding programs. As a reminder, federal is a small portion of our total portfolio, but one we will continue to invest in growing. Next, our differentiated and highly specialized go-to-market strategy we outlined during investor day strengthens our competitive position and drives our business forward every day. A great example of this strategy in action is expanding our addressable market by introducing new vendors to the channel and leveraging our network of partners to accelerate growth. Last year, we onboarded a cybersecurity vendor in North America, who was attracted by our specialist go-to-market and partner enablement capabilities. Within eighteen to twenty-four months, we have grown that business from 0 to hundreds of millions of dollars by expanding the customer base and improving their net revenue retention rates with existing clients. We have many more examples like this, and we are continuing to onboard cutting-edge vendors and help accelerate the adoption of new technologies in the market. As the adoption of AI technologies evolves, we are enhancing our destination AI enablement program to include three strategic focus areas that are designed to help our partners adopt, scale, and secure AI solutions: AgenTiKi, security for AI, and AI factory. Launching next week, these programs will deliver comprehensive solution support such as designing modern architectures that blend multiple AI technologies and enable hybrid deployment models that deliver flexible, intelligent threat detection, prevention, and responses. Within Hive, we're extremely proud of our performance during the quarter and remain confident in our ability to be a leading partner for data center infrastructure build-outs. We are continuing to invest in new capabilities, taking a holistic approach to data center requirements that anticipates our customers' needs and provides an end-to-end solution for the world's leading hyperscalers and cloud service providers. As a result, our portfolio is becoming more diversified. We are participating in more compute, networking, and storage rack builds as the deployment of GPU and AI integrated racks accelerates, and we have seen robust growth throughout the majority of our programs. Additionally, our customer mix is also shifting favorably, and we have seen substantial growth beyond our top customer. Moreover, our second largest customer grew faster than expected within the quarter, and we anticipate similar strength in Q4. At our investor day, we outlined a digital strategy including the creation of a unified experience, seamless workflows, and actionable insights to drive customers' growth. Today, we are taking the next step of that journey with the launch of TD SYNNEX Partner First in North America. A unified portal that optimizes the partner experience by combining commerce, services, education, and community in a single digital environment. Partner First marks an important milestone in TD SYNNEX omnichannel strategy, using AI automation and advanced analytics to enhance our operations and streamline the buying journey. Partner First will be rolled out globally in the coming quarters. In summary, our team's strong execution, our differentiated and highly specialized go-to-market strategy, and our unrivaled global end-to-end portfolio of products and services are enabling us to continue to deliver a superior level of service and customer experience. Now I will pass it to Marshall to go over the financial performance and Q4 outlook in more detail. Marshall? Marshall Witt: Thanks, Patrick, and good morning, everyone. As Patrick highlighted, we're excited to report that we achieved 12% gross billings growth and 25% non-GAAP diluted EPS growth in the third quarter, which exceeded the high end of our guidance range. Our endpoint solutions portfolio increased gross billings 10% year over year driven by continued demand for PCs as the refresh cycle progresses. As well as a higher mix of AI PCs. Globally, PCs have increased double digits for three consecutive quarters, and we believe that we are in the mid to late innings of the refresh cycle. Advanced Solutions portfolio increased gross billings by 13% year over year, and 8% year over year when excluding the impact of Hive, driven by meaningful demand in cloud, security, software, and other high-growth technologies. Hive, which is reported within the advanced solutions portfolio, increased in the mid-thirties, primarily due to strength in programs associated with server and networking rack builds. Hive's capabilities, capacity, and US manufacturing footprint positions it to support the increased demand. In the quarter, there was an approximately 31% reduction from gross billings to net revenue, which was slightly higher than our expectations but consistent with previous quarters. Our net treatment as a percentage of billings continues to remain elevated versus the prior year, primarily driven by an increase in Hive transactions where we act as an agent and a higher mix of software within distribution. As a result, net revenue was $15.7 billion, up 7% year over year and above the high end of our guidance range. Gross profit increased 18% year over year to $1.1 billion. Gross margin as a percentage of gross billings was 5%, which increased 23 basis points year over year and improved sequentially. Notably, we expanded our gross margin profile in both distribution and Hive. Non-GAAP SG&A expense was $155 million or 3% of gross billings. Our cost to gross profit percentage, which we define as the ratio of non-GAAP SG&A expense to gross profit, was 58% in Q3, and an improvement from the 60% level that we experienced in the first half of the year, demonstrating our progress towards managing costs as a percentage of gross profit down over time while still making key investments into the business. Non-GAAP operating income increased 21% year over year to $475 million. Non-GAAP operating margin as a percentage of gross billings was 2.09%, representing a 15 basis point improvement year over year. Interest expense and finance charges were $91 million, an increase of $11 million year over year. Our non-GAAP effective tax rate was approximately 23% compared to 21% in the prior year. Total non-GAAP net income was $296 million and non-GAAP diluted earnings per share $3.58, an increase of 25% year over year and an all-time high for TD SYNNEX. Free cash flow was $214 million driven by strong earnings growth and a slight improvement in our cash conversion cycle. Within the quarter, we returned $210 million to stockholders, with $174 million in share repurchases and $36 million in dividend payment, bringing our total return to stockholders for the year up to $534 million. Net working capital was $4 billion, which is consistent with quarter two. We have added a gross cash days metric to the investor presentation, which we believe better reflects the fundamentals of the two-tier distribution industry and our organization. Our gross cash days were approximately sixteen days, which was consistent with the prior year, and a one-day improvement from the prior quarter. We ended the quarter with $874 million in cash and cash equivalents, and debt of $4.2 billion. Our growth leverage ratio was 2.3 times, and our net leverage ratio was 1.8 times. For the current quarter, our Board of Directors has approved a cash dividend of $0.44 per common share that would be payable on 10/31/2025 to stockholders of record as of the close of business on 10/17/2025. Now moving on to our outlook. These numbers are all non-GAAP. For the fourth quarter, we expect gross billings in the range of $23 to $24 billion, representing an increase of approximately 11% at the midpoint. Our outlook is based on a euro to dollar exchange rate of 1.18. Net revenue in the range of $16.5 billion to $17.3 billion, which translates to an anticipated gross to net adjustment of 28%. Non-GAAP net income in the range of $281 million to $322 million, non-GAAP diluted earnings per share in the range of $3.45 to $3.95 per diluted share, based on weighted average shares outstanding of approximately 80.7 million. We expect a non-GAAP effective tax rate of approximately 23% and interest expense of $91 million. In closing, we remain in a strong financial position to close out what has been a great year for our business and are leveraging our strategic pillars that we outlined during our Investor Day to ensure we continue to be the partner of choice in IT. With that, we'll open it up for your questions. Operator? Operator: At this time, if you would like to ask a question, press star, then the number one on your telephone keypad. To withdraw your question, simply press 1 again. We request that you limit yourself to one question to allow time for the other participants to ask their questions. If there is time remaining, you are welcome to requeue with additional questions. We will pause for just a moment to compile the Q&A roster. Your first question comes from the line of Eric Woodring with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead. Eric Woodring: Hi. Good morning, guys. This is Maya on for Eric. Last quarter, you talked about the potential for Hive potentially decline in the fiscal 4Q on tough compares. Given the strong results in the August and the November guide and the momentum we're seeing in cloud CapEx trends more broadly, should we think about, you know, Hive Dynamics in fiscal 4Q? And then, you know, any high-level color on as we look to next year. Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Yeah. Good morning, and thanks a lot for the question. So indeed that we were a little bit cautious quarter. As you know, I mean, HIVE is a lumpy business. But, I mean, the quarter did I mean, went extremely well as the distribution, by the way. So, what explains the overperformance? First, I mean, we saw growth, significant growth across all the programs and all the customers. So that's point number one. Point number two, we see our second customer demand come back and, we are confident by the way, for for next quarter too. It's the second thing. Then also, we saw more demand for supply chain services than expected. And, so the combination explains the other performance of HIVE. We believe that I mean, those dynamics will remain in Q4 and is reflected our guidance. And, Maya, this is Marshall. Just thinking about the the growth expectations being above what we initially had thought. As we said in previous discussions, we continue to make investments in skill sets, engineering capabilities, capacity, manufacturing, etcetera, to ensure that we stay ahead of capacity requirements. Eric Woodring: Alright. Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Thank you. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of David Paige with RBC. Please go ahead. David Paige: Hi. Good morning. Marshall. Thanks for taking my question. I guess I had two questions. Just any comments around the pull forward for PCs in the quarter? I believe last quarter anywhere from $100 million to $200 million. And if I could stick one other question in on free cash flow, should we still expect $1.1 billion for 2025? Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Perfect. Yeah. Good morning, David. Thanks for the questions. On the first one, so again, we looked at it. As as you know, it difficult to assess, but we think it's very limited. Mean, what we see is we continue to see very good momentum on PCs. Across the world. So all regions are contributing to to it. And, again, it's driven really by the refresh related to Windows 11, the refresh of the base, was built during the pandemic, we also see the start of some momentum on AIPC. So some customers coming to us, because they want an AI PC. Again, the vast majority is related to the refresh. Marshall Witt: And, David, in regards to free cash flow expectations for the year, our expectation is that the free cash flow will be approximately $800 million for the year. Let me give you some some color behind that. As we were thinking about h two coming out of h one, we had given a miss single digit growth rate to the overall portfolio with distribution being a little bit above and and high being that flat to down. Clearly, the results for quarter '3 showed a 10% growth rate and expectations again for a 10% growth rate in Q4. So in essence, that has lifted the overall working capital requirement for the entire portfolio, both distribution and HIVE. As you know, HIVE has a little bit longer cash conversion cycle given what is required in terms of raw material to ultimately finish rack and how that fell through. And staying ahead of our customers' requirements in terms of ensuring they have a a smooth supply chain. If we think about quarter four, which ultimately is where this goes, we if you look at our our press release, you could see that our year to date free cash flow was zero. Coming into Q4 So how do we get there? And thinking about four cash flow, we think that's gonna be around free cash flow is maybe around $850 million. It's roughly divided evenly between earnings growth for the quarter and expected cash conversion improvement of two to three days. I will say with that and and thinking about what we had said at Investor Day, we still believe over the medium term, cycle that netting net income to free cash flow conversion should stay right around 95%. David Paige: Great. Thank you so much. Patrick Zammit: Thank you. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Keith Housum with Northcoast Research. Please go ahead. Keith Housum: Thank you. I apologize if my phone's breaking up. Hey guys, great quarter, obviously, in terms of better than expected. I guess, the question that may be asked here is, how sustainable do we see this being? Is there any pull forward that we saw from the, you know, fourth quarter fourth quarter and the third quarter? Patrick Zammit: Yeah. So so good morning. Again, I mean, if you look at what is driving the other performance, so if I I think about distribution, it's it's PCs, it's software, it's cybersecurity, it's compute, I mean, we believe that, that dynamic will continue into Q4. And then HIVE benefits from a very favorable environment, Hyperscalers are confirming or increasing their spend. And we are positioned on programs where the demand continues to be healthy. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Michael Ng with Goldman Sachs. Please go ahead. Michael Ng: Hey, good morning. Thank you for the question. I just have two quick ones on on Hive. First, I was just wondering if you could talk a little bit about the progress in onboarding, new customers beyond the the two main ones that you have? And then, you know, secondly, could you just talk about whether the growth in high volumes tend to be more from the traditional server side or AI server side. Thank you. Mike, I'll start, and then Patrick, please chime in. So we continue to make good progress in what we'll call programs as Patrick mentioned earlier. Programs to us is the way we define our ability to continue to to grow our presence in in Hive and ODMCM. And data center supply chain management. We do expect to continue to diversify our portfolio, our pipeline remains quite healthy and strong that continues to grow. We're we will continue to seek out more customers in the super six and beyond that. And so we feel good about where that's heading. Pat, do you wanna cover all of those? And so good morning. Patrick Zammit: Just adding that the growth is coming from networking, and compute, and more traditional compute. We have some GPU projects in in the pipe, but, when you look at Q3, the vast majority of Q4, again, the demand will come from networking and and traditional compute. Michael Ng: Great. Marshall. Thanks, Patrick. Patrick Zammit: Thank you. Operator: That concludes our question and answer session. I will now turn the call back over to Patrick Zammit for closing remarks. Patrick Zammit: So thank you everyone for joining us. I want to close by reiterating that our goal isn't simply to perform today. It is to continue building a company that can do so reliably over the long term. That means continuing to invest in our people, in innovation, and in the systems that allow us to anticipate change, rather than react to it. Our approach has always been about building enduring capabilities. Deep customer and vendor relationships, operational discipline, and a culture that adapts quickly to change. These are the factors that we believe will allow all us to continue to deliver differentiated performance year after year regardless of the market cycle. Of course, none of this would be possible without our coworkers around the globe, who are the driving force behind our success. We are grateful for the trust of our vendors, customers, and shareholders place in us, and we remain focused on earning it every day. Thank you, and have a great day. Operator: That concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect. Have a nice day.
Operator: Good day, everyone, and welcome to Petershill Partners Interim Results First Half 2025 Results Call. [Operator Instructions] I would like to advise all parties that today's call is being recorded. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that during this call, we may make a number of forward-looking statements, which could differ from our results materially, and Petershill Partners assumes no obligation to update these statements. I'd like to also encourage you to take a moment to read and digest the disclaimer on Slides 2 and 3 of the presentation. By attending this presentation, you will be deemed to have read and understood the terms of the disclaimer and agreed to be bound by them. A replay of today's call will be available on the Investor Relations section of our website, along with a copy of our interim results and presentation. Now I'd like to hand the conference over to Ali Raissi-Dehkordy, Co-Head of the Petershill Group within Goldman Sachs Asset Management. Please go ahead. Ali Raissi: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us to discuss the Petershill Partners' interim results covering the first half of 2025. Today, I'm joined by Naguib Kheraj, Chairman of the Independent Board for Petershill Partners plc; Robert Hamilton Kelly, Co-Head of the Petershill Group; and Gurjit Kambo, CFO of the Petershill Partners plc. Before we discuss our financial and operational results, as you may have seen this morning, we have made an additional announcement. This sets out the Board's proposal and intended recommendation for Petershill Partners to implement a return of capital to all free-float shareholders, which will involve the cancellation of the free-float shareholders' shares and to delist from the London Stock Exchange's main market before reregistering as a privately limited company. To discuss this proposal, I'll pass you on to Naguib. Naguib Kheraj: Thanks, Ali, and good morning. We've announced an important set of proposals today, which we believe will provide a compelling opportunity for shareholders in Petershill Partners. The proposals would deliver with speed and certainty, a return of capital to the free-float shareholders at a substantial premium to the undisturbed share price and a price which is fair to all shareholders. The consequence of the proposals would be that the free-float shares would be canceled and the company would cease to be listed on the stock exchange. Let me take you through the key aspects and the way the Board has thought about the issues in coming up with the proposals. On Slide 6, we set out the value proposition, which is a total payment to free-float shareholders of $4.202 per share. This is made up of $4.15 per share for the return of capital and an interim dividend of $0.052 per share. The total payment is a 35% premium to yesterday's closing share price and a 41% premium to the volume-weighted average price for the past 6 months. The total value equates to a 10.6% discount to book value as compared with the average discount to book value of 37% that the stock has traded at since January 2024, and it represents a P/E multiple of 18.5x. For a shareholder who participated at the time of the IPO, this would translate into a total return over the period of 16%. This compares to the total shareholder return for the FTSE 250 over the same period of approximately 4%. Moving on to Slide 7. I'd like to explain the background and rationale for the Board's proposal. Petershill Partners was listed on the London Stock Exchange in September 2021 with the goal of providing shareholders diversified exposure to the growth and profitability in the alternative asset management industry. We've delivered on that manifesto in terms of growth of assets under management and fee-related earnings. Despite the macroeconomic headwinds and the challenging environment for alternative asset management investing, we've also increased the focus on private market strategies. And so now 95% of our AuM is in private markets with long-term locked-up capital. Slide 8 outlines some of the actions which the Board and the operator have undertaken to drive value creation in addition to the company's underlying performance. At the time of the IPO, we spoke about our intention to generate value through M&A activity. Over the past 4 years, we've invested $1.3 billion in 14 transactions, acquiring stakes in new partner firms or adding to our existing holdings in some firms. We've also sold 5 partner firm stakes at premium valuations, realizing an aggregate nominal value of approximately $1.9 billion. As a Board, we are very conscious of our responsibilities as stewards of shareholder capital. In addition to the regular dividends paid out of operating earnings, we've deployed capital on share buybacks and last year made a tender offer of $103 million at a premium. Following the tender offer, we switched to returning capital to shareholders through special dividends. So we didn't shrink the free-float any further and have paid $438 million in special dividends. Despite the underlying operating performance and these actions to create value and optimize capital efficiency, the Board does not believe the company's share price and valuation has appropriately reflected the quality and value of the company's assets and its attractive growth prospects. Since the 1st of January 2024, the company has traded at an average discount of 43% to the P/E multiples of listed U.S. and European alternative asset management firms and an average discount of 37% to reported book value. The Board's view is that this valuation discount reflects the fact that investment companies are generally trading at a discount to book value, especially where their assets are illiquid. In addition, macroeconomic market, geopolitical and industry factors have dampened interest in our kind of business and the low level of liquidity in the stock due to its limited free-float has also been a factor. We believe that absent any significant catalyst, these factors and the valuation discount would endure. And at these valuation levels, the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs would not be sellers, and so the free-float would remain small and the liquidity in the stock would continue to be limited. Having made a number of disposals, the company has cash available on the balance sheet and a substantial amount of near-term receivables, which are contractually binding deferred payment obligations. As a Board, we've been considering how we would use that capital optimally for the benefit of shareholders. One option would be to redeploy it into new investments. However, if the market were to continue to value the company at a large discount to book value, then every dollar of new investment may end up being valued in the stock at significantly less than $1. If instead we were to return the capital to shareholders, then the distributions would enable shareholders to receive cash back at full book value. But by shrinking the company, we would reduce our future growth prospects and potentially with a smaller company, present a less attractive investment opportunity, which in turn, could result in a lower valuation and a higher discount to book value. So as an alternative, we determined that we could mobilize resources in such a way as to create a near-term opportunity to provide the free-float shareholders with the ability to realize their investment at a substantial premium to the current market and at a level close to book value. Slide 9 sets out the sources of funding as well as the key factors the Board considered in assessing the value at which the transaction would make sense. We have a good starting base because we regularly attribute a fair value to every partner stake as part of our financial reporting. This takes into account our assessment of future growth, and we provide extensive disclosure in our financial statements of the discount rates and other parameters, which are used to come up with a fair value. We also use external valuation experts. But the financial statement values do not take into account illiquidity. By definition, all our investments are minority stakes and are inherently illiquid. We cannot control or easily drive exits or sales and have to work with the majority owners. Some of our partner stakes are very large and so would have a limited universe of potential buyers. And if we were to declare ourselves to be a seller of assets in a runoff, this could also have an impact on achievable values. So our situation is not the same as an investment company, which holds a portfolio of liquid traded stocks, which can easily be sold in a short space of time. If we think about the discounted cash flow value at the level of a plc shareholder, this is slightly different to the aggregated book value of the positions held on the balance sheet. The book value captures the gross value of the individual investments and takes a provision for taxes and divestment fees, assuming those assets are sold at those marks. What the balance sheet book value doesn't capture is the present value of future operating costs of the plc vehicle, such as the operators' fees and governance costs, nor does it capture future taxes on earnings if one were to realize the underlying cash flows from holding the investments. We've taken these factors into account. Of course, all the valuations have inherent in them considerable uncertainty on timing and achievability. What we have on offer in our proposal is certainty of cash proceeds within a short period of time. We are effectively providing an acceleration of value realization. So when we look at the value being put forward in these proposals, we think that the price represents a fair price for all shareholders, and our external advisers have also come to that conclusion. Slide 10 explains the structure and the timetable. The proposal is to be implemented by a court-approved scheme of arrangement in which the company will return capital to free-float shareholders and cancel their shares. There is no third-party offer, and this is not an offer by the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs. The practical result is analogous to the free-float shareholders selling their shares. And the end outcome when the free-float shares are canceled would be that the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs, which currently owns 79.5% of the company, will end up owning 100% of the company. All of the resolutions involved are interconditional and the deal will not happen unless they are all passed. For the capital return, the outcome of the shareholder vote will be determined solely by the free-float shareholders. It requires 75% of the free-float to vote in order to pass the resolution and the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs will not be able to vote their shares and they will not participate in the capital return. We expect to post the documents relating to the transaction on the 7th of October, and the shareholder meetings to approve the transactions would take place on the 3rd of November. If approved by shareholders, the cancellation of the shares and delisting would happen in early December and the cash settlement would take place shortly after that. I hope you found this explanation helpful. As a Board, we've worked very hard to ensure we optimize the outcome for all shareholders. We believe that the proposals we put forward are a good solution, which enables free-float shareholders to realize a substantial premium for their shares in cash and with a high degree of near-term certainty. And the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs have confirmed that they also support the proposals. I will be available, as will other directors and the operator team over the coming weeks to meet with shareholders and answer questions so that investors are able to make a well-informed decision ahead of the shareholder meetings. With that, I'll pass you back to Ali and Gurjit to talk through the interim results. Ali Raissi: Thank you, Naguib. And as the operator of Petershill Partners, we acknowledge the independent Board's proposal that you've set out this morning. Now to summarize the business' interim results for the first half of the year, starting on Slide 12. The company delivered good operational and financial performance in the period, with steady growth in total AUM and fee-paying AUM and double-digit fee-related earnings, FRE growth on a pro forma basis to $99 million when adjusted for disposals. Partner realized performance revenues of $46 million increased relative to a lower comparable period with tentative signs of a pickup in realizations emerging. Partner realized performance revenues, PRE, represented around 20% of the Petershill Partners' total revenue during the first half. Adjusted earnings per share came in at $0.114 per share, 35% higher than the first half of the prior year, largely due to a significant increase in interest income related to the general catalyst loan notes. Finally, the first half of the year's total capital return was $265 million, which included the final dividend payment of $114 million and the special dividend paid of $151 million relating to the divestment of the majority of the company's stake in General Catalyst. In addition, the Board have announced today an interim dividend of $0.052 per share, being 1/3 of the prior year's total ordinary dividend per the company's dividend policy. This will be paid on the 31st of October to eligible shareholders. Before I pass on to Gurjit to go into the details of the results, on Slide 13, I'll touch on the key activities across our partner firms and our interactions with partner firms during the first half of the year. Overall, asset raising and strong engagement has continued despite the volatile market backdrop with $19 billion of gross fee eligible assets raised in the first half. During the first 6 months of the year, Petershill Partners has been active with the sale of the majority of its stake in General Catalyst for $726 million and the acquisition of a stake in Frazier Healthcare Partners for $330 million. Since the end of the period, as previously announced, the disposal of the stake in Harvest Partners was completed for nominal consideration of $561 million. In addition, the company completed a follow-on acquisition for $158 million in STG Partners. Petershill Partners' support to grow partner firms has continued with 222 engagements across a diverse range of functions with particular focus on the support for capital formation. Partnership and alignment with our GPs remains a core tenet of our business model, and we continue to roll out new initiatives to support our firms. I will now pass you on to Gurjit and our results for the half year in more detail from Page 14. Gurjit Kambo: Thank you, Ali, and good morning to you all. As Ali has previously highlighted, fee-paying AUM has grown 3% year-on-year and also on a year-to-date basis, despite the net negative $9 billion impact from our M&A activities and $6 billion of realizations as our partner firms continue to succeed in raising new assets that attracts new fees for the company. Total AUM now stands at $351 billion, up 6%, and our ownership weighted fee-paying AUM at the end of the period stood at $28 billion, down from the $29 billion as at the end of 2024, impacted by disposals. Ownership-weighted total AUM is unchanged at $40 billion. Turning to Slide 15. On a reported basis, net management fees of $177 million declined by 8% and fee-related earnings of $99 million declined by 12%. On a pro forma basis, adjusted for disposals, both net management fees and FRE increased by 14% year-on-year. The 14% growth in FRE on a pro forma basis has been driven by higher gross management fees, up $15 million, and net transaction fees $7 million higher. Partner firm fee-related expenses totaling $78 million were down 3% year-on-year on a reported basis. But when adjusted for disposals in the first half of 2024, we would have seen partner firm fee-related expenses up compared to $68 million on a pro forma basis in the first half of 2024. On to Slide 16. Partner realized performance revenues or PRE totaled $46 million during the period, higher versus the comparable period last year, driven by a pickup in the realization activity and a stronger contribution from the absolute return strategies. PRE represented 20% of the total partner revenues for the first half, which is tracking within our guidance range of 15% to 30% for 2025. On the right-hand side of the slide, the share of partner accrued carried interest of $774 million increased by around 11% since the end of the year, primarily driven by increase in accruals. Moving on to Slide 17 and our balance sheet. Our investments in partner firms at fair value as at 30th of June 2025 was $5.5 billion, down from the $5.8 billion as at the end of 2024. The change includes additions of $275 million relating to Frazier Healthcare Partners, $184 million change in fair value, offset by the $730 million from disposals relating to the General Catalyst sale. The investments at fair value at 30th of June 2025 excludes an amount of $509 million relating to the loan notes from the sale of General Catalyst. There was no material change in the weighted average discount rate used to value the private market fee-related earnings and performance-related earnings. The book value per share at the end of June 2025 was $4.70 and is broadly unchanged from the $4.71 as at the end of the year. The $4.70 per share is equivalent to 342p using the 30th June 2025 U.S. dollar GBP exchange rate. On Slide 18, we set out a few of our post-balance sheet events since the first half reporting period ended. On the left-hand side, we highlighted the previously announced disposal of our stake in Harvest Partners, which was sold for $561 million in total consideration in July 2025. On the right-hand side, we show the acquisition of a follow-on investment in STG, a technology-focused middle market private equity firm, which we completed on 18th of August for total nominal consideration of $158 million. I'll now pass back to Ali to make some final remarks. Ali Raissi: Thank you, Gurjit. As you've heard, Petershill Partners continues to deliver good results for the year so far, and we are pleased that our partner firms have continued to raise new gross fee eligible assets, including some that was originally expected in the second half of this year. Our financial guidance for 2025 is unchanged, and we have continued to acquire and dispose of GP stakes at what we view as attractive valuations during the course of the year despite a challenging external environment. Finally, as you've heard from Naguib, in addition to the interim dividend of $0.052 per share that will be paid at the end of October, the Board intends to recommend a proposal to return $4.15 per share to free-float shareholders for the cancellation of their shares ahead of the intention to delist the Petershill Partners business, resulting in a total payment of $4.202 per share. As the next step, we intend to publish a shareholder circular and notice of court meeting at the General Meeting in October, ahead of the shareholder votes in November. We note that the Board is unanimous in their opinion that this proposal is in the best interest of the company, free-float shareholders and all shareholders. With that, we thank you for joining the call, and we'd like to open it up for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We will take our first question from David McCann with Deutsche Bank. David McCann: I have only really one to ask, please. So I mean, what do the underlying private fund investors think about this proposal? I mean, clearly, one of the key reasons for the IPO was to provide them with an eventual exit at some point. So now, I guess, they're going to be waiting even longer for when that may happen. And obviously, we'll close one important source of liquidity for them. So the question really is, what are their views on these proposals? And what proportion of the private fund investors were in favor? Ali Raissi: David, thanks for the question. Look, I think as you noted, the public company was an important potential avenue of liquidity, but you also note that over the last 4 years, that liquidity, the share price would have indicated, hasn't been at an attractive level that the private funds had found compelling. I think most private investors that we've engaged and clearly, we'll continue to have conversations have recognized value in the underlying assets and particularly the value that as sort of indicated by some of the private transactions that we've been able to undertake for the public company. And so while some of that liquidity may not be available if the company wasn't publicly listed, those shareholders continue to benefit from yield and could also benefit from any realizations along the lines of what we've been able to demonstrate over the last 18 months for the public company. Operator: Any further questions, Mr. McCann? David McCann: No. That's all for me. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And we have no further questions at this time. My apologies, we did have a requeue from David McCann. David McCann: Yes. Since no one else is asking a question, maybe I'll ask one more then. So I mean, you touched on in the opening remarks some of the other options you do consider as to how you might close the gap between the book value and the other -- measured value and the share price. I mean, did you explore any other avenues such as the disposal of the assets to another business or do you need another aggregator in the industry? Maybe you can touch on some of the other avenues which you did explore in addition to some of the measures which you have historically taken. That would just be useful to understand if there was any other thought process there. Naguib Kheraj: Yes. I mean, look, we did consider prevailing trends and valuation levels in the marketplace. But the -- this is a very big portfolio. So the gross assets in the company are over $5 billion. So there are very few people that are able to write a check that size. And if you follow secondary markets in private equity, secondary market transactions typically happen at a significant discount to NAV. So we don't think that, that would have achieved something like the outcome we're able to have generated by ourselves. Operator: And we have no further questions at this time. Naguib Kheraj: So we can close the call then, and thank you very much for your participation. Ali Raissi: Thank you, everybody. Gurjit Kambo: Thanks. Operator: This concludes today's call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome, everyone, to H&M Group's Conference Call Nine-Month Report for 2025. [Operator Instructions] Please be advised that this conference is being recorded. Today, I am pleased to present Joseph Ahlberg, Head of Investor Relations. I will now hand over to our speakers. Please begin. Joseph Ahlberg: Good morning, and warm welcome to everyone. Today, we present the third quarter results for 2025 for the H&M Group. I am Joseph Ahlberg, and I'm Head of Investor Relations. Before I hand over to our CEO, Daniel Erver, I would like to share this morning's setup. As usual, Daniel will share a short summary of our results, a run-through of selected highlights from the quarter as well as a brief outlook, then we will continue with a Q&A where Daniel; our CFO, Adam Karlsson; and I, will be available to answer your questions. So with that, please go ahead, Daniel. Daniel Erver: Thank you, Joseph, and good morning to everyone. It's great to have the opportunity to speak to all of you again. In the third quarter, we continued to take important steps in the right direction. So let me start by summarizing some of the key numbers from the quarter. The positive sales development continued in the third quarter. Sales grew by 2% in local currencies. And this growth should be seen in the context of having 4% fewer stores at the end of this quarter compared with the same period last year. Our upgraded online store rollout earlier this year has been very well received by our customers around the world contributing to a profitable growth in the quarter. Inventory continued to develop in the right direction and decreased by 9% in SEK compared with last year, and that's mainly, thanks to an improved demand planning capabilities as well as in combination with the well-executed summer sale. The composition of the inventory is good, and we see further opportunities for improvement in the fourth quarter. Sales for the month of September are expected to be on par with last year, and this should be seen in the light of high comparative sales figures from the previous year. We increased our operating profit compared with the same quarter last year, thanks to a stronger customer offer, good cost control, and improved gross margin, where a clear majority of the effect was driven by improvement work in our supply chain, as well as somewhat positive external factors. Additionally, currency exchange effects were positive for the gross margin development in the third quarter. This means that we reached an operating profit for the third quarter of SEK 4.9 billion, and this corresponds to an operating margin of 8.6%, up from 5.9% during the same quarter last year. The increase in profit shows that we are on the right track as we continue to make progress in line with our plan to create fantastic products with outstanding value for money, inspiring experiences and strong brands. Now we are on the right track, was also reflected in the response we got from customers when H&M opened in Brazil for the first time in August. I had the opportunity to join the team on-site and seeing the pride of our colleagues, the reception in social media and above all, the excitement of customers entering our stores for the first time was absolutely remarkable. We successfully built on the core of our plan with elevated products, inspiring experiences and a strong brand and combining these strengths with a deep curiosity for the local market. Please take the time to enjoy a short video from the opening. [Presentation] Daniel Erver: I hope you could feel some of the energy that we felt by being there. And based on this positive reception from our customers and the opportunity in a well-established fashion market, we see good potential to grow both in Brazil and in other parts of Latin America moving forward. With 2 stores and online already in place, we will open 1 more store in Brazil during this year. Additionally, 4 stores are signed for 2026, all in top locations in important cities, including the first store in Rio de Janeiro. Another highlight this quarter was the opening of our new flagship store in Le Marais, in Paris, which you can see on the left screen in front of you. This store has an assortment presentation and interior, that is curated for this special location. And this is a great example of how we strengthen the brand, while we are also creating an inspiring shopping experience in one of the world's most important fashion capitals. We continue to elevate our shopping experience both in stores and digitally, as well as strengthening the integration between both of these channels. As a part of this, we will continue to upgrade a large part of our physical stores worldwide with improvements in layout, presentation and tech features. In parallel with improving the customer offer, we continue to drive our sustainability agenda forward, and we are making clear progress towards our ambitious goals, as we continue to integrate sustainability into all parts of our business. And this morning, Fashion Revolution released their results from the latest What Fuels Fashion? 2025 report. Out of 200 major fashion brand and retailers, H&M ranks first for its level of public disclosure on decarbonization and other sustainability areas. Finally, I would like to share 2 great fashion moments from this quarter. First out, COS returned to New York Fashion Week for the fourth year in a row, underlying their ambition to build a global power brand in the accessible luxury category. The strong autumn/winter collection emphasized materials, contrast and craftsmanship. And last week, H&M opened London Fashion Week by presenting the new autumn/winter collection. The show clearly highlighted the strength of H&M's collections and the creativity of our in-house design teams, featuring both womenswear and menswear. The collection is now available in stores and online with a wide range of price points to cater for a diverse set of fashion needs. With leading models on the catwalk and many well-known guests in the audience, the show also included a special performance by British music talent, Lola Young, featured here on the right. While we continue to drive our plan forward, the world around us remains uncertain. With geopolitical challenges and a cautious consumer, it becomes even more important for us to stay focused on what we can influence and where we can make the biggest difference. Everyone across the entire company stays fully focused on our customer offer to always deliver best and outstanding value for money. In an increasing complex environment, our strong culture, together with good cost control and flexibility, allows us to build a stable foundation for long-term profitable and sustainable growth. With that, thank you so much for listening in this morning, and I will now hand you over to Joseph to take us through to the Q&A. Thank you. Joseph Ahlberg: Thank you, Daniel. [Operator Instructions] So with that, over to you, operator, to facilitate the questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question goes to Fredrik Ivarsson of ABG Sundal Collier. Fredrik Ivarsson: You've been talking about the strength in women's collections during the last year-or-so. Can you give us an update on the various performances in the categories during the quarter? Daniel Erver: So womenswear continues to be the main priority for us as a company as we make progress on our plan. We're really, really focused to win women first, and that's where we put the most emphasis. And as we shared before, that's a long term work, where we work systematically and disciplined to strengthen the customer offer. As we shared before as well, we see a lot of the learnings that had an effect on womenswear will be relevant for our other customer groups as well. And sequentially, we start to see an improvement in other customer groups. But the main priority and the main strength still remains the womenswear performance and collections. Fredrik Ivarsson: Okay. And the second question on cost. OpEx down 1 percentage point or 1% local currency, despite, I guess, top line growth and underlying cost inflation and such, can you share with us the sort of key drivers of the lower OpEx? I guess I recall you spent quite some money on marketing in Q3 last year, for instance, did you reduce those kind of costs or is it anything else in there? Daniel Erver: So overall, I think it's important to recognize in this quarter, it's been a tremendous work done by the teams on cost efficiency. And as we continue to invest and have a high activity around strengthening the collections, improving the experience and investing in marketing and branding, we gradually learn what takes an effect or not and then are very disciplined in steering resources and investments towards what really impacts the customer. I don't know, Adam, if you want to shed a bit more light on the cost development? Adam Karlsson: No, it's -- as you said, Daniel, it's generally quite a broad efficiency improvement we see. We've managed to plan our store operations well connected to how we execute on the summer sale. We see that we have improvements in our logistics efficiency, and that can also see and be reflected in the stock levels coming down, which supports OpEx on the logistics side. And then the overall long-term ambition to reduce complexity and bureaucracy in our organization still supports the margin expansion here. So it's a broad profit improvement from many parts of the operating part. Fredrik Ivarsson: Okay. So it sounds fairly sustainable then to me, at least? Adam Karlsson: Yes. We see that we have done long-term improvements and that is one of the benefits, for example, of now improving the management of the stock, and that reflects both in how we operate the stores and also benefits logistics efficiencies. So with that trend, we see that we have a good foundation to continue to be efficient within our operations. Operator: The next question goes to Niklas Ekman of DNB Carnegie. Niklas Ekman: Yes, can I ask you to just elaborate a little bit about current trading? And I know that this is a short period that it's always tricky. And maybe for just that reason, I know you had 11% growth last year, but minus 10% the year before. Is there anything you can say about weather comparisons, anything about underlying markets? Any tangible improvements to your own collections? Just anything you can -- to shed some more light on this figure, which today at least seems to have been a lot stronger than what consensus had assumed? Daniel Erver: Yes. As you already pointed out, it's a number that should be handled with a lot of caution because it is very short-sighted, and we are now in a period, at least in the Northern Hemisphere and especially in the northern parts of Europe, where weather is changing dramatically going from summer into fall, and that has a significant effect on customer demand, while September is a volatile month, and we should be really cautious to manage the number as you point out yourself. What we have seen is that we saw a good weather development late August, early September, and then we have seen a little bit warmer end of September. So it is a month where the weather really is shifting. When we look at the trend, we see it very much in line with the sales trend that we have seen so far. So we -- there is no significant deviation from the trend that we have seen when we look ourselves at the September performance. Niklas Ekman: Okay. That's very clear. Second question, just on Q4 here and the guidance that you're giving about the external factors saying that they will be less positive in Q3. And I imagine that, for instance, U.S. dollar and freight should be a lot lower year-over-year compared to the effect in Q3. And you mentioned tariffs here as a negative. So can you elaborate a little bit about these different components here behind the guidance for Q4? Adam Karlsson: Adam here. It's a balancing effect here that we believe will somewhat neutralize. We see the benefit of the dollar-euro pair working in our favor throughout the spring into the summer and into the autumn. But against that, we have then the impact of the tariffs that will then -- based on the tariffs we paid during the Q3. A lot of those garments will be sold during Q4, and that's when they affect our profit and loss. So there are some counterbalancing effect here. But the effect we speak out as currency, freight and raw materials are still to be seen as somewhat positive. Operator: The next question goes to Daniel Schmidt of Danske Bank. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. Maybe a question on the growth potential. You talk about it when it comes to Latin America, and you seem to be very excited about the start so far in Brazil. Do you think that the expansion plans that you have for Latin America will be able to turn the trend when it comes to net store closures in 2026? Daniel Erver: So we are really excited about the opportunity in Brazil, mainly based on how well we have been received by the customers in Brazil and how they have appreciated our offer. But we also see continued opportunity to optimize the store portfolio, and that work is ongoing. For Q4, it will have a slightly negative impact on sales, as we have communicated before. The outlook for 2026, we will share connected to the Q4 report. We're working hard to find opportunities for H&M to continue to be a growth company, and that's part of the work, but the specific numbers of what we'll see, we will share in the fourth quarter when we talk about the total net effect of the optimization work that we will do in 2026. Daniel Schmidt: Okay. But is it fair to say, you mentioned 4 new stores in Brazil for '26, for example, is it likely that there will be many more stores in Brazil than these 4 or are the lead times much longer than you think? Daniel Erver: As always, when we work to establish ourselves in the new market, it's important that we establish ourselves in the right locations, and that is really to be in the malls with the right customer demand, in the right location in the mall where we can provide the full H&M experience, and then Brazil is a mature fashion market and retail market, but it's also a well-established market. So it's not new malls being built. It's finding locations in existing very strong performing malls, but it's fine in those locations. And that's the work that needs to balance speed for chasing the potential with quality of building fantastic stores in the right locations. So when we look at the total portfolio optimization, of course, Brazil will be one key important part, but we also see opportunities in other parts of the world as well as continued need to consolidate part of our portfolio or we don't have the customer demand. So we will come back in Q4 with a more holistic view of how we look at 2026. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. Maybe just 1 question for Adam then. The question was already up on the table, but could you maybe sort of give us a ranking of the impact when it comes to the gross margin of these factors that we've talked about, improved supply chain, internal factors, markdowns, FX? Adam Karlsson: Yes. I'll try that. The majority of the improvement comes from our own work, so to say, the work that we've been speaking about how we collaborate with the partners in our supply chain, how we leverage that partnership, how we also work all the way down to second and third tier of our supply chain to ensure that we have a very competitive offer in -- that we can put in front of our customer. So the majority comes from our own work. Then we had last year some effects that went against that and those we don't think we will have sort of supporting year-on-year in Q4 as we did now in Q3. So majority will remain. The trend is clear, but some of these one-off effects that we saw during Q3, we don't think will materialize in Q4. Operator: The next question goes to Adam Cochrane of Deutsche Bank. Adam Cochrane: Well done on the results. Firstly, the markdown was much lower than I think we expected in the third quarter. Can you just say how you cleared the inventory position with less markdown than you were expecting? Did you do anything differently or was it the consumer demand was stronger than expected? Daniel Erver: This is Daniel. Starting off, the team has done a great job with how we executed the summer sale. So we were able to solve a lot of stock with us in an efficient way, which is well done on the execution of the teams working throughout our market. We also see with stronger collections that we are in a better situation. We still do see a need -- having a cautious consumer that is squeezed for -- although having a squeezed wallet, we still see a need to use a reduction to activate the customer from time to time, and that's why we still have a fairly high level of activity in Q3 and that will also continue into Q4. So we monitor the cautious customer clearly, and we do activities, but we are stock level wise in a very good situation after well-executed summer sale. Adam Cochrane: So still on that point, are your collections better and they're selling well? And at the same time you have to do selective promotions in order to get other consumers to spend the money? Is it a sort of mixed impact on the consumers? I'm trying to understand really how you can have better collections that are being received well and you still have to puts some markdowns or promotions in to get other consumers to purchase. Daniel Erver: Yes. The work we are doing is a long-term journey to strengthen and build a really strong competitive offer. And to do that, we always need to make sure that we offer outstanding value for money. And that's both in the price and how we work closely with suppliers, as Adam shared, to really offer outstanding value for the price that we charge, but it also is around how we provide short-term offers and activities to really stay competitive. And here, we act differently in different markets, and we monitor the market situation. And we're also looking at the customer base that we have and the ones we're moving towards, and in that play we need to still work with activities and reductions to activate the customer, even though we see gradual strengthening from the full price performance of well-received collection. Adam Cochrane: And then the second one is you talked about some of the store refurbishments that need to happen and the tech investments and things. What is the scale of these store refurbishments when you go across your existing estate? How much do you have to invest on a store? What's the -- is there any sales uplift that you do from that? And how long will it take you to go across the entire estate to get them into the -- to put these investments into each store? Daniel Erver: We're working across the entire portfolio with the different levers to build a really competitive experience. Sometimes that's a full rebuild of a store. We have done that, for example, Times Square is a good example of a full complete rebuild of a store in New York, and we have many others. And then based on those rebuilds and our updated formats, we find components that we believe are good for strengthening the experience, the service, the customer offer in a wider part of the portfolio. And then we, with a lighter program, rolled that out to a wider set of the portfolio, and that's the work that we're mentioning in the report that is starting now and that will reach sort of at the lower investment level, but with improvement -- important improvements for the consumer it will reach a wider part of the portfolio, and that's a work that we are initiating now that would happen in the fourth quarter, but then also moving into 2026. Adam Cochrane: Think it will be completed by the end of 2026? Daniel Erver: No, it's an ongoing work. We have almost 4,000 stores, and we always need to make sure that we are competitive in each location. So it will be an ongoing work of optimizing and improving the experience. Operator: The next question goes to Warwick Okines of BNP Paribas. Alexander Richard Okines: First question is on tariffs in the U.S. I was just wondering what sort of proportion of the goods sold in Q3 were actually bought in the tariff regime? What was sort of pre and post tariff purchases? Adam Karlsson: Adam here. It's varied throughout the quarter. So what we call out here is that we've seen an increase throughout the quarter, and we believe that increase and the effect will sort of become fully loaded towards the end of Q4 and then into Q1 next year, given, of course, the uncertainty of the exact tariff level. So we're not giving any guidance on those, but it's just when the goods were imported and when they were planned to sold. So it's an increase throughout third quarter that will be potentially fully loaded end of Q4 and then continue as far as we know currently then into first quarter next year. Alexander Richard Okines: And on those products, when they are sold with tariffs, have you made any price adjustments to reflect that or is your gross margin commentary just reflecting that you're taking all of the tariff impact yourself? Adam Karlsson: They are of course linked, but they're also, separate those questions. And we need to ensure that we have the right customer offer at all times and we respond to how the consumer and the competitive set is looking. So the gross margin comment right now, it's more on the sort of the consequence of us importing garments with tariffs and a higher portion of garments that has been imported with tariffs will be sold in Q4. Alexander Richard Okines: And if I may just squeeze in 1 more. Just sort of clarify, you talked -- when you talked earlier about Q4 guidance on gross margin, you talked about sort of balance effects that were somewhat neutralized. Does that mean you're expecting tariffs to largely offset the other benefits in the gross margin in Q4? Joseph Ahlberg: Thank you, Warwick. This is Joseph speaking. Of course, we still guide for a net slightly positive effect from external factors as we write here in the report. So that is taking all these effects into consideration, but we do indicate that the net effect is slightly smaller than it was in the third quarter based on our judgment connected to the sort of -- sorry, headwind becoming a bit more negative than from the tariffs, which -- to the technical effects Adam just pointed out. Operator: The next question goes to James Grzinic of Jefferies. James Grzinic: Congratulations on the spring/summer. I had a couple of questions really on gross margin. The first one is, can you perhaps remind us what the FX loss that impacted Q3 last year was, specifically, so that we can maybe take it out of the 180 basis points increase year-on-year that you just delivered? Joseph Ahlberg: Thank you, James. Joseph speaking. Yes, last year, we called out the negative FX effect as a factor explaining the gross margin development, meaning it was one of the significant factors that explained the development. This year we see those effects becoming positive instead. So with a negative effect in the comp base and the positive effect this year, the net effect then becomes positive to the year-over-year gross margin development in the third quarter. Now looking ahead, we don't expect these FX effect to give a significant year-over-year effect to the gross margin development in the fourth quarter when looking at the comp base of last year for the fourth quarter. But then again, we cannot make predictions, of course, on the FX development, but the outlook is more neutral for the fourth quarter presently. James Grzinic: I guess I just wanted to exclude the fact that there were exceptional charges that fell last year due to FX. So you're just referencing the ongoing impacts of contracting in dollar, basically, just to clarify that? Joseph Ahlberg: Yes, so when it comes to the FX effect is what we described last year, part of it is exchange rate losses on intergroup liabilities and receivables. And so it's the FX movement in the quarter. But again, it's important to stress that a clear majority of the increase in the gross margin comes from the improvement work we are driving in the supply chain and the somewhat positive external factors we saw in the third quarter. So we remain as a -- as a robust trend also for the fourth quarter. James Grzinic: Understood. Can I also ask, I appreciate the point on the theoretical dilution from gross tariff impact. But one of your peers in the U.S. has talked about moving considerably on pricing a couple of weeks ago and that was happening at a point where everybody in the space seem to have been doing exactly the same immediately post back-to-school being over. First of all, can you confirm that you are also observing that, that there's an industry in the U.S. that is clearly back-solving for those tariff costs through accelerating price increases? And how do you intend to move if indeed you're also observing that or if you -- indeed, you've moved at all? Daniel Erver: So we are done here. We also recognized and observed that there are price increases happening in the market in the U.S. in -- as a general statement, we see the same thing. And we are monitoring those developments closely to make sure that we offer a really competitive offer. We are cautious and prudent about the development in U.S. for the fourth quarter given the effects that Adam spoke about that we see that we have already paid tariffs on the garments that have imported and those garments will be sold in the fourth quarter; hence, we will see a bigger impact of tariffs on the gross margins. And while we see that on the one hand, on the other hand, we are continuously looking at how do we have a competitive offering and how do we optimize our pricing position and that we do in the U.S. as we do in all other markets, and that leads to both price decreases and price increases to stay competitive, and that's an ongoing work. But we are cautious about looking at the Q4 development in the U.S. given that we know we already paid tariffs that would impact the gross margins as we look into the fourth quarter. Operator: The next question goes to Richard Chamberlain of RBC. Richard Chamberlain: A couple of points of clarification, please. Just back to the comments you made about markdowns, expecting a higher -- somewhat higher impact for Q4 as a result of -- partly as a result of the Black Friday timing shift. Would you expect that timing impact to reverse fully in the first quarter? That's my first question. Daniel Erver: So that's correct. You see that specific shift, we will reverse in the first quarter, but we don't give any guidance for reductions in the first quarter. That would be dependent on how well our collections are being received during the autumn as well as the consumer sentiment as we head into the first quarter. So just that specific effect will be shifted, but we don't have a guidance for the first quarter at this point in time. We will come back to that when we meet for the fourth quarter report. Richard Chamberlain: Okay. Great. Very clear. And my second one was on the -- when you're talking about the supply chain in the statement, you talk about a more flexible supply chain with a higher share of purchases made in the current season. But at the same time, you're planning for extended transport times. I just wondered how that's influencing your thinking about how much inventory you need to have now in the business and how that will affect your sort of working capital profile in the fourth quarter? Adam Karlsson: Adam here. If I start with the transportation lead time, we still see that the negative effect we saw during the autumn of 2023 still persists. We cannot sail the shortest route between sort of supply chain in Asia, customer in Europe. So that still persists. And then within those guardrails, we try always to optimize both the design lead time, how we buy and source the mix of that and of course, how we ultimately secure that we are responsive and flexible throughout the supply chain. But that is what we call out. That sort of shift when it comes to transportation lead time. That has not -- that we're still seeing and observing that we're not sailing the shortest route. So that's what we call out. It's not worse than it's been, but it's not obviously a lot better either than the last 18 months. But then on the responsiveness on the suppliers here and how we collaborate them. Daniel? Daniel Erver: And then as an really important part of how we strengthen the product offering and making sure that we have the most competitive product offering, we are working on how do we increase the speed and reaction time in our supply chain. And that's a wide work that includes both, as we mentioned before, how we move production closer to the customer with what we call nearshoring or proximity sourcing, but it's also working with a set of suppliers that can be much quicker and where they can support with a larger part of the product development process, for example, it's working early on and preparing components to be able to do the design decisions at a later stage still being quick. So it's a broad spectrum of activities that we do where nearshoring is one, but not the only one. We also work a lot with how we collaborate with some of the best suppliers in the world to really speed up our supply chain. And that's how we build up higher responsiveness and can buy more in season, which creates better position and also more relevance for our customers. Operator: The next question goes to Monique Pollard of Citigroup. Monique Pollard: Two questions from me. The first one is just on the space impact in quarter. So obviously, as you mentioned, 4% fewer stores versus last year. But obviously, you'll be closing stores that are less productive, you might be opening larger stores. So what's the overall contribution to sales of that 4% fewer stores? Joseph Ahlberg: Monique, this is Joseph. So in this year so far and also expected for the full year, we do see somewhat negative net contribution to selling. So adjusting for this effect, we would see a slightly higher top line development for both the third quarter and expected for the full year. Monique Pollard: So that impacts quite a bit less than the minus 4 of the stores presumably? Joseph Ahlberg: That is correct, Monique. We do close low productive, low profitability stores and open the best possible stores, looking in every corner of the world for the best expansion opportunities. Monique Pollard: Understood. And then just a quick one on the marketing cost. Is it possible to quantify the marketing costs that were incurred in the quarter versus the -- I think it was about SEK 350 million last year, please? Daniel Erver: So we're keeping a very high activity when it comes to how we strengthen the brand and how we create excitement around all the brands in the portfolio, like the cost show we show, but especially with the focus on the H&M brand, where we continue to invest and have a high activity level. A great example is the Brazil opening where we used the opportunity for H&M entering Brazil as a global event to strengthen the relevance around the brand. And also, of course, the show we did in on London Fashion Week last week, that was a really strong statement of putting our own collection on display and sort of building excitement around that. So the activity remains. And as we have increased activity over the last 12 months, we also learn a lot of where we can find efficiencies and be more disciplined to steer investments that have a significant improvement and really break through all the way to the customers. And that's the ongoing work. We want to send a clear signal that the activity level is high. We believe a lot in strengthening the brand as part of our journey, but we also find efficiencies where we can really focus around the things that really makes a difference. I don't know, Adam, if you want to shed a bit more light on the development. Adam Karlsson: No. I think it reflects what we said that we had an autumn last year of sort of a restart of investing like an overall broad investment in brand and that ambition stays, but we believe that we can find clever ways to get the same and more effective in other ways. So I think that is partly reflected in the Q3 result here where we optimize the resource use and still, as you said, have a very high ambition and engage with a lot of customers all around the world. Operator: The next question goes to Georgina Johanan of JPMorgan. Georgina Johanan: Just 2 questions from me, please. First of all, just in terms of all of the underlying work that you're doing with the supply chain and going through the different supply tiers. I appreciate you're doing sort of more nearshore and can be more reactive and so on. But at the same time, you've obviously talked about markdowns continuing to move higher. So I assume that you are actually achieving sort of better buying with those suppliers, if you like. And I think by the end of this year, you're probably close to some 200 basis points or so cumulative. So just trying to get a sense of how far through that process you are because just from a high-level perspective, 200 basis points is already a great achievement in that regard. And then second question, I think you mentioned in the release around how the digital business is contributing strongly to profit growth at the moment. And I just wondered if that was coming from like the incremental sales that you're generating or actually if there's any initiatives that's been done, particularly around logistics or anything else in the digital business that is supporting that profitability, please? Joseph Ahlberg: Georgi, first question I can answer. This is Joseph. So on the supply chain, we are really driving several initiatives at the same time. We, for instance, have been talking about the work we do working closer with our strategic suppliers. This has been where we have consolidated the supplier base to work very closely with a shortlisted number of strategic suppliers who now stand for a big share of our total order value. And these suppliers, we work very closely with them, open book costing and so on to really make sure that we can deliver on our business idea with really high quality, good sustainability commitments and the right fashion and, of course, at an unbeatable value for the money. In parallel to this, we are ramping up this work that Daniel talked about earlier with collection suppliers with their own product development capabilities where our own design team work very closely with these suppliers design teams to very quickly turn around new design ideas to ready products reaching our customers. So that is also being ramped up at the same time as we are sort of on the other part of the supplier base and working closely with the strategic suppliers. So I hope that clarifies the sort of 2 directions we're driving in parallel. And when it comes to -- yes, the second question, I hand over to Adam. Adam Karlsson: Or did you have a follow-up question? Sorry. Georgina Johanan: I was just going to try and understand if possible sort of -- because that makes a lot of sense, but just how far through that process you were and whether we should be expecting comparable gains into a third year? Joseph Ahlberg: Yes, we do see that the -- if we take the collection buying sort of the in-season buying has been growing steadily. The share has been increasing over the past years. So now we are achieving a fairly high share for selected categories of products like light woven and so on. Daniel Erver: I think looking at the 2 different, as Joseph clearly explained. So I think the work when it comes to optimizing the way we collaborate with our suppliers on the costing models, the consolidation and so on, we have come fairly far in the work, and that's given a lot of support to the gross margin. And we think we are not done, but we're far on that journey. When it comes to increasing the pace of product development, buying more in season and speeding up the relevance to market, we have taken the first good steps, but there's still a lot of steps to be taken on that journey and how we speed up and become more relevant. I think to try to guide on the question, we have come quite far on the improvements of how to consolidate and build stronger gross margins. That work will continue, but we're far along. When it comes to increasing the speed and pace and buying more in season, we're more in the beginning with some great first steps on that journey. Adam Karlsson: And then I think there was a question about the broad cost sort of activities we drive. And I think that can also be seen in 2 parts. One is the effects on the -- sorry, Daniel. Daniel Erver: I think the question was around digital, the updated digital store and the sort of what has been... Adam Karlsson: Was a long time ago we got the question. Repeat the question. Joseph Ahlberg: Georgi, would you like to repeat your second question? Georgina Johanan: Yes, it was just -- I think you mentioned in the release that the digital store has been contributing strongly to profitability improvements. And I just wondered if that was simply coming from more sales in the digital store or if actually there were specific initiatives around maybe logistics or what you're spending on tech or marketing or whatever it was in the digital channel that was particularly supporting profitability improvements. Daniel Erver: When it comes to the digital development, both the sales team and the tech team has done a great job with -- including our creative teams to take the -- sort of provide the imagery and build up the experience. All of that has significantly improved with the rollout of the new optical experience that was sort of concluded at the end of the spring to all our markets where the experience really, really elevates the product offering and elevating the product offering with a stronger product offering and stronger products, that builds an even stronger value for money, and we see that is being really well received by the customers. So that combination of a great product offering where we have improved the design, the product development, the making, the material choices, combined with more inspirational imagery, better flow, better search functions, better size recommendation, that in combination has driven a strong comp sales development, and that's a tremendous job done by our teams. Then we see that -- we continuously look at the customer promise and the different offers that we have and how we provide a competitive experience. And actively and connected working on how can we reduce the return rate given that we don't want neither for the stock management nor for the planet and our sustainability targets, it's good to have high levels of returns. And that's also work that had a good progress during this quarter where we managed to lower the returns, which we see as very positive for both profitability, but as well for our climate impact. So those are the 2 things for this quarter. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And the next question goes to Sreedhar Mahamkali of UBS. Sreedhar Mahamkali: Most of them are already asked, but I just got a follow-up from James' question on tariffs and another small follow-up on something else that was discussed. Just on tariffs, how are you thinking -- I understand your point about watching the market, watching the consumer. Are you planning to follow your key competitors that you're watching? If they move, you move, what sort of kind of time delays that we should be thinking about? Clearly, it would be a persisting headwind if you didn't adjust pricing into next year. How should we think about it? What sort of time delay? How do you think about it? That's the first one. If you can just expand a little bit more, that would be very helpful. And a little bit more short term into Q4 on OpEx. Is there anything we should keep in mind in local currency changes in OpEx? Or is Q3 development of 1% reduction in SG&A a good indication for Q4 also? Daniel Erver: Thank you for the question. I'll take the first one, and then Adam will take the second one. We are in all our markets, monitoring the price development and how this -- I mean we have many markets with quite significant inflation where we continuously adjust prices based on the market competitive situation that we do in the U.S. as well, which leads to both price investments and price increases. And we see a general sort of gradual increase in the market. With that said, we always want to protect that we have a competitive customer offer and offer the best value for money, why we are cautious about Q4, where we already now know based on the tariffs that we paid in the third quarter that they will impact the gross margin. So we will evaluate. We are assessing the strength of our collections and sort of making sure that they are positioned with a competitive price. But of course, when we are paying increased tariffs, it will have an impact on our gross margin. Sreedhar Mahamkali: And I was trying to understand, you're not trying to increase your price gaps. You're trying to keep the price gaps where you want them to be but look to move over time rather than... Daniel Erver: Broadly, yes. But in that, there are always -- sorry. Go ahead. Sreedhar Mahamkali: No, go ahead, please. Daniel Erver: Broadly, that's a fair statement, but we always find opportunities as we look at the competitive situation and our product offering in making changes both up and down. But broadly, that's the direction, yes. Adam Karlsson: And on the OpEx side, I think we spoke about 3 effects that we believe are fairly sustainable. But for Q4, I think one can see that the store operations efficiencies and also the logistics efficiencies are likely to remain a little bit more caution on the marketing advertising side as we -- last year, when we relaunched the brand, we had quite a lot of costs connected to marketing during Q3 that were not there this year. So a little bit less positive impact on the marketing side for fourth quarter. Operator: The next question goes to Matthew Clements of Barclays. Matthew Clements: Most of my questions have been taken, but I thought I'd maybe zoom out a little bit and focus a little bit less on the long term. Just wondering, when you look to some of your benchmark peers, where do you see on cost the biggest and most exciting opportunities going forward? And could you highlight a few areas of initiatives that it's in-store efficiencies, RFID, self-checkouts, et cetera, or in logistics, automation, et cetera? What are the opportunities where currently H&M is underperforming where you think there's a scope basically to catch up and equalize? Daniel Erver: It's a broad and very interesting question that we work with. I think one clear view is that as we work on strengthening our customer offer and really being competitive in offering outstanding value for money, one key piece will be to increase store productivity and increasing the sales per square meter and store productivity is an important way to sort of balance the cost base because many of our costs are not fixed or are fixed. So when we drive productivity gains, we drive a better profitability. So I think that's one important scope where we see compared to some of the best peers that there is potential for square meter productivity. And that links, of course, very closely to both the experience, but especially to what we put into the store and the product offering, which is priority #1, 2 and 3 for our entire organization. So that's one important piece. I don't know, Joseph, if you want to elaborate on other cost? Joseph Ahlberg: Certainly, we have taken good steps on the inventory productivity over the past 2 quarters. We have stock composition, which is good, where we are slightly lower on the number of pieces versus last year. So this is also, of course, an area where some of our competitors are slightly ahead of us still, and we have long-term targets, which are more ambitious than the levels we currently have. So this is, of course, an area also that will help us generate a lot of operational efficiencies as we approach these targets. Matthew Clements: Just a follow-up on the inventory point. What are the key kind of initiatives at the moment? I mean kind of maybe some of your peers might talk about RFID reducing stock management time, visibility through the supply chain, et cetera. What are the kind of areas where you think you can work on over the next couple of years? Daniel Erver: This is Daniel. I'll start. One important area is to have a really, really competitive product. And a big part of what we spoke about with creating speed and flexibility in the supply chain is one key enabler of making sure that we have a very good quality, relevant product as well as strengthening our design teams and really sort of celebrating that know-how and those design team, both with competence, but also with the tech features to help them do efficient, really relevant design. So that's one important piece. We see with the use of RFID as we start to increase the precision and have real-time data, what we carry in all our different locations, physical stores, warehouses and so on, we see a lot of opportunities for optimization where we can offer better site availability at a lower stock level and having less safety stock to still have a very strong site availability. So here, we're excited about the opportunities as we start to roll out RFID at a broader scale. And then we work actively with the teams on improving the demand planning. So using all the data we have in a more efficient way to be more precise how we forecast the demand and then work actively with improving the supply to be precise to that demand, which also then helps us to come down in stock levels. And that's one -- that work that's been done over the last year that shows effect in this quarter, lowering the stock to sales ratio while we're actually increasing availability to the customers. Those are a few of the examples. Matthew Clements: Okay. That's very helpful. And then maybe one near-term question on regional performance. Just looking across your key markets, are there areas where you're particularly happy with performance, areas where you think there's room for improvements and weakness? Just interested on that front. Daniel Erver: If you look at this quarter, it's a quarter of quite even performance across the markets, where there's -- we believe there are opportunities in all markets, but there's no one single one sticking out in particular for this quarter. It's quite even performance across the geographical regions. Operator: The next question goes to William Woods of Bernstein Societe Generale Group. William Woods: The portfolio brands were soft relative to the overall group this quarter and have slowed down on a pretty easy comp. What's driving the weakness in the portfolio brands? Adam Karlsson: Adam here. One of the effects that we see is that, of course, the decision to close Monki as a physical store concept. So we also highlight then that we have within the portfolio brands about 10% fewer stores. So that is one isolated main effect and connected to the closure of Monki stores. And I think worth calling out is we see strong performance in costs, really continuing to build a very strong position in the market and building excitement around the brand, which we have seen with both the list rankings over the last 6 months as well as the reception of their fashion show in New York, which was really well received. So I think that's worth a call out. We also see our youth concept weekday performing well and having a good quarter and a good year so far. So that's on the positive side worth calling out. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I will now return the call over to Daniel for any closing remarks. Daniel Erver: Thank you so much, and then thank you very much to all participating in this conference call. Thank you for listening in, and we wish you all a continued great day. Thank you from Stockholm. Operator: Thank you. This now concludes today's call. Thank you all for joining. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Good day, everyone, and welcome to Petershill Partners Interim Results First Half 2025 Results Call. [Operator Instructions] I would like to advise all parties that today's call is being recorded. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that during this call, we may make a number of forward-looking statements, which could differ from our results materially, and Petershill Partners assumes no obligation to update these statements. I'd like to also encourage you to take a moment to read and digest the disclaimer on Slides 2 and 3 of the presentation. By attending this presentation, you will be deemed to have read and understood the terms of the disclaimer and agreed to be bound by them. A replay of today's call will be available on the Investor Relations section of our website, along with a copy of our interim results and presentation. Now I'd like to hand the conference over to Ali Raissi-Dehkordy, Co-Head of the Petershill Group within Goldman Sachs Asset Management. Please go ahead. Ali Raissi: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us to discuss the Petershill Partners' interim results covering the first half of 2025. Today, I'm joined by Naguib Kheraj, Chairman of the Independent Board for Petershill Partners plc; Robert Hamilton Kelly, Co-Head of the Petershill Group; and Gurjit Kambo, CFO of the Petershill Partners plc. Before we discuss our financial and operational results, as you may have seen this morning, we have made an additional announcement. This sets out the Board's proposal and intended recommendation for Petershill Partners to implement a return of capital to all free-float shareholders, which will involve the cancellation of the free-float shareholders' shares and to delist from the London Stock Exchange's main market before reregistering as a privately limited company. To discuss this proposal, I'll pass you on to Naguib. Naguib Kheraj: Thanks, Ali, and good morning. We've announced an important set of proposals today, which we believe will provide a compelling opportunity for shareholders in Petershill Partners. The proposals would deliver with speed and certainty, a return of capital to the free-float shareholders at a substantial premium to the undisturbed share price and a price which is fair to all shareholders. The consequence of the proposals would be that the free-float shares would be canceled and the company would cease to be listed on the stock exchange. Let me take you through the key aspects and the way the Board has thought about the issues in coming up with the proposals. On Slide 6, we set out the value proposition, which is a total payment to free-float shareholders of $4.202 per share. This is made up of $4.15 per share for the return of capital and an interim dividend of $0.052 per share. The total payment is a 35% premium to yesterday's closing share price and a 41% premium to the volume-weighted average price for the past 6 months. The total value equates to a 10.6% discount to book value as compared with the average discount to book value of 37% that the stock has traded at since January 2024, and it represents a P/E multiple of 18.5x. For a shareholder who participated at the time of the IPO, this would translate into a total return over the period of 16%. This compares to the total shareholder return for the FTSE 250 over the same period of approximately 4%. Moving on to Slide 7. I'd like to explain the background and rationale for the Board's proposal. Petershill Partners was listed on the London Stock Exchange in September 2021 with the goal of providing shareholders diversified exposure to the growth and profitability in the alternative asset management industry. We've delivered on that manifesto in terms of growth of assets under management and fee-related earnings. Despite the macroeconomic headwinds and the challenging environment for alternative asset management investing, we've also increased the focus on private market strategies. And so now 95% of our AuM is in private markets with long-term locked-up capital. Slide 8 outlines some of the actions which the Board and the operator have undertaken to drive value creation in addition to the company's underlying performance. At the time of the IPO, we spoke about our intention to generate value through M&A activity. Over the past 4 years, we've invested $1.3 billion in 14 transactions, acquiring stakes in new partner firms or adding to our existing holdings in some firms. We've also sold 5 partner firm stakes at premium valuations, realizing an aggregate nominal value of approximately $1.9 billion. As a Board, we are very conscious of our responsibilities as stewards of shareholder capital. In addition to the regular dividends paid out of operating earnings, we've deployed capital on share buybacks and last year made a tender offer of $103 million at a premium. Following the tender offer, we switched to returning capital to shareholders through special dividends. So we didn't shrink the free-float any further and have paid $438 million in special dividends. Despite the underlying operating performance and these actions to create value and optimize capital efficiency, the Board does not believe the company's share price and valuation has appropriately reflected the quality and value of the company's assets and its attractive growth prospects. Since the 1st of January 2024, the company has traded at an average discount of 43% to the P/E multiples of listed U.S. and European alternative asset management firms and an average discount of 37% to reported book value. The Board's view is that this valuation discount reflects the fact that investment companies are generally trading at a discount to book value, especially where their assets are illiquid. In addition, macroeconomic market, geopolitical and industry factors have dampened interest in our kind of business and the low level of liquidity in the stock due to its limited free-float has also been a factor. We believe that absent any significant catalyst, these factors and the valuation discount would endure. And at these valuation levels, the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs would not be sellers, and so the free-float would remain small and the liquidity in the stock would continue to be limited. Having made a number of disposals, the company has cash available on the balance sheet and a substantial amount of near-term receivables, which are contractually binding deferred payment obligations. As a Board, we've been considering how we would use that capital optimally for the benefit of shareholders. One option would be to redeploy it into new investments. However, if the market were to continue to value the company at a large discount to book value, then every dollar of new investment may end up being valued in the stock at significantly less than $1. If instead we were to return the capital to shareholders, then the distributions would enable shareholders to receive cash back at full book value. But by shrinking the company, we would reduce our future growth prospects and potentially with a smaller company, present a less attractive investment opportunity, which in turn, could result in a lower valuation and a higher discount to book value. So as an alternative, we determined that we could mobilize resources in such a way as to create a near-term opportunity to provide the free-float shareholders with the ability to realize their investment at a substantial premium to the current market and at a level close to book value. Slide 9 sets out the sources of funding as well as the key factors the Board considered in assessing the value at which the transaction would make sense. We have a good starting base because we regularly attribute a fair value to every partner stake as part of our financial reporting. This takes into account our assessment of future growth, and we provide extensive disclosure in our financial statements of the discount rates and other parameters, which are used to come up with a fair value. We also use external valuation experts. But the financial statement values do not take into account illiquidity. By definition, all our investments are minority stakes and are inherently illiquid. We cannot control or easily drive exits or sales and have to work with the majority owners. Some of our partner stakes are very large and so would have a limited universe of potential buyers. And if we were to declare ourselves to be a seller of assets in a runoff, this could also have an impact on achievable values. So our situation is not the same as an investment company, which holds a portfolio of liquid traded stocks, which can easily be sold in a short space of time. If we think about the discounted cash flow value at the level of a plc shareholder, this is slightly different to the aggregated book value of the positions held on the balance sheet. The book value captures the gross value of the individual investments and takes a provision for taxes and divestment fees, assuming those assets are sold at those marks. What the balance sheet book value doesn't capture is the present value of future operating costs of the plc vehicle, such as the operators' fees and governance costs, nor does it capture future taxes on earnings if one were to realize the underlying cash flows from holding the investments. We've taken these factors into account. Of course, all the valuations have inherent in them considerable uncertainty on timing and achievability. What we have on offer in our proposal is certainty of cash proceeds within a short period of time. We are effectively providing an acceleration of value realization. So when we look at the value being put forward in these proposals, we think that the price represents a fair price for all shareholders, and our external advisers have also come to that conclusion. Slide 10 explains the structure and the timetable. The proposal is to be implemented by a court-approved scheme of arrangement in which the company will return capital to free-float shareholders and cancel their shares. There is no third-party offer, and this is not an offer by the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs. The practical result is analogous to the free-float shareholders selling their shares. And the end outcome when the free-float shares are canceled would be that the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs, which currently owns 79.5% of the company, will end up owning 100% of the company. All of the resolutions involved are interconditional and the deal will not happen unless they are all passed. For the capital return, the outcome of the shareholder vote will be determined solely by the free-float shareholders. It requires 75% of the free-float to vote in order to pass the resolution and the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs will not be able to vote their shares and they will not participate in the capital return. We expect to post the documents relating to the transaction on the 7th of October, and the shareholder meetings to approve the transactions would take place on the 3rd of November. If approved by shareholders, the cancellation of the shares and delisting would happen in early December and the cash settlement would take place shortly after that. I hope you found this explanation helpful. As a Board, we've worked very hard to ensure we optimize the outcome for all shareholders. We believe that the proposals we put forward are a good solution, which enables free-float shareholders to realize a substantial premium for their shares in cash and with a high degree of near-term certainty. And the private funds managed by Goldman Sachs have confirmed that they also support the proposals. I will be available, as will other directors and the operator team over the coming weeks to meet with shareholders and answer questions so that investors are able to make a well-informed decision ahead of the shareholder meetings. With that, I'll pass you back to Ali and Gurjit to talk through the interim results. Ali Raissi: Thank you, Naguib. And as the operator of Petershill Partners, we acknowledge the independent Board's proposal that you've set out this morning. Now to summarize the business' interim results for the first half of the year, starting on Slide 12. The company delivered good operational and financial performance in the period, with steady growth in total AUM and fee-paying AUM and double-digit fee-related earnings, FRE growth on a pro forma basis to $99 million when adjusted for disposals. Partner realized performance revenues of $46 million increased relative to a lower comparable period with tentative signs of a pickup in realizations emerging. Partner realized performance revenues, PRE, represented around 20% of the Petershill Partners' total revenue during the first half. Adjusted earnings per share came in at $0.114 per share, 35% higher than the first half of the prior year, largely due to a significant increase in interest income related to the general catalyst loan notes. Finally, the first half of the year's total capital return was $265 million, which included the final dividend payment of $114 million and the special dividend paid of $151 million relating to the divestment of the majority of the company's stake in General Catalyst. In addition, the Board have announced today an interim dividend of $0.052 per share, being 1/3 of the prior year's total ordinary dividend per the company's dividend policy. This will be paid on the 31st of October to eligible shareholders. Before I pass on to Gurjit to go into the details of the results, on Slide 13, I'll touch on the key activities across our partner firms and our interactions with partner firms during the first half of the year. Overall, asset raising and strong engagement has continued despite the volatile market backdrop with $19 billion of gross fee eligible assets raised in the first half. During the first 6 months of the year, Petershill Partners has been active with the sale of the majority of its stake in General Catalyst for $726 million and the acquisition of a stake in Frazier Healthcare Partners for $330 million. Since the end of the period, as previously announced, the disposal of the stake in Harvest Partners was completed for nominal consideration of $561 million. In addition, the company completed a follow-on acquisition for $158 million in STG Partners. Petershill Partners' support to grow partner firms has continued with 222 engagements across a diverse range of functions with particular focus on the support for capital formation. Partnership and alignment with our GPs remains a core tenet of our business model, and we continue to roll out new initiatives to support our firms. I will now pass you on to Gurjit and our results for the half year in more detail from Page 14. Gurjit Kambo: Thank you, Ali, and good morning to you all. As Ali has previously highlighted, fee-paying AUM has grown 3% year-on-year and also on a year-to-date basis, despite the net negative $9 billion impact from our M&A activities and $6 billion of realizations as our partner firms continue to succeed in raising new assets that attracts new fees for the company. Total AUM now stands at $351 billion, up 6%, and our ownership weighted fee-paying AUM at the end of the period stood at $28 billion, down from the $29 billion as at the end of 2024, impacted by disposals. Ownership-weighted total AUM is unchanged at $40 billion. Turning to Slide 15. On a reported basis, net management fees of $177 million declined by 8% and fee-related earnings of $99 million declined by 12%. On a pro forma basis, adjusted for disposals, both net management fees and FRE increased by 14% year-on-year. The 14% growth in FRE on a pro forma basis has been driven by higher gross management fees, up $15 million, and net transaction fees $7 million higher. Partner firm fee-related expenses totaling $78 million were down 3% year-on-year on a reported basis. But when adjusted for disposals in the first half of 2024, we would have seen partner firm fee-related expenses up compared to $68 million on a pro forma basis in the first half of 2024. On to Slide 16. Partner realized performance revenues or PRE totaled $46 million during the period, higher versus the comparable period last year, driven by a pickup in the realization activity and a stronger contribution from the absolute return strategies. PRE represented 20% of the total partner revenues for the first half, which is tracking within our guidance range of 15% to 30% for 2025. On the right-hand side of the slide, the share of partner accrued carried interest of $774 million increased by around 11% since the end of the year, primarily driven by increase in accruals. Moving on to Slide 17 and our balance sheet. Our investments in partner firms at fair value as at 30th of June 2025 was $5.5 billion, down from the $5.8 billion as at the end of 2024. The change includes additions of $275 million relating to Frazier Healthcare Partners, $184 million change in fair value, offset by the $730 million from disposals relating to the General Catalyst sale. The investments at fair value at 30th of June 2025 excludes an amount of $509 million relating to the loan notes from the sale of General Catalyst. There was no material change in the weighted average discount rate used to value the private market fee-related earnings and performance-related earnings. The book value per share at the end of June 2025 was $4.70 and is broadly unchanged from the $4.71 as at the end of the year. The $4.70 per share is equivalent to 342p using the 30th June 2025 U.S. dollar GBP exchange rate. On Slide 18, we set out a few of our post-balance sheet events since the first half reporting period ended. On the left-hand side, we highlighted the previously announced disposal of our stake in Harvest Partners, which was sold for $561 million in total consideration in July 2025. On the right-hand side, we show the acquisition of a follow-on investment in STG, a technology-focused middle market private equity firm, which we completed on 18th of August for total nominal consideration of $158 million. I'll now pass back to Ali to make some final remarks. Ali Raissi: Thank you, Gurjit. As you've heard, Petershill Partners continues to deliver good results for the year so far, and we are pleased that our partner firms have continued to raise new gross fee eligible assets, including some that was originally expected in the second half of this year. Our financial guidance for 2025 is unchanged, and we have continued to acquire and dispose of GP stakes at what we view as attractive valuations during the course of the year despite a challenging external environment. Finally, as you've heard from Naguib, in addition to the interim dividend of $0.052 per share that will be paid at the end of October, the Board intends to recommend a proposal to return $4.15 per share to free-float shareholders for the cancellation of their shares ahead of the intention to delist the Petershill Partners business, resulting in a total payment of $4.202 per share. As the next step, we intend to publish a shareholder circular and notice of court meeting at the General Meeting in October, ahead of the shareholder votes in November. We note that the Board is unanimous in their opinion that this proposal is in the best interest of the company, free-float shareholders and all shareholders. With that, we thank you for joining the call, and we'd like to open it up for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We will take our first question from David McCann with Deutsche Bank. David McCann: I have only really one to ask, please. So I mean, what do the underlying private fund investors think about this proposal? I mean, clearly, one of the key reasons for the IPO was to provide them with an eventual exit at some point. So now, I guess, they're going to be waiting even longer for when that may happen. And obviously, we'll close one important source of liquidity for them. So the question really is, what are their views on these proposals? And what proportion of the private fund investors were in favor? Ali Raissi: David, thanks for the question. Look, I think as you noted, the public company was an important potential avenue of liquidity, but you also note that over the last 4 years, that liquidity, the share price would have indicated, hasn't been at an attractive level that the private funds had found compelling. I think most private investors that we've engaged and clearly, we'll continue to have conversations have recognized value in the underlying assets and particularly the value that as sort of indicated by some of the private transactions that we've been able to undertake for the public company. And so while some of that liquidity may not be available if the company wasn't publicly listed, those shareholders continue to benefit from yield and could also benefit from any realizations along the lines of what we've been able to demonstrate over the last 18 months for the public company. Operator: Any further questions, Mr. McCann? David McCann: No. That's all for me. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And we have no further questions at this time. My apologies, we did have a requeue from David McCann. David McCann: Yes. Since no one else is asking a question, maybe I'll ask one more then. So I mean, you touched on in the opening remarks some of the other options you do consider as to how you might close the gap between the book value and the other -- measured value and the share price. I mean, did you explore any other avenues such as the disposal of the assets to another business or do you need another aggregator in the industry? Maybe you can touch on some of the other avenues which you did explore in addition to some of the measures which you have historically taken. That would just be useful to understand if there was any other thought process there. Naguib Kheraj: Yes. I mean, look, we did consider prevailing trends and valuation levels in the marketplace. But the -- this is a very big portfolio. So the gross assets in the company are over $5 billion. So there are very few people that are able to write a check that size. And if you follow secondary markets in private equity, secondary market transactions typically happen at a significant discount to NAV. So we don't think that, that would have achieved something like the outcome we're able to have generated by ourselves. Operator: And we have no further questions at this time. Naguib Kheraj: So we can close the call then, and thank you very much for your participation. Ali Raissi: Thank you, everybody. Gurjit Kambo: Thanks. Operator: This concludes today's call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Now I'd like to turn this call over to KK, Senior Vice President, Finance, JPAC and Japan CFO. S.Krishna Kumar: Thank you, Nishio-san. Good afternoon, everyone, and welcome to Oracle Japan's First Quarter Fiscal Year 2026 Earnings Conference Call. We had another excellent performance in this Q1 attributed to growth of cloud services, especially Oracle Cloud Infrastructure. The demand is substantial for our cloud business, which has led to acceleration in revenue growth. In Software License business, we changed our list price in Q2 '25. Therefore, we anticipated that there would be a reactionary decrease due to rush demand in Q1 of last year. We announced the opening of Japan operations center to accelerate innovation in AI adoption by Japanese companies and organizations and to accelerate the adoption of sovereign cloud. This center supports Oracle Alloy partner companies by providing operational expertise and technical assistance, enabling them to deliver a broad range of cloud and AI services and expand their business. Regarding Oracle AI World in Las Vegas from October 13 to 16, starting this year, it will be called Oracle AI World. The new name emphasizes our commitment to help customers and partners take advantage of latest AI innovations to move faster, reduce costs, make more informed decisions and build smarter businesses. You can also participate online via streaming all live events. We continue to add a lot of customers in various industries like public sector manufacturing, financials and information technology. Let me give you a few examples. Number one, Kubota provides products and solutions developed and produced in over 120 countries and regions worldwide across the fields of food, water and environment. When advancing water environment projects across 3 Southeast Asian countries, information was previously managed in a decentralized manner using spreadsheet software and paper creating a risk of human error. Additionally, there was a need to strengthen internal controls and streamline redundant tasks. It was difficult to grasp information on profit and loss project performance in real time, posing challenges for rapid management decision-making. To solve these issues, Kubota selected NetSuite, a solution that could be implemented quickly and cost effectively while offering high adaptability to change. Number two, Yamato Contact Service, which handles Contact Center and BPO operations for the Yamato Group has streamlined its customer support operations by leveraging Oracle Cloud Infrastructure generative AI service and Oracle Database 23ai. Specifically in e-mail support operations, they have successfully increased the match rate for proposing FAQs to self resolvable inquiries to 85%, roughly double the previous rate. This has enabled Yamato to automatically process and reduce approximately 20% of e-mail inquiries relating to TA-Q-BIN delivery operations using AI. Number three, Toyo University. Looking ahead to its 150th anniversary in 2037, Toyo University is formulating a vision for its future as a comprehensive academic institution. To achieve this, a financial accounting system, enabling data-driven management decisions and financial operations was essential. While previously using a custom developed system, the university adopted Oracle Cloud ERP to reduce operational and maintenance burdens and transition to a sustainable, highly flexible system. Oracle Cloud ERP is valued for its extensive implementation track record at universities, both domestically and internationally and its ability to loosely integrate with university-specific peripheral systems via APIs and its flexibility to accommodate future expansion. Number four, AEON Housing Loan Service, AEON faced challenges in its traditional on-premise environment including end-of-life hardware maintenance, delays in applying security patches, difficulties in flexible resource allocation and the need to strengthen its disaster recovery configuration. Against this backdrop, following a feasibility study and POC for cloud migration using Oracle Cloud Lift Services, they decided to proceed with a full-scale migration to Oracle Cloud Infrastructure. With support from Oracle Consulting Services, they achieved full cloud migration in a short time frame. This was made possible by high affinity between our on-premise Oracle database environment and Oracle autonomous database on OCI, coupled with a highly reliable project structure. This is just to give you a sense of the broad outreach in the market that we have with our different products and services and to underline Oracle's presence in most mission-critical systems, applications and industries. Let me move to the numbers. We have made some changes to the face of our income statement to better reflect how we manage the business so you understand our cloud business dynamics more directly. Total revenue was JPY 66,275 million, growing at 3.7% compared to previous year, driven by strong growth in our cloud revenue. Total cloud revenue was JPY 19,097 million, up 37.2% now represent 29% of the total company revenue. Infrastructure consumption revenues continue to have a strong momentum which includes autonomous database. Operating income was JPY 21,128 million, decreasing 4.8% and net income was JPY 14,805 million, down 3.7%. Total revenue again hit a record high for the first quarter. The profit categories were down mainly due to decline in high-margin software license business. We will maintain our guidance for revenue and EPS communicated at the start of this fiscal year. Thank you very much, and back to Nishio-san. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Unknown Executive: [Foreign Language] [Interpreted] First question is from Kikuchi-san of SMBC Nikko. There are 2 questions, but we will go one by one. First question. This is about the revenue of cloud service in the first quarter. Year-on-year, it grew by 37% and Q-on-Q, it grew by 12%. It appears to have grown significantly Q-on-Q basis, but is there any onetime factor? S.Krishna Kumar: As I mentioned in my opening comments, our infrastructure revenues, especially infrastructure [Technical Difficulty] Hello. I'm back. Sorry, I think I got disconnected. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] S.Krishna Kumar: So did you hear my answer to the question? Or should I start again? Yuki Nishio: You were cut off. Please start over again. S.Krishna Kumar: Okay. Let me talk about the cloud revenue. So I think we will -- we saw very strong momentum, as I said in my opening comments. This is across all product offerings, especially infrastructure and even SaaS revenue growth was strong. So -- and I think there is no one-off factor affecting this. So we should see strong momentum continuing into the fiscal year. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Unknown Executive: [Foreign Language] [Interpreted] And second question from Kikuchi-san. This is about HR expense. The growth is quite significant. However, in terms of number of headcount, it is not increasing. So what are the reasons behind it? And if you could share with me the outlook for second quarter and onwards, that would be helpful. S.Krishna Kumar: Yes. Regarding the people expense, we -- there are a few factors that is affecting the increase. There was a salary increase last year that was provided. We are also constantly changing and churning our people. So new people come at higher costs, with the right skill set, and that's the whole intention of the organization. And we also had some restructuring expense that got into the P&L. And also a little bit of stock compensation expenses got affected because the stock price also climbed significantly. So these are some of the factors that are contributing to the personnel expense. The second question on the outlook for Q2 and beyond. As I said, for the full year, I am maintaining my guidance. We should see some bounce back in license. I would expect it to bounce back for the remainder of the year. And we'll continue to see some good momentum on our cloud revenues. So the year looks very strong for us. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Unknown Executive: [Foreign Language] [Interpreted] We have questions from Noda-san of CLSA Securities. This is about Oracle Alloy, when will it start to contribute to the revenue of cloud service? S.Krishna Kumar: Sorry. Sorry, I was on mute. So all the alloys that we have booked, and we have more alloys in our pipeline that we are working on. Some of it will start showing in our numbers towards the end of this fiscal FY '26. But the consumption will really accelerate. The alloy consumption will really start accelerating more in FY '27. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Unknown Executive: [Foreign Language] [Interpreted] Second question from Noda-san of CLSA Securities. OpenAI and Meta in the U.S. are starting to use OCI for their infrastructure to do inferencing. So -- and if these tech companies wishes to -- wish to expand their AI service in Japan. And if they start to use OCI in Tokyo region in order to ensure secure their local resources, will this become a potential upside from Oracle Japan? S.Krishna Kumar: So this is kind of a little -- I appreciate the question, but at this point in time, it's a little hypothetical for me. It all depends on how we contract it and what exactly the nature of work would be and whether it's an Oracle Japan contract or not. But having said that, what we have seen globally, and you -- if you have followed Oracle Corporation's earnings call, we -- a lot of the biggest training model -- or large language models do their training on by default on Oracle Cloud Infrastructure. We also have enabled OCI to offer these large language models to our customers as a choice. For example, our customers can use our generative AI service and use any of these LLMs, whether it's OpenAI or Grok or Llama to further their AI capabilities for their organizations. So there will be some linkages. And of course, it's going to be beneficial for Oracle Japan also. But I don't think I can answer your specific -- I don't -- I have an answer to your question specifically on this one. Thank you. Yuki Nishio: [Foreign Language] Unknown Executive: [Foreign Language] [Portions of this transcript that are marked [Interpreted] were spoken by an interpreter present on the live call.]
Operator: Hello, and welcome to Glenveagh Interim Results 2025. My name is Laura, and I will be your coordinator for today's event. Please note this call is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I will now hand you over to your host, Stephen Garvey, CEO, to begin today's conference. Thank you. Stephen Garvey: Good morning, and thank you, Laura. I am Stephen Garvey, CEO of Glenveagh. I'm joined today by our CFO, Conor Murtagh. We appreciate you joining our interim results call for the first 6 months ended the 30th of June 2025. This morning, I'll walk you through the key highlights, the market, the policy context and how our strategy is showing up in Homebuilding, Partnerships, land and innovation. Conor will take you through the financials and capital allocation, and I will return to the outlook and closing remarks. As always, we will leave plenty of time for your questions at the end. Let's begin on Slide 4, which sets out our headline numbers for the first half of the year. This period demonstrated the strength of our Building Better strategy, set out scale delivery, deepened our partnerships with the state and drove operational efficiency through innovation, and that's exactly what's reflected in our results. Our focus on standardization and vertical integration is now embedded across the business, making us more resilient and more efficient as we grow. The benefits of our early investment and innovation are visible in our margin profile and our ability to deliver at scale even as the market evolves. This is also the first interim period where our Partnerships segment has made a material contribution to group profit. This is a real milestone for us and reflects the strength of our public-private model. We are now recognized as a partner of choice for the state with a growing pipeline and strong demand for our homes. We continue to manage our capital with discipline, optimizing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet even as we accelerated delivery. Our buyback program continues to create value for shareholders, and we are seeing the benefits of a more efficient, more focused approach to capital deployment. We will discuss these elements in greater detail as we progress this morning. For now, I want to emphasize that the strategy we set out a few years ago is delivering for our customers, our partners and our shareholders. Turning to Slide 5. Let's take a moment here to consider what sets Glenveagh apart in the current environment. The need for new homes in Ireland remains acute, and government policy is more focused than ever on increasing supply. This is happening against the backdrop of continued economic strength and a supportive policy environment, so the market opportunity is clear. What gives us confidence is the way we have positioned the business to capture the opportunity. We've built a sector-leading platform, one that's not just about scale, but about delivering high-quality homes in the right locations, supported by a uniquely integrated operating model. Our early investment in innovation and standardization is now delivering tangible benefits, making our business more resilient and more efficient as we grow. We are seeing the benefits of our deepening partnerships with the state and hard-won reputation as a partner of choice for public housing delivery. This is supported by a disciplined approach to capital allocation and a strong balance sheet. Our focus on profitable growth, active landbank management and ongoing investment in our supply chain is enabling us to create long-term value for the business and drive sustainable returns for our shareholders. Providing further context, Slide 6 shows just the long-term demand outlook for housing in Ireland remains exceptionally strong. We continue to see positive trends in income and employment with both wages and job creation rising steadily across the economy. Alongside this, Ireland's population growth remains robust, driven by sustained net inward migration well above the European average. Mortgage lending activity is also maintaining a healthy pace with first-time buyers accounting for a significant share of drawdowns supported by government schemes. The underlying drivers of demand for new homes are strengthening. Turning to Slide 7. We can see in more detail how government policy and recent market initiatives are creating a genuine supportive environment for housing delivery. The National Development Plan and the Planning and Development Act 2024 are setting ambitious targets and providing significant funding alongside the infrastructure and planning certainty needed to achieve them. On the demand side, supports such as Help to Buy and the First Home Scheme continue to underpin affordability for buyers. They both have been extended, giving buyers and developers greater confidence to plan ahead. There's also a strong policy push for modern methods of construction and using state land at scale through the Land Development Agency and local authorities. But as we've said before, meeting Ireland's housing needs will require more than just policy ambition. It will take sustained private sector capital, adequately zoned land, public sector resources and critical infrastructure. The success of our Partnerships platform shows how public and private resources can be pooled effectively to deliver much needed homes. We've shaped our strategy around this shift, and we are beginning to see material results, which we will talk about shortly. In the short term, the policy environment is evolving for the better, and that gives us real confidence in our ability to continue delivering at scale. Now let's dive deeper into our segments, starting with Homebuilding on Slide 8. Just a quick reminder that at the start of the year, we announced with the 2024 results that we have simplified our reporting on Homebuilding previously Suburban and Partnerships, previously Urban and Partnerships. This was a standout period for homebuilding with delivery nearly doubling year-on-year. The momentum reflects the strong demand and the benefits of our differential model and strategy. Standardization, scalable sites, vertical integration are all coming through in our results. Excellence in our execution saw major completions at Kilmartin Grove and Hereford Park as well as major progress across a number of developments and a number of new sites starting earlier in the year. Our average selling price was elevated in the first half due to mix, but we expect that to normalize as the year progresses. Margin expansion in Homebuilding was driven by the choices we made to invest efficiently and repeatably with the forward order book at around EUR 1.4 billion, we have strong visibility for the rest of the year and well into 2026. Turning to Slide 9. Let's talk about Partnerships. For the first time, this segment made a material profit contribution, reflecting the scale and momentum in this part of the business. We now have 6 active sites underway, including new contributions from Mooretown, New Road, the Cork Docklands, which is a development in collaboration with the Land Development Agency, alongside Ballymastone, Oscar Traynor Road and Foxwood Barns. This growing pipeline underpinned by robust planning momentum and repeated demand from public sector clients gives us strong visibility on future delivery. Moving to Slide 10. We can see how our land portfolio remains a source of strength and flexibility. The portfolio has been carefully assembled to align with our strategy. It is focused on supporting high-quality own-door homes in right locations with 74% of our units in the Greater Dublin area. We continue to maintain a strong cost discipline with the average plot cost at EUR 32,000, and the landbank supports an attractive embedded margins and capital returns. Importantly, this landbank gives us capacity to deliver between 2,600 and 3,600 equivalent units per year through to 2030, underpinning our medium-term delivery objectives. We have also been actively managing the portfolio with over EUR 60 million of land sales either closed or at advanced stages, ensuring we remain flexible and capital efficient as the market evolves. Finally, just to note, the recent publication of the National Planning Framework is expected to materially positively impact our strategic landbank, resulting in a lower capital deployment requirement in future land periods. Turning to Slide 11. Our commitment to innovation remains a core pillar to our strategy. We continue to invest significantly in this area. Phase 2 of our innovation program is now underway via a EUR 25 million commitment to expand our off-site facility -- manufacturing facilities in Carlow, including an additional facade line alongside our timber frame platform. At the heart of this is NUA, our in-house manufacturing and innovation platform. Through NUA, we are moving beyond traditional building methods and embracing innovative lightweight alternatives, such as a new wall system, roof cladding and floor cassettes. Our exclusive perpetual license for integrated external facades is now a key part of this, allowing us to increase premanufactured value and improve further efficiencies. Off-site manufacturing and modern methods of construction are already delivering tangible improvements in cost control, build efficiency and margin performance, all of which makes Glenveagh more resilient, more efficient and better positioned to deliver at scale as the market evolves. With that context, I'll hand you over to Conor to talk you through the financials and the capital allocation. Conor Murtagh: Thanks, Stephen, and good morning, everyone. I'll take you through the financials for the first half of 2025, starting with the income statement, then moving to the balance sheet, land and cash flow and finally, our capital allocation priorities. As always, we'll outline the key drivers behind the numbers and what they mean for the business. If we can turn to Slide 13. As Stephen noted, the first half of 2025 marked a period of strong growth for Glenveagh. Group revenue reached EUR 342 million, up 124% on last year. This uplift reflects the momentum we've built in both Homebuilding and Partnerships with delivery volumes and on-site partnership activity, both moving in our favor. Gross profit increased to approximately EUR 67 million, and our gross margin expanded to 19.5%, up 130 basis points. This margin improvement is as a result of several years of investment in standardization, scale and vertical integration in addition to mix benefits. Work in progress rose to approximately EUR 347 million, which is in line with our plans to ramp up Homebuilding output and deliver under the Croí Cónaithe scheme. Net assets finished the first half at EUR 748 million and reflects approximately EUR 35 million of capital returns in the period. Altogether, it shows we're supporting growth in a disciplined way, optimizing working capital, managing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet. Moving to the landbank slide then. Apologies, continuing on the income statement there, we're seeing the benefits of delivering more homes and large repeatable sites and our off-site manufacturing is now contributing to program certainty, quality and cost control. A feature of both business segments in 2025 is the completion of sites and phases with cost contingencies unutilized supporting margin expansion. Underlying gross margin in the Homebuilding segment, excluding noncore sales at Shrewsbury Road and land sales was 22.8% Nevertheless, spot homebuilding margins in the group's medium-term delivery pipeline are approximately 21%, with site mix continuing to be a principal driver as the business monetizes its vintage landbank and scales to 2,000 units with a focus on return on capital. Gross margin in Partnerships in H1 was 16.2%, ahead of target owing to site mix and unutilized contingency due to strong cost control. Similar to Homebuilding, site mix will play a significant role in future periods as the business scales up and the group completes the transition out of its remaining urban sites. EUR 400 million in revenues remains an achievable current year and medium-term target with visibility on replacing existing partnership sites with new wins increasing over the period. Operating profit for the first half was EUR 42.1 million, Net finance costs were EUR 9.6 million, reflecting a higher opening debt level following last year's land acquisitions. Profit before tax was EUR 32.5 million and earnings per share came in at EUR 0.052. Moving to the balance sheet on Slide 14. Focusing in on the key numbers here. Land balance, excluding development rights, was EUR 536 million, down from year-end as we continue to actively manage the landbank and focus on capital efficiency. I'll come back to land on the next slide. Work in progress rose to EUR 347 million, which is in line with our plans to ramp up homebuilding and deliver under the Croí Cónaithe scheme. Altogether, it shows we're supporting growth in a disciplined way, optimizing working capital, managing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet. Moving to Slide 15. I touched on it briefly, and you can see how our landbank is evolving and supporting our growth agenda. The EUR 536 million land balance at June 2025 represents a peak investment level for us. From here, we're focused on reducing capital intensity, delivering units from our existing landbank and executing targeted disposals. We remain on track to complete land sales of EUR 100 million across 2025 and 2026. More than EUR 60 million of that is already closed or at advanced stages of contract. This strategy is about prioritizing capital employed in land and focusing on sites of scale that can support delivery in both Homebuilding and Partnerships. Given the strength of the landbank, both in terms of scale and product type, i.e., own-door homes, we can both grow the business and reduce capital deployed in land towards EUR 400 million to EUR 450 million over the next number of years. Next, Slide 16 shows our cash flow. Operating cash outflow was EUR 10.8 million, a material improvement from the EUR 194 million outflow in H1 last year. That is driven by higher completions, greater contribution from Partnerships and tighter working capital management. Importantly, net debt was EUR 230 million, a lower figure than this time last year despite a materially higher starting position. Moving forward, we continue to invest selectively where returns are strongest, principally funding construction WIP, investing in innovation and returning surplus capital to shareholders, which brings me to Slide 17, where we have our capital allocation priorities. Our medium-term visibility is as strong as it has been. We have clear line of sight on unit growth combined with landbank reduction on replenishing the Partnership's pipeline on freeing up capital, while capturing manufacturing benefits that will provide a structural medium-term cost advantage. Against that backdrop, we continue to focus on 4 key priorities: firstly, land. We're actively reducing our landbank, as I set out, primarily through unit delivery and targeted unit sales. But importantly, we will sustain, as Stephen mentioned, the capacity to deliver 2,600 to 3,600 units per annum. Secondly, work in progress. Investment here is supporting the planned increase in Homebuilding outputs to 1,900 units in 2027, which remains a core driver of revenue growth. Third, supply chain and innovation. We're investing in off-site manufacturing and next-generation building approaches. That includes a EUR 25 million commitment to deliver a new external facade line and facility upgrade, which will transform how we deliver homes. Approximately EUR 10 million of spend will occur in 2025, EUR 10 million in '26 with the balance in 2027. And finally, returning excess cash. The buyback program announced in May has been expanded from EUR 85 million to EUR 105 million. That's been made possible by strong operational performance, robust cash generation and good visibility on land sales. To date, approximately EUR 84 million has been deployed under the current program. This disciplined balanced approach is supporting growth, innovation and value creation while also maintaining a strong financial position. That's the conclusion of the financial review. Stephen, I'll hand back to you for the outlook and to close out. Stephen Garvey: Thanks, Conor. So to bring it all together on Slide 18, we remain fully on track to deliver full year guidance. We are reiterating our earnings per share target of EUR 0.195 for full year 2025, underpinned by a strong operational momentum and a healthy forward order book. We expect to deliver approximately 1,500 Homebuilding units this year with Partnerships contributing around EUR 400 million in revenue. This reflects the scale and the consistency we are now achieving across both segments. On the capital side, we are making real progress in optimizing our land portfolio with EUR 100 million of land sales targeted across '25 and '26. And our landbank remains a core strength, giving us the capacity to deliver between 2,600 and 3,600 units per year all the way to 2030. Notably, we are achieving this growth while reducing the net debt and returning value to shareholders by expanding our buyback program to EUR 105 million today. To wrap things up on Slide 19 and 20, we have our differential investment case. We will conclude -- I want to conclude by emphasizing 3 things: building better strategy set out the direction, and we are executing on it with consistency. Standardization and manufacturing are improving our cost control and speed with benefits already visible in margin and program predictability. Partnerships are now a material first half contributor and our land strategy balances visibility with capital efficiency. We have strong momentum into the second half and beyond. Glenveagh is uniquely positioned with strong visibility on future delivery for the balance of this year and beyond. All of this gives us real confidence for Glenveagh's ability to deliver sustainable value well into the future. With that, I'll pass you over to Laura for any questions you may have, and thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We will now take our first question from Colin Sheridan of Davy. Colin Sheridan: Just maybe starting on Partnerships. Maybe you could talk a little bit about what the pipeline looks at this point in time. And I guess, with the changes we're likely to see from government with additional funding and a change to housing for all, how you think that could evolve or how you'd like to see it evolve in the next year or so? And maybe just on build cost inflation. I mean, you've referred to the sectoral employment orders in the statement. Just wondering how build cost inflation has been progressing more generally and how the vertical integration in the business has been playing its part and trying to mitigate that on site. Stephen Garvey: Thanks, Colin. Partnerships, yes, obviously made substantial progress. I suppose it's a hard one reputation. We've been at this for a period of time, and we're only really seeing the benefits of that flow through on the income statement now. Positively disposed to what we're seeing coming down the track. We're in negotiations on a number of new partnerships, quite substantial ones, some of them adjacent sites, some future sites that are very close to us. Proactive local authorities out there now looking at opportunities and very much looking at certain local authorities who have probably perfected the model and got it really well coming out there to a certain degree. The Land Development Agency, obviously, very proactive now as well. A lot of their land is starting to come into the system. They're running a number of RFPs. So yes, we've obviously got 6 sites on the go. Some of them will come to completion next year, but we're very positively disposed to being able to replace them on an ongoing basis. And I think we've proven we're the delivery partner of choice out there with all government agencies at this stage. So happy to dispose that. Build cost inflation, yes, you're right. On the sectoral employment agreement was 3%. Labor probably makes up 50%, 55% of the delivery out there. So that will inevitably pass through. On the material side, pretty good, a little volatility in 1 or 2 products, but again, in the either, it's probably not too bad out there. So probably happy where things are at. So somewhere between 2.5% and 3% is probably where we see things plateauing out for the next 12 months. We don't see anything on the horizon that makes us concerned out there. On the manufacturing side, I think what you're really seeing from the manufacturing and innovative side is it's probably really driving that way we can deliver programs, being able to release contingency on sites. They're obviously positive to margins. So it's the capability of predictability, sticking with programs, the quality of the product, all of those things are coming. We're probably now moving to Phase 2 of the innovation side. The benefits of that and the cost that, that will bring to the table and the -- or the cost savings, it's too early to predict yet. But Phase 2, 2027, 2028, we really hope it will feed into the system, and we should see positive turn from that. Conor Murtagh: I think what you see in manufacturing over the next number of years is will be labor and labor increases as we're seeing through sectoral employment orders will be less of a dial mover in that CPI number as we transition more and more to premanufactured value. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Shane Carberry of Goodbody. Shane Carberry: Just kind of a follow-up on Colin's question, I guess, in terms of that kind of gross margin point. In terms of the standardization piece of the jigsaw, is it fair to think of that as the main contributor to the kind of underlying growth in the gross margin this year? And just, Conor, you mentioned in the presentation about maybe the mix going forward into '26. So if you could expand on that a little bit more, it would be helpful. And then the second question is just around the medium-term targets really, it sounds like even more confident in the medium term kind of maybe beyond all of our forecast horizons as well. So if you could just give me a little bit more color in terms of how that kind of your confidence has evolved? Is it more the policy side improving, underlying demand getting better? Or it is some of the kind of innovation that you're doing or maybe it's a bit of all of the above. Stephen Garvey: Just -- go ahead. Go ahead. Conor Murtagh: On the gross margin side then, yes, you're right. Standardization is a lot of the benefit. It's also sites of scale. It's also strong cost control, getting to the end of sites and having contingency in place. And you're seeing that particularly on the Partnerships side as well. And then mix, there's a good strong mix effect this year, which brings us to your sort of follow-up question around gross margin for next year. We've spoken since the start of this year about intake margins being around approximately 21% in the medium-term landbank. And what you're going to see is that transition happening in 2026. So you'll see margins of approximately 21% in 2026 is the way to think about it. Stephen Garvey: And just on the policy and medium to long term, positive what we said 2027, we feel very comfortable about the 1,900 units in Homebuilding. We're positive towards the National Planning Framework. I suppose for our view, just where the policy is evolving is, you know the government have instructed the National Planning Framework and instructed local authorities to now go out and start varying their development plans. So an element of local authorities will vary their plans, but they'll also start going into their new plan phase. And we see kind of 2027 into 2028 as the period of time that about 750,000 units of zoned land will come into the system. Some of that will be our strategic land as well. So I suppose that's the opportunity we're seeing coming down the track. Obviously, there will be sites of scale. So yes, positive in the sense of, I suppose, you have a government who are really now on the front foot to drive their policy initiatives. They're probably seeing some challenges with the administration side, not moving as fast as they'd like. But I think, yes, they're really trying to make a difference out there. I think we're well set up that our landbank positions ourselves to 2030. We're obviously core product, 80% of our product is that own-door product, so in a nice place there. But obviously, we hope we can enhance that. And the more the vertical integration feeds into the system, the bigger the sites become, the faster, more efficient we can deliver into the future. So yes, we're in a good place. Operator: We will now take our next question from Jonny Coubrough of Deutsche Bank. Jonathan William Coubrough: Can I ask on the landbank? You said in the presentation that the landbank could support up to 3,600 units a year out to 2030. What other investments would you need to make to achieve this level of output across WIP, supply chain overheads? I think you set out some of this on Slide 17, but it would be useful just for a bit of clarification on that one. And then also, you've mentioned EUR 100 million of land site sales over 2 years. So from there, will you be maintaining about a EUR 450 million landbank? And then how would you be looking to replenish that land? Are you looking at land options or other avenues? Stephen Garvey: Jonny, yes. So look, obviously, last year was the big pivotal year. We bought 9,000 plots of land. There was a 3-year supply in 1 hit. Obviously, we got them at attractive 32,000 a plot. So we're very happy with that. We're not actively in the land market. We're always keeping an eye on it, but we're not actively investing. Probably strategic land is where we're looking at an element of because we know what will come down the track. So product that might come into the system in '29, '30, we're looking at those kind of sites. But we're not making a very big investment on that. On the WIP side of it, I'll leave that. Conor, do you want to go on that? Conor Murtagh: Yes. The WIP is actually well invested. So we've obviously grow Homebuilding units from 1,500 to 1,900 over the next couple of years. But at the same time, we have a number of urban schemes where we're well invested on the apartment side, which we'd be seeking to forward fund in the future. So one in North County, Dublin and another one in Cork. So you could see maybe EUR 50 million go into WIP on a net basis there between now and 2027 to support growth into 2028. And we obviously have called out the office as a cash inflow, most likely in or around 2028. So WIP is well invested even to support that growth that's there. And then on the Partnerships side, obviously, there's a prevalence of forward funding in that. So the investment there will be minimum from where we are at the moment. And then manufacturing-wise, it's the EUR 25 million, with EUR 10 million over the balance of this year, EUR 10 million next year and EUR 5 million in '27. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And while we wait, I'm handing it over for the written question. Unknown Executive: So we've had a question in from Glynis Johnson. She has asked regarding the admin costs for H1 '25. What drove step-up? And what is the guidance for FY '25 and medium term? Second, on land market, she's asked, given the competitive land market, but also the positive upside potential to your strategic land, is there scope to increase the land sales targeted? And lastly, can you elaborate on the facade production? Is this the Mauer system? And how many home units would this likely cover by 2027? Conor Murtagh: I'll take 1 and 2 there. On admin costs, H1 reflects the run rate from H2 2024. So consensus is around EUR 51 million of administration costs for 2025. So we're comfortable with where that is. And over the medium term, we've said we want to reduce admin costs to less than 5% of revenue and are on track to do that. The land market and potential for more land sales. And what we'd say on that is we have greater certainty on the EUR 100 million of land sales than we had a number of months ago. However, the likelihood of it being materially in excess of EUR 100 million has reduced. So EUR 100 million is a good number to have across '25 and '26. And Stephen, do you want to take the Mauer system? Stephen Garvey: Yes, you're right on that, Glynis. Obviously, we're the sole holder of that license in Ireland, and we think it's a huge opportunity for us. The potential savings and how this can evolve is it will make huge benefits for our prelims on site. It's a better, more attractive looking product. We've had some of the local authorities out down to look at the finished product. They're really impressed with it. So they're actually -- the quality of it and the aesthetics of it, it's really pleasing. We are putting it into production in '26. First homes are going out in 2027. And we're going to take it on a phased basis. So probably 10% of the portfolio will start with, but the ambition is to get it right across the portfolio by a period of time. Like we've done with all other innovation and manufacturing, we've taken a step basis to us. But I suppose the real benefit is if we see success, we can start factoring that into us as we acquire new lands and right across the portfolio. So hopefully, we'll see the positive turn from that into 2027. Operator: There are no further questions in queue and audio. And I will now hand it back to Stephen for closing remarks. Stephen Garvey: Thank you, Laura, and thank you all for joining today. We really appreciate it. Obviously, we'll be engaged with a number of you over the next number of days and weeks and look forward to seeing you. And thank you very much for joining us today. Operator: Thank you. That concludes today's call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Hello, and welcome to Glenveagh Interim Results 2025. My name is Laura, and I will be your coordinator for today's event. Please note this call is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I will now hand you over to your host, Stephen Garvey, CEO, to begin today's conference. Thank you. Stephen Garvey: Good morning, and thank you, Laura. I am Stephen Garvey, CEO of Glenveagh. I'm joined today by our CFO, Conor Murtagh. We appreciate you joining our interim results call for the first 6 months ended the 30th of June 2025. This morning, I'll walk you through the key highlights, the market, the policy context and how our strategy is showing up in Homebuilding, Partnerships, land and innovation. Conor will take you through the financials and capital allocation, and I will return to the outlook and closing remarks. As always, we will leave plenty of time for your questions at the end. Let's begin on Slide 4, which sets out our headline numbers for the first half of the year. This period demonstrated the strength of our Building Better strategy, set out scale delivery, deepened our partnerships with the state and drove operational efficiency through innovation, and that's exactly what's reflected in our results. Our focus on standardization and vertical integration is now embedded across the business, making us more resilient and more efficient as we grow. The benefits of our early investment and innovation are visible in our margin profile and our ability to deliver at scale even as the market evolves. This is also the first interim period where our Partnerships segment has made a material contribution to group profit. This is a real milestone for us and reflects the strength of our public-private model. We are now recognized as a partner of choice for the state with a growing pipeline and strong demand for our homes. We continue to manage our capital with discipline, optimizing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet even as we accelerated delivery. Our buyback program continues to create value for shareholders, and we are seeing the benefits of a more efficient, more focused approach to capital deployment. We will discuss these elements in greater detail as we progress this morning. For now, I want to emphasize that the strategy we set out a few years ago is delivering for our customers, our partners and our shareholders. Turning to Slide 5. Let's take a moment here to consider what sets Glenveagh apart in the current environment. The need for new homes in Ireland remains acute, and government policy is more focused than ever on increasing supply. This is happening against the backdrop of continued economic strength and a supportive policy environment, so the market opportunity is clear. What gives us confidence is the way we have positioned the business to capture the opportunity. We've built a sector-leading platform, one that's not just about scale, but about delivering high-quality homes in the right locations, supported by a uniquely integrated operating model. Our early investment in innovation and standardization is now delivering tangible benefits, making our business more resilient and more efficient as we grow. We are seeing the benefits of our deepening partnerships with the state and hard-won reputation as a partner of choice for public housing delivery. This is supported by a disciplined approach to capital allocation and a strong balance sheet. Our focus on profitable growth, active landbank management and ongoing investment in our supply chain is enabling us to create long-term value for the business and drive sustainable returns for our shareholders. Providing further context, Slide 6 shows just the long-term demand outlook for housing in Ireland remains exceptionally strong. We continue to see positive trends in income and employment with both wages and job creation rising steadily across the economy. Alongside this, Ireland's population growth remains robust, driven by sustained net inward migration well above the European average. Mortgage lending activity is also maintaining a healthy pace with first-time buyers accounting for a significant share of drawdowns supported by government schemes. The underlying drivers of demand for new homes are strengthening. Turning to Slide 7. We can see in more detail how government policy and recent market initiatives are creating a genuine supportive environment for housing delivery. The National Development Plan and the Planning and Development Act 2024 are setting ambitious targets and providing significant funding alongside the infrastructure and planning certainty needed to achieve them. On the demand side, supports such as Help to Buy and the First Home Scheme continue to underpin affordability for buyers. They both have been extended, giving buyers and developers greater confidence to plan ahead. There's also a strong policy push for modern methods of construction and using state land at scale through the Land Development Agency and local authorities. But as we've said before, meeting Ireland's housing needs will require more than just policy ambition. It will take sustained private sector capital, adequately zoned land, public sector resources and critical infrastructure. The success of our Partnerships platform shows how public and private resources can be pooled effectively to deliver much needed homes. We've shaped our strategy around this shift, and we are beginning to see material results, which we will talk about shortly. In the short term, the policy environment is evolving for the better, and that gives us real confidence in our ability to continue delivering at scale. Now let's dive deeper into our segments, starting with Homebuilding on Slide 8. Just a quick reminder that at the start of the year, we announced with the 2024 results that we have simplified our reporting on Homebuilding previously Suburban and Partnerships, previously Urban and Partnerships. This was a standout period for homebuilding with delivery nearly doubling year-on-year. The momentum reflects the strong demand and the benefits of our differential model and strategy. Standardization, scalable sites, vertical integration are all coming through in our results. Excellence in our execution saw major completions at Kilmartin Grove and Hereford Park as well as major progress across a number of developments and a number of new sites starting earlier in the year. Our average selling price was elevated in the first half due to mix, but we expect that to normalize as the year progresses. Margin expansion in Homebuilding was driven by the choices we made to invest efficiently and repeatably with the forward order book at around EUR 1.4 billion, we have strong visibility for the rest of the year and well into 2026. Turning to Slide 9. Let's talk about Partnerships. For the first time, this segment made a material profit contribution, reflecting the scale and momentum in this part of the business. We now have 6 active sites underway, including new contributions from Mooretown, New Road, the Cork Docklands, which is a development in collaboration with the Land Development Agency, alongside Ballymastone, Oscar Traynor Road and Foxwood Barns. This growing pipeline underpinned by robust planning momentum and repeated demand from public sector clients gives us strong visibility on future delivery. Moving to Slide 10. We can see how our land portfolio remains a source of strength and flexibility. The portfolio has been carefully assembled to align with our strategy. It is focused on supporting high-quality own-door homes in right locations with 74% of our units in the Greater Dublin area. We continue to maintain a strong cost discipline with the average plot cost at EUR 32,000, and the landbank supports an attractive embedded margins and capital returns. Importantly, this landbank gives us capacity to deliver between 2,600 and 3,600 equivalent units per year through to 2030, underpinning our medium-term delivery objectives. We have also been actively managing the portfolio with over EUR 60 million of land sales either closed or at advanced stages, ensuring we remain flexible and capital efficient as the market evolves. Finally, just to note, the recent publication of the National Planning Framework is expected to materially positively impact our strategic landbank, resulting in a lower capital deployment requirement in future land periods. Turning to Slide 11. Our commitment to innovation remains a core pillar to our strategy. We continue to invest significantly in this area. Phase 2 of our innovation program is now underway via a EUR 25 million commitment to expand our off-site facility -- manufacturing facilities in Carlow, including an additional facade line alongside our timber frame platform. At the heart of this is NUA, our in-house manufacturing and innovation platform. Through NUA, we are moving beyond traditional building methods and embracing innovative lightweight alternatives, such as a new wall system, roof cladding and floor cassettes. Our exclusive perpetual license for integrated external facades is now a key part of this, allowing us to increase premanufactured value and improve further efficiencies. Off-site manufacturing and modern methods of construction are already delivering tangible improvements in cost control, build efficiency and margin performance, all of which makes Glenveagh more resilient, more efficient and better positioned to deliver at scale as the market evolves. With that context, I'll hand you over to Conor to talk you through the financials and the capital allocation. Conor Murtagh: Thanks, Stephen, and good morning, everyone. I'll take you through the financials for the first half of 2025, starting with the income statement, then moving to the balance sheet, land and cash flow and finally, our capital allocation priorities. As always, we'll outline the key drivers behind the numbers and what they mean for the business. If we can turn to Slide 13. As Stephen noted, the first half of 2025 marked a period of strong growth for Glenveagh. Group revenue reached EUR 342 million, up 124% on last year. This uplift reflects the momentum we've built in both Homebuilding and Partnerships with delivery volumes and on-site partnership activity, both moving in our favor. Gross profit increased to approximately EUR 67 million, and our gross margin expanded to 19.5%, up 130 basis points. This margin improvement is as a result of several years of investment in standardization, scale and vertical integration in addition to mix benefits. Work in progress rose to approximately EUR 347 million, which is in line with our plans to ramp up Homebuilding output and deliver under the Croí Cónaithe scheme. Net assets finished the first half at EUR 748 million and reflects approximately EUR 35 million of capital returns in the period. Altogether, it shows we're supporting growth in a disciplined way, optimizing working capital, managing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet. Moving to the landbank slide then. Apologies, continuing on the income statement there, we're seeing the benefits of delivering more homes and large repeatable sites and our off-site manufacturing is now contributing to program certainty, quality and cost control. A feature of both business segments in 2025 is the completion of sites and phases with cost contingencies unutilized supporting margin expansion. Underlying gross margin in the Homebuilding segment, excluding noncore sales at Shrewsbury Road and land sales was 22.8% Nevertheless, spot homebuilding margins in the group's medium-term delivery pipeline are approximately 21%, with site mix continuing to be a principal driver as the business monetizes its vintage landbank and scales to 2,000 units with a focus on return on capital. Gross margin in Partnerships in H1 was 16.2%, ahead of target owing to site mix and unutilized contingency due to strong cost control. Similar to Homebuilding, site mix will play a significant role in future periods as the business scales up and the group completes the transition out of its remaining urban sites. EUR 400 million in revenues remains an achievable current year and medium-term target with visibility on replacing existing partnership sites with new wins increasing over the period. Operating profit for the first half was EUR 42.1 million, Net finance costs were EUR 9.6 million, reflecting a higher opening debt level following last year's land acquisitions. Profit before tax was EUR 32.5 million and earnings per share came in at EUR 0.052. Moving to the balance sheet on Slide 14. Focusing in on the key numbers here. Land balance, excluding development rights, was EUR 536 million, down from year-end as we continue to actively manage the landbank and focus on capital efficiency. I'll come back to land on the next slide. Work in progress rose to EUR 347 million, which is in line with our plans to ramp up homebuilding and deliver under the Croí Cónaithe scheme. Altogether, it shows we're supporting growth in a disciplined way, optimizing working capital, managing our landbank and maintaining a strong balance sheet. Moving to Slide 15. I touched on it briefly, and you can see how our landbank is evolving and supporting our growth agenda. The EUR 536 million land balance at June 2025 represents a peak investment level for us. From here, we're focused on reducing capital intensity, delivering units from our existing landbank and executing targeted disposals. We remain on track to complete land sales of EUR 100 million across 2025 and 2026. More than EUR 60 million of that is already closed or at advanced stages of contract. This strategy is about prioritizing capital employed in land and focusing on sites of scale that can support delivery in both Homebuilding and Partnerships. Given the strength of the landbank, both in terms of scale and product type, i.e., own-door homes, we can both grow the business and reduce capital deployed in land towards EUR 400 million to EUR 450 million over the next number of years. Next, Slide 16 shows our cash flow. Operating cash outflow was EUR 10.8 million, a material improvement from the EUR 194 million outflow in H1 last year. That is driven by higher completions, greater contribution from Partnerships and tighter working capital management. Importantly, net debt was EUR 230 million, a lower figure than this time last year despite a materially higher starting position. Moving forward, we continue to invest selectively where returns are strongest, principally funding construction WIP, investing in innovation and returning surplus capital to shareholders, which brings me to Slide 17, where we have our capital allocation priorities. Our medium-term visibility is as strong as it has been. We have clear line of sight on unit growth combined with landbank reduction on replenishing the Partnership's pipeline on freeing up capital, while capturing manufacturing benefits that will provide a structural medium-term cost advantage. Against that backdrop, we continue to focus on 4 key priorities: firstly, land. We're actively reducing our landbank, as I set out, primarily through unit delivery and targeted unit sales. But importantly, we will sustain, as Stephen mentioned, the capacity to deliver 2,600 to 3,600 units per annum. Secondly, work in progress. Investment here is supporting the planned increase in Homebuilding outputs to 1,900 units in 2027, which remains a core driver of revenue growth. Third, supply chain and innovation. We're investing in off-site manufacturing and next-generation building approaches. That includes a EUR 25 million commitment to deliver a new external facade line and facility upgrade, which will transform how we deliver homes. Approximately EUR 10 million of spend will occur in 2025, EUR 10 million in '26 with the balance in 2027. And finally, returning excess cash. The buyback program announced in May has been expanded from EUR 85 million to EUR 105 million. That's been made possible by strong operational performance, robust cash generation and good visibility on land sales. To date, approximately EUR 84 million has been deployed under the current program. This disciplined balanced approach is supporting growth, innovation and value creation while also maintaining a strong financial position. That's the conclusion of the financial review. Stephen, I'll hand back to you for the outlook and to close out. Stephen Garvey: Thanks, Conor. So to bring it all together on Slide 18, we remain fully on track to deliver full year guidance. We are reiterating our earnings per share target of EUR 0.195 for full year 2025, underpinned by a strong operational momentum and a healthy forward order book. We expect to deliver approximately 1,500 Homebuilding units this year with Partnerships contributing around EUR 400 million in revenue. This reflects the scale and the consistency we are now achieving across both segments. On the capital side, we are making real progress in optimizing our land portfolio with EUR 100 million of land sales targeted across '25 and '26. And our landbank remains a core strength, giving us the capacity to deliver between 2,600 and 3,600 units per year all the way to 2030. Notably, we are achieving this growth while reducing the net debt and returning value to shareholders by expanding our buyback program to EUR 105 million today. To wrap things up on Slide 19 and 20, we have our differential investment case. We will conclude -- I want to conclude by emphasizing 3 things: building better strategy set out the direction, and we are executing on it with consistency. Standardization and manufacturing are improving our cost control and speed with benefits already visible in margin and program predictability. Partnerships are now a material first half contributor and our land strategy balances visibility with capital efficiency. We have strong momentum into the second half and beyond. Glenveagh is uniquely positioned with strong visibility on future delivery for the balance of this year and beyond. All of this gives us real confidence for Glenveagh's ability to deliver sustainable value well into the future. With that, I'll pass you over to Laura for any questions you may have, and thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We will now take our first question from Colin Sheridan of Davy. Colin Sheridan: Just maybe starting on Partnerships. Maybe you could talk a little bit about what the pipeline looks at this point in time. And I guess, with the changes we're likely to see from government with additional funding and a change to housing for all, how you think that could evolve or how you'd like to see it evolve in the next year or so? And maybe just on build cost inflation. I mean, you've referred to the sectoral employment orders in the statement. Just wondering how build cost inflation has been progressing more generally and how the vertical integration in the business has been playing its part and trying to mitigate that on site. Stephen Garvey: Thanks, Colin. Partnerships, yes, obviously made substantial progress. I suppose it's a hard one reputation. We've been at this for a period of time, and we're only really seeing the benefits of that flow through on the income statement now. Positively disposed to what we're seeing coming down the track. We're in negotiations on a number of new partnerships, quite substantial ones, some of them adjacent sites, some future sites that are very close to us. Proactive local authorities out there now looking at opportunities and very much looking at certain local authorities who have probably perfected the model and got it really well coming out there to a certain degree. The Land Development Agency, obviously, very proactive now as well. A lot of their land is starting to come into the system. They're running a number of RFPs. So yes, we've obviously got 6 sites on the go. Some of them will come to completion next year, but we're very positively disposed to being able to replace them on an ongoing basis. And I think we've proven we're the delivery partner of choice out there with all government agencies at this stage. So happy to dispose that. Build cost inflation, yes, you're right. On the sectoral employment agreement was 3%. Labor probably makes up 50%, 55% of the delivery out there. So that will inevitably pass through. On the material side, pretty good, a little volatility in 1 or 2 products, but again, in the either, it's probably not too bad out there. So probably happy where things are at. So somewhere between 2.5% and 3% is probably where we see things plateauing out for the next 12 months. We don't see anything on the horizon that makes us concerned out there. On the manufacturing side, I think what you're really seeing from the manufacturing and innovative side is it's probably really driving that way we can deliver programs, being able to release contingency on sites. They're obviously positive to margins. So it's the capability of predictability, sticking with programs, the quality of the product, all of those things are coming. We're probably now moving to Phase 2 of the innovation side. The benefits of that and the cost that, that will bring to the table and the -- or the cost savings, it's too early to predict yet. But Phase 2, 2027, 2028, we really hope it will feed into the system, and we should see positive turn from that. Conor Murtagh: I think what you see in manufacturing over the next number of years is will be labor and labor increases as we're seeing through sectoral employment orders will be less of a dial mover in that CPI number as we transition more and more to premanufactured value. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Shane Carberry of Goodbody. Shane Carberry: Just kind of a follow-up on Colin's question, I guess, in terms of that kind of gross margin point. In terms of the standardization piece of the jigsaw, is it fair to think of that as the main contributor to the kind of underlying growth in the gross margin this year? And just, Conor, you mentioned in the presentation about maybe the mix going forward into '26. So if you could expand on that a little bit more, it would be helpful. And then the second question is just around the medium-term targets really, it sounds like even more confident in the medium term kind of maybe beyond all of our forecast horizons as well. So if you could just give me a little bit more color in terms of how that kind of your confidence has evolved? Is it more the policy side improving, underlying demand getting better? Or it is some of the kind of innovation that you're doing or maybe it's a bit of all of the above. Stephen Garvey: Just -- go ahead. Go ahead. Conor Murtagh: On the gross margin side then, yes, you're right. Standardization is a lot of the benefit. It's also sites of scale. It's also strong cost control, getting to the end of sites and having contingency in place. And you're seeing that particularly on the Partnerships side as well. And then mix, there's a good strong mix effect this year, which brings us to your sort of follow-up question around gross margin for next year. We've spoken since the start of this year about intake margins being around approximately 21% in the medium-term landbank. And what you're going to see is that transition happening in 2026. So you'll see margins of approximately 21% in 2026 is the way to think about it. Stephen Garvey: And just on the policy and medium to long term, positive what we said 2027, we feel very comfortable about the 1,900 units in Homebuilding. We're positive towards the National Planning Framework. I suppose for our view, just where the policy is evolving is, you know the government have instructed the National Planning Framework and instructed local authorities to now go out and start varying their development plans. So an element of local authorities will vary their plans, but they'll also start going into their new plan phase. And we see kind of 2027 into 2028 as the period of time that about 750,000 units of zoned land will come into the system. Some of that will be our strategic land as well. So I suppose that's the opportunity we're seeing coming down the track. Obviously, there will be sites of scale. So yes, positive in the sense of, I suppose, you have a government who are really now on the front foot to drive their policy initiatives. They're probably seeing some challenges with the administration side, not moving as fast as they'd like. But I think, yes, they're really trying to make a difference out there. I think we're well set up that our landbank positions ourselves to 2030. We're obviously core product, 80% of our product is that own-door product, so in a nice place there. But obviously, we hope we can enhance that. And the more the vertical integration feeds into the system, the bigger the sites become, the faster, more efficient we can deliver into the future. So yes, we're in a good place. Operator: We will now take our next question from Jonny Coubrough of Deutsche Bank. Jonathan William Coubrough: Can I ask on the landbank? You said in the presentation that the landbank could support up to 3,600 units a year out to 2030. What other investments would you need to make to achieve this level of output across WIP, supply chain overheads? I think you set out some of this on Slide 17, but it would be useful just for a bit of clarification on that one. And then also, you've mentioned EUR 100 million of land site sales over 2 years. So from there, will you be maintaining about a EUR 450 million landbank? And then how would you be looking to replenish that land? Are you looking at land options or other avenues? Stephen Garvey: Jonny, yes. So look, obviously, last year was the big pivotal year. We bought 9,000 plots of land. There was a 3-year supply in 1 hit. Obviously, we got them at attractive 32,000 a plot. So we're very happy with that. We're not actively in the land market. We're always keeping an eye on it, but we're not actively investing. Probably strategic land is where we're looking at an element of because we know what will come down the track. So product that might come into the system in '29, '30, we're looking at those kind of sites. But we're not making a very big investment on that. On the WIP side of it, I'll leave that. Conor, do you want to go on that? Conor Murtagh: Yes. The WIP is actually well invested. So we've obviously grow Homebuilding units from 1,500 to 1,900 over the next couple of years. But at the same time, we have a number of urban schemes where we're well invested on the apartment side, which we'd be seeking to forward fund in the future. So one in North County, Dublin and another one in Cork. So you could see maybe EUR 50 million go into WIP on a net basis there between now and 2027 to support growth into 2028. And we obviously have called out the office as a cash inflow, most likely in or around 2028. So WIP is well invested even to support that growth that's there. And then on the Partnerships side, obviously, there's a prevalence of forward funding in that. So the investment there will be minimum from where we are at the moment. And then manufacturing-wise, it's the EUR 25 million, with EUR 10 million over the balance of this year, EUR 10 million next year and EUR 5 million in '27. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And while we wait, I'm handing it over for the written question. Unknown Executive: So we've had a question in from Glynis Johnson. She has asked regarding the admin costs for H1 '25. What drove step-up? And what is the guidance for FY '25 and medium term? Second, on land market, she's asked, given the competitive land market, but also the positive upside potential to your strategic land, is there scope to increase the land sales targeted? And lastly, can you elaborate on the facade production? Is this the Mauer system? And how many home units would this likely cover by 2027? Conor Murtagh: I'll take 1 and 2 there. On admin costs, H1 reflects the run rate from H2 2024. So consensus is around EUR 51 million of administration costs for 2025. So we're comfortable with where that is. And over the medium term, we've said we want to reduce admin costs to less than 5% of revenue and are on track to do that. The land market and potential for more land sales. And what we'd say on that is we have greater certainty on the EUR 100 million of land sales than we had a number of months ago. However, the likelihood of it being materially in excess of EUR 100 million has reduced. So EUR 100 million is a good number to have across '25 and '26. And Stephen, do you want to take the Mauer system? Stephen Garvey: Yes, you're right on that, Glynis. Obviously, we're the sole holder of that license in Ireland, and we think it's a huge opportunity for us. The potential savings and how this can evolve is it will make huge benefits for our prelims on site. It's a better, more attractive looking product. We've had some of the local authorities out down to look at the finished product. They're really impressed with it. So they're actually -- the quality of it and the aesthetics of it, it's really pleasing. We are putting it into production in '26. First homes are going out in 2027. And we're going to take it on a phased basis. So probably 10% of the portfolio will start with, but the ambition is to get it right across the portfolio by a period of time. Like we've done with all other innovation and manufacturing, we've taken a step basis to us. But I suppose the real benefit is if we see success, we can start factoring that into us as we acquire new lands and right across the portfolio. So hopefully, we'll see the positive turn from that into 2027. Operator: There are no further questions in queue and audio. And I will now hand it back to Stephen for closing remarks. Stephen Garvey: Thank you, Laura, and thank you all for joining today. We really appreciate it. Obviously, we'll be engaged with a number of you over the next number of days and weeks and look forward to seeing you. And thank you very much for joining us today. Operator: Thank you. That concludes today's call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to Accenture's first quarter of the first fiscal year 2025 earnings call. All participants will be in listen-only mode. Should you need assistance, please signal a conference specialist by pressing the star key followed by zero. After today's presentation, there will be an opportunity to ask questions. To ask a question, you may press star then one on your telephone keypad, and to withdraw your question, please press star then two. Please note, today's event is being recorded. I'd now like to turn the conference over to Alexia Quadrani, Executive Director, Head of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Alexia Quadrani: Thank you, Operator, and thanks everyone for joining us today on our fourth quarter and full-year fiscal 2025 earnings announcement. As the Operator just mentioned, I'm Alexia Quadrani, Executive Director and Head of Investor Relations. On today's call, you will hear from Julie Sweet, our Chief Executive Officer, and Angie Park, our Chief Financial Officer. We hope you've had an opportunity to review the news release we issued a short time ago, and we also have an earnings presentation, which will be made available on our website after the call. Let me quickly outline the agenda for today's call. Julie will begin with an overview of our results. Angie will take you through the financial details, including the income statement and balance sheet, along with some key operational metrics for the fourth quarter and fiscal year. Julie will then provide a brief update on the market position before Angie provides our business outlook for the first quarter and full-year fiscal 2026. We will then take your questions before Julie provides a wrap-up at the end of the call. Some of the matters we'll discuss on this call, including our business outlook, are forward-looking and, as such, are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties, including but not limited to those factors set forth in today's news release and discussed in our annual report on Form 10-K and quarterly reports on Form 10-Q and other SEC filings. These risks and uncertainties could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in this call. During our call today, we will reference certain non-GAAP financial measures, which we believe provide useful information for investors. We include reconciliations from non-GAAP financial measures where appropriate to GAAP in our news release or in the Investor Relations section on our website at accenture.com. As always, Accenture assumes no obligation to update the information presented on this conference call. Now, let me turn the call over to Julie. Julie Sweet: Thank you, Alexia, and to everyone joining this morning, and thank you to our more than 779,000 reinventors around the world for your extraordinary work and commitment to our clients. In fiscal year 2025, we delivered a strong year financially. We significantly elevated our competitive positioning, and we took our next big steps to position us for growth in the age of AI. We grew 7% last year, which was adding $5 billion in revenue, with over $80 billion in bookings. We did so against a macroeconomic backdrop that did not improve over FY24. Of that 7% growth, the majority was organic, and the growth was broad-based across markets, industries, and types of work. We also delivered strong earnings per share growth and generated strong free cash flow, both above our guidance on an adjusted basis, and we returned a significant amount of cash to shareholders, an increase of 7% over FY24. We took share at more than 5X our investable basket. How did we do it? We built on the rapid shift in our business we made by the end of FY24 to address the challenging market conditions. We then took action to fully capitalize on the competitive advantages we have built over a long period of time to deliver these results. These advantages include our ecosystem partnerships, our breadth of capabilities, our deep and trusted client relationships, our track record of investing in new skills and rotating our business with successive technology revolutions, and of course, our ability to invest. Our strategy for more than a decade has been to be the number one partner for the tech ecosystem, and it's serving us well. Technology is front and center for every client, and in FY25 we continued to be the number one partner for all of our top 10 ecosystem partners by revenue. 60% of our revenue is from work that we do with these partners, which grew 9%, outpacing our overall revenue growth in FY25. These partners are the world's largest technology companies by revenue, and they're seeking deeper and deeper partnerships with us as they look for help to turn their technology into business outcomes and scale the adoption of AI. We continue to be the reinvention partner of choice for our clients. Our deep and longstanding relationships mean we know our clients and their industries inside out. Our global footprint and breadth of capability mean we can serve more of our clients' needs for large-scale transformations than any other player in the industry. We added 37 clients with quarterly bookings greater than $100 million in Q4 alone, bringing us to a record of 129 such bookings for the year, and we finished the year with 305 Diamond clients, our largest relationships. Our early and decisive decision in FY23 to invest significantly to become the leader in Gen AI with a $3 billion multi-year investment is clearly paying off as we capture this new area of spend for our clients. In FY25, we tripled our revenue over FY24 from Gen AI and increasingly Agentic AI to $2.7 billion, and we nearly doubled our Gen AI bookings to $5.9 billion. As a reminder, these numbers only reflect revenue and bookings specifically related to advanced AI, which is Gen AI, Agentic AI, and physical AI, and do not include data, classical AI, or AI used in delivery of our services. We are now going to use the term advanced AI as it encompasses the latest developments that are starting to gain traction. In addition to all we are doing around advanced AI, for over a decade, we have made disciplined inorganic investments to expand our market and fuel organic growth. For example, our capital projects business, which was initially built through several acquisitions around the world, is now a $1.2 billion business for us, and in FY25, it grew 49% year on year, largely organically. While delivering these results, we also took the next big steps in our reinvention for the age of AI. We are reinventing what we sell, how we deliver, how we partner, and how we operate Accenture. In short, on the ground, advanced AI is becoming a part of everything we do. Let's review our reinvention to date. By definition, every new wave of technology has a time where you have to train and retool. Accenture's core competency is to do that at scale. Our clients cannot possibly build all of the expertise they need on their own. They need us to go first and fast. In FY23, we had 40,000 AI and data professionals, with roughly 30 people working on a handful of Gen AI projects with negligible revenue. Today, we have 77,000 AI and data professionals. We have worked on more than 6,000 advanced AI projects just this year, and we delivered meaningful revenue in FY25. We are also in the process of equipping all of our reinventors with the latest AI skills. Over 550,000 of our reinventors are already trained in the fundamentals of Gen AI. We have already significantly embedded advanced AI into key platforms like GenLizard so that we are now delivering differently for our clients. We reinvented our corporate functions to create additional investment capacity, among other benefits, and will now increasingly use advanced AI in the next chapter. In FY25, we focused our new actions on the ecosystem, our talent strategy, and our growth model. We expanded our partnerships beyond the top 10 in AI and data and created new ones with companies that are becoming critical to many of our clients who also want to work with us to help them scale their relationships, and our revenue is growing in double digits with many of these partners. In FY26, we expect to increase our headcount overall across our three markets, including in the U.S. and Europe, reflecting the demand we see in our business. In addition to continuing to hire world-class talent, in FY25, we developed and are implementing a refreshed, robust three-pronged talent strategy to rotate our workforce. We are investing in upskilling our reinventors, which is our primary strategy. We are exiting on a compressed timeline. People work reskilling based on our experience is not a viable path for the skills we need. We are continuously identifying areas of how we operate Accenture to drive more efficiencies, including through AI, in order to create more investment capacity. Finally, our growth model. On September 1, we launched reinvention services, which brings all of Accenture's capabilities into a single unit. Nearly 80% of our large deals are multi-service. The model, as we fully roll it out, will make it faster and simpler to sell and deliver everything Accenture offers and to rotate our offerings to embed more AI and data and equip our people. In summary, I am pleased with our strong results in FY25 and our positioning for FY26 and beyond. Over to you, Angie. Angie Park: Thank you, Julie, and thanks to all of you for joining us on today's call. We were very pleased with our results in the fourth quarter, which were at the top of our guided range and completed another strong year for Accenture. Our results reflect our relentless focus to consistently deliver on our shareholder value proposition while investing for long-term market leadership and reinforce our role as a trusted reinvention partner for our clients and a leader in AI. Now, let me summarize a few highlights for the quarter. Revenues grew 4.5% in local currency. Excluding the 1.5% impact from our federal business, our revenues grew 6% in Q4, and we continue to take significant market share at more than 5X, reflecting the relevance of our services and the strength of our diversified portfolio and execution. As a reminder, we assess market growth against our investable basket, which is roughly two dozen of our closest global public competitors, which represents about a third of our addressable market. We use a consistent methodology to compare our financial results to theirs, adjusted to exclude the impact of significant acquisitions through the date of their last publicly available results on a rolling four-quarter basis. Adjusted operating margin was 15.1%, an increase of 10 basis points compared to adjusted Q4 results last year. We continue to drive margin expansion while making significant investments in our business and our people. We delivered adjusted EPS in the quarter of $3.03, which represents 9% growth compared to adjusted EPS last year. Finally, we delivered free cash flow of $3.8 billion and returned $1.4 billion to shareholders through repurchases and dividends this quarter. Before I move on to the details of the quarter, I want to spend a moment on the six-month business optimization program we initiated in Q4, for which we recorded a charge of $615 million and expect to record an additional approximately $250 million in Q1 for a total of approximately $865 million over the period. The business optimization program has two parts: one related to rapid talent rotation that Julie mentioned, which reflects severance associated with headcount reductions that we are making in a compressed timeline, and second, related to the divestiture of two acquisitions that are no longer aligned with our strategic priorities. These actions will result in cost savings, which will be reinvested in our people and our business. In FY26, we expect to increase our headcount overall across all three markets, including in the U.S. and in Europe, reflecting the demand we see in our business. Now, let me turn to some of the details. New bookings were $21.3 billion for the quarter, representing 6% growth in U.S. dollars and 3% growth in local currency, which is on top of the 24% growth in Q4 of last year. Overall book-to-bill was $1.2. Consulting bookings were $8.9 billion with a book-to-bill of $1.0. Managed services bookings were $12.4 billion with a book-to-bill of $1.4. Turning now to revenues. Revenues for the quarter were $17.6 billion at the top of our guided range, reflecting a 7% increase in U.S. dollars and 4.5% in local currency. Consulting revenues for the quarter were $8.8 billion, up 6% in U.S. dollars and 3% in local currency. Managed services revenues were $8.8 billion, up 8% in U.S. dollars and 6% in local currency, driven by high single-digit growth in technology managed services, which includes application managed services and infrastructure managed services, and mid-single-digit growth in operations. Turning to our geographic markets. In the Americas, revenue grew 5% in local currency, led by growth in banking and capital markets, industrials, and software and platforms, partially offset by a decline in public service. Revenue growth was driven by the United States. Excluding the 3% impact from our federal business, Americas grew 8% in local currency in the quarter. In EMEA, we delivered 3% growth in local currency, led by growth in insurance, life sciences, utilities, and consumer goods, retail, and travel services, partially offset by a decline in public service. Revenue growth was driven by the United Kingdom and Spain, partially offset by a decline in Italy. In Asia Pacific, revenues grew 6% in local currency, driven by growth in banking and capital markets, public service, and utilities, partially offset by a decline in energy. Revenue growth was led by Japan and Australia. Moving down the income statement, gross margin for the quarter was 31.9% compared with 32.5% for the same period last year. Sales and marketing expense for the quarter was 10.2% compared with 10.7% for the fourth quarter last year. General and administrative expense was 6.6% compared to 6.8% for the same quarter last year. Before I continue, I want to note that results in Q4 FY25 and Q4 FY24 include costs associated with business optimization actions, which impacted operating margin, tax rate, and EPS. The following comparisons exclude these impacts and reflect adjusted results. Adjusted operating income was $2.7 billion in the fourth quarter, reflecting a 15.1% adjusted operating margin, up 10 basis points compared with adjusted results in Q4 last year. Our adjusted effective tax rate for the quarter was 27.9% compared with an adjusted effective tax rate of 26.2% for the fourth quarter last year. Adjusted diluted earnings per share were $3.03 compared with adjusted EPS of $2.79 in the fourth quarter last year, reflecting 9% growth. Day services outstanding were 47 days compared to 47 days last quarter and 46 days in the fourth quarter of last year. Free cash flow for the quarter was $3.8 billion, resulting from cash generated by operating activities of $3.9 billion, net of property and equipment additions of $108 million. Our cash balance at August 31 was $11.5 billion compared with $5 billion at August 31 last year. With regards to our ongoing objective to return cash to shareholders in the fourth quarter, we repaid our fourth quarterly cash dividend of $1.48 per share for a total of $922 million. Now, I'd like to take a moment to summarize the year as we successfully executed our business to deliver or exceed all aspects of our original guidance that we provided last September on an adjusted basis. We delivered bookings of $80.6 billion, with a record 129 quarterly client bookings over $100 million and a book-to-bill of $1.2. Revenues of $69.7 billion for the year reflect growth of 7% in local currency, with nearly $5 billion in incremental revenue added this year. Our federal business was a 20 basis point headwind to our overall growth for the year. Consulting revenues were $35.1 billion, up 6% in U.S. dollars and 5% in local currency. Managed services revenues were $34.6 billion, up 9% in both U.S. dollars and in local currency, driven by 10% growth in technology managed services and 6% growth in operations. The following comparisons exclude the impacts of business optimization actions I noted earlier and reflect adjusted results. Adjusted operating margin at 15.6% was a 10 basis point expansion over our adjusted FY24 results. Adjusted earnings per share were $12.93, reflecting 8% growth over adjusted FY24 EPS. Free cash flow was $10.9 billion, up 26% year over year, reflecting a very strong free cash flow to net income ratio of 1.4. With regards to our ongoing objective to return cash to shareholders, we returned $8.3 billion of cash to shareholders while investing approximately $1.5 billion across 23 acquisitions. In closing, we feel good about how we managed our business while navigating the macro environment in 2025, and now we are laser-focused on executing and delivering fiscal 2026. Back to you, Julie. Julie Sweet: Thank you, Angie. Today, we've worked across every major market with more than 9,000 clients, including the world's largest companies, three quarters of the Fortune Global 100 and 500. As we look at the markets, we have not seen any meaningful change, positive or negative, in the overall market. We are focused on delivering results regardless of the market conditions by being the most relevant to our clients. Relevance today requires leadership in AI. We're working with companies early in their journey to use AI, which want our help to get them AI ready and to leverage our assets and platforms to accelerate their ability to deploy AI, as well as to help them do what they can now to use AI, even when they're not fully ready across the enterprise. We also are working with companies far along their journey to be AI ready and wanting to be the first to change the game with AI, even as its potential is still emerging. The technology itself is new and rapidly changing, so across companies, they need help in understanding the tech landscape. This is where we are in the age of AI. It is very early innings, however you look at it, which means there is massive opportunity ahead for our clients, our ecosystem partners, and us. It is well recognized that advanced AI has taken the mindshare of CEOs, the C-suite, and boards faster than any technology development we've seen in the past two decades. At the same time, as reported widely, value realization has been underwhelming for many, and enterprise adoption at scale is slow other than with digital natives. This is why our clients are turning to us. We know that the gap between mindshare and faster actual adoption is because the enterprise reinvention required to truly unlock the value of advanced AI is hard and has significant costs. There is a huge difference between how we're all using AI in our individual lives that is incredibly easy and what it takes to use it in an enterprise. The opportunity for AI is at the intersection of business strategy and tech and org readiness. For most companies, the biggest gap between mindshare and adoption is tech and org readiness. We're still in the thick of cloud, ERP, and security modernization. Data preparedness is nascent in many companies, and companies grapple with fragmented processes and siloed organizations. Generations of leaders need new skills to understand how AI should inform their business strategy. The workforce needs new skills to use AI, and new talent strategies and related competencies must be developed. Helping clients with all of this work is what is driving our growth, and our pipeline of large-scale transformations continues to grow. We're also starting to see early signals of an inflection point, with more clients looking for true enterprise-wide plans and activation and seeking out our successful experience with scaling in enterprises and at Accenture. Two years into this AI journey, we also are seeing a pattern in how AI can expand our opportunities with our clients. As some companies are making progress in creating AI readiness, it leads to even more work. Longstanding partnerships are deepening, and the demand for transformation is accelerating. For example, take a major financial services client we've worked with for over a decade. Their reinvention began with digital operations and cloud modernization. Now they've asked us to modernize their data estate, the foundation for scaling AI across the enterprise, from the contact center and marketing to finance and the trading floor. As we begin to implement AI into many facets of their business, our relationship continues to grow as we retire legacy systems, transform core functions like HR and risk, and build AI-centric capabilities to keep them ahead of shifting customer expectations. This has meaningfully expanded the amount of work we do for this client, and in fact, over the past five years, the value of our contract has more than doubled. We're seeing more stories like this across our portfolio, where AI is extending across the enterprise and adjacent work is following. Our contracts are expanding, and our client relationships are compounding, creating a powerful, sustainable growth engine for Accenture. Building the digital core remains our biggest growth driver. Only now, our clients understand that Accenture is bringing even more capabilities because we understand how the digital core will enable them to use advanced AI, and advanced AI is now a new catalyst for doing the large-scale transformations of the digital core in the first place. Taking an industry lens, let's look at banking. In banking, investment in digital core modernization remains strong, with cloud adoption accelerating as AI demand grows. Here's what it looks like in practice, and I'm particularly proud of this work because the scale is frankly breathtaking, and we were trusted by this client with mission-critical work. The Bank of England's real-time gross settlement service, which lies at the heart of most electronic payments in the UK, was rebuilt on a modern digital core using private cloud and end-to-end automation. This upgrade improved security, reliability, speed, and scale. The system now offers faster onboarding and secure APIs, giving more financial institutions safe access. It processes about $1 trillion in transactions every day, and in its first five months up to today, it has handled 22.5 million transactions worth $110 trillion. For people, that means big payments like buying a home go through quickly and safely. This modernization strengthens a national platform, reducing risk and creating a trusted foundation for innovation. Now the system is ready for what's next, even the potential for the market adopting AI-driven payment services. Now let's take a horizontal lens across industries with security. Security is essential to a digital core, which is reflected in our 16% growth for the year. We're seeing increased demand for advanced cyber protection and more integrated intelligent security solutions that can fully harness AI's potential and keep pace with emerging threats. To further strengthen our position, in the past quarter, we agreed to acquire CyberCX, our largest cybersecurity acquisition to date, which helps us in geographic expansion, bringing approximately 1,400 specialists in APAC and also bringing AI-powered security platforms which are applicable globally. We also acquired IAM Concepts, a Canadian identity security specialist serving critical infrastructure, expanding the depth and regional reach of our managed security and identity capabilities that underpin secure AI adoption. Now let's look through the lens of our unique industry, functional process, and talent and org capabilities. These, coupled with our technology expertise, are making a difference to our clients. These next two examples also demonstrate the pattern we're seeing in expanding our relationships due to advanced AI. Ecolab, a global sustainability leader, has been a client for 15 years. Three years ago, we partnered with Ecolab to lay the foundation for their growth transformation. One Ecolab, bringing the company together as one team to better serve customers, drive cross-sell and upsell, and improve operational efficiency. A year into that journey, we started working with Ecolab and its leadership to accelerate value with AI. Instead of executing one-off use cases, we redesigned the entire lead-to-cash process, the steps from generating a lead to collecting payment using nine scaled Agentic AI agents. These agents clean core data, resolve billing errors, and automatically match customer payments to the right billing invoices. In cash application alone, work that used to be 100% manual is now about 60% automated, reducing errors and speeding up processes. By using AI to streamline operations, Ecolab is on a path to deliver an estimated 5% to 7% sales growth and 20% operating income margin without increasing costs at the same pace. Big picture, it supports the company's mission to deliver water, hygiene, and infection prevention solutions to more customers worldwide. We're partnering with a leading energy company, which has been a client for nearly two decades, to reinvent field operations with cloud, data, and Gen AI. The challenge was scale, safety, cost, and sustainability, running thousands of wells with fragmented data and a leaner field workforce. We unified data from more than 25 legacy systems into a single cloud-based digital core. On top of that, we built AI-powered scaled digital twins that monitor, optimize, and control the field in real time using our Accenture Industrial Intelligence Suite solution. That live view speeds decisions and improves safety, often without sending a technician on site, while emissions are continuously monitored for compliance. This solution is expected to reduce lost production by up to 2% to 4%, increase productivity by up to 28%, and decrease costs by up to 22%. Field exposure and unplanned visits are also reduced, and emissions are expected to be lower. People can now focus on higher-value work, and the business can respond faster to a changing energy landscape. Our scaled examples set the North Star. Here's an example of how our clients are starting to work with us for broader AI adoption across multiple areas to enable their business strategy. We've partnered with UOB, a leading bank in ASEAN, for nearly two decades on various initiatives, including multi-country application services rollouts to omnichannel enhancement. Today, we're helping them scale Gen AI and use agentic AI to transform customer experience and core operations. Using our AI refinery platform, we're supporting them in powering high-value use cases in customer engagement, risk management, and workforce enablement. This transformation enables faster, more personalized service, strengthens decision-making with predictive insights, accelerates response times, and enhances operational resilience. Together, we're positioning UOB to lead and create sustainable impact in the financial services industry. Now, an important part of our growth strategy is to be relevant to the core of our clients' industries, such as digital manufacturing, and to be relevant to their growth agenda. Industry X grew 10% and Song grew 8% in FY25. Both follow a similar pattern of needing a strong digital core and reinvention. The digitization of digital manufacturing and engineering and the use of AI and data to reinvent customer experience is still in the early days. We're seeing strong demand across both areas and continue to invest both organically and inorganically. For example, we recently acquired Momentum ABM in the United Kingdom and SuperDigital in the U.S., extending our edge in B2B and social and influencer marketing. Over to you, Angie. Angie Park: Thanks, Julie. Now let me turn to our business outlook. For the first quarter of fiscal 2026, we expect revenues to be in the range of $18.1 billion to $18.75 billion. This assumes the impact of FX will be approximately positive 1% compared to the first quarter of fiscal 2025. Our Q1 guidance reflects an estimated 1% to 5% growth, including about a 1.5% impact from our federal business, with AFS contracting mid-teens. For the full fiscal year 2026, based upon how the rates have been trending over the last few weeks, we currently assume the impact of FX on our results in U.S. dollars will be approximately positive 2% compared to fiscal 2025. For the full fiscal 2026, we expect revenue to be in the range of 2% to 5% growth in local currency over fiscal 2025, including an estimated 1% to 1.5% impact from our federal business. Excluding the impact of federal, our revenue is expected to be an estimated 3% to 6%. This year, we expect an inorganic contribution of about 1.5%, and we expect to invest about $3 billion in acquisitions this fiscal year. For adjusted operating margin, we expect fiscal year 2026 to be 15.7% to 15.9%, a 10 to 30 basis point expansion over adjusted fiscal 2025 results. We expect our annual adjusted tax rate, effective tax rate, to be in the range of 23.5% to 25.5%. This compares to an adjusted effective tax rate of 23.6% in fiscal 2025. We expect our full-year adjusted diluted earnings per share for fiscal 2026 to be in the range of $13.52 to $13.90, or 5% to 8% growth over adjusted fiscal 2025 results. For the full fiscal 2026, we expect operating cash flow to be in the range of $10.8 billion to $11.5 billion, property and equipment additions to be approximately $1 billion, and free cash flow to be in the range of $9.8 billion to $10.5 billion. Our free cash flow guidance reflects a very strong free cash flow to net income ratio of 1.2. We expect to return at least $9.3 billion through dividends and share repurchases, an increase of $1 billion, or 12% from fiscal 2025. Our board of directors declared a quarterly cash dividend of $1.63 per share to be paid on November 14, a 10% increase over last year, and approved $5 billion of additional share repurchase authority. We remain committed to returning a substantial portion of our cash generated to shareholders. With that, let's open it up so we can take your questions. Alexia. Alexia Quadrani: Thanks, Angie. I would ask that you each keep to one question and a follow-up to allow as many participants as possible to ask a question. Operator, would you please provide instructions for those on the call? Operator: Absolutely. To ask a question, you may press star then one on your telephone keypad. If you are using a speakerphone, we ask that you please pick up your handset before pressing the keys. If at any time your question has been addressed and you'd like to withdraw your question, please press star then two. Today's first question comes from Tien-Tsin Huang with JPMorgan. Please go ahead. Tien-Tsin Huang: I think it's a good presentation here. My first question I'll ask on visibility on revenue growth, if that's OK. Just love to hear your thoughts on visibility compared to the last couple of years, given the backlog, which is quite big with large deals. You have the pipeline, of course, and then what you're seeing on discretionary spending, given the economic backdrop as you see it. Angie Park: Great. Hi, Tien-Tsin. Good morning. Let me start with that. As we look at FY2026, we feel really good about our positioning. As you said, you saw our strong bookings of $80.6 billion in FY2025. That positions us for FY2026. We can see our backlog from the large deals. If you look at our pipeline, and looking at our pipeline, it's solid overall, and we see strong demand for our large transformation deals. From a discretionary perspective, what we've assumed is at the top end of the range, there's no change in discretionary spend, while at the bottom of the range, it allows for deterioration. By the way, as you think about our guidance of 2% to 5%, excluding AFS, we're at 3% to 6% for the year. Tien-Tsin Huang: OK. Thanks for that, Angie. Julie, I like your AI remarks. Can you dig us? I'd like to want to dig in a little bit more, if you don't mind. Just give us your latest thoughts on AI-driven productivity and those gains and how they might unfold. I get that question quite a bit from investors. Do you see potential deflationary effects? How might that impact Accenture services, both positively and negatively? Thanks. Julie Sweet: Great. Thanks, Tien-Tsin. We do not see AI as deflationary. We do see and are seeing it as expansionary, similar to every tech evolution we've been through. The move from analog to digital, from on-prem to cloud and SaaS, and as many of you who've been with us over the course of the years have known, in every successive tech evolution, we've become stronger. If you look at AI, we see the same thing. Yes, AI absolutely boosts efficiency in areas like coding or operations. Those savings do not disappear. They're being reinvested into new priorities. The list of what our clients want to do with technology is truly virtually unlimited. When we can save them money by delivering our services with advanced AI, that frees up their budget to do the next things on their list. That's what they're doing. They're always going to those next priorities, and we're best positioned then to help them. That is how we delivered our 7% growth last year. Two years in, we're seeing the pattern for how that journey to advanced AI is expanding our business. By the way, I will add that one of the most consistent things that I'm telling CEOs today is that their AI strategy has to focus on both growth and productivity. Almost every CEO that I've talked to says they've pivoted way too far toward productivity and not enough to growth, which, of course, we are helping them with things like Song. We give that advice really from our own experience in how we have successfully grown through every tech evolution, embracing the productivity on one side and then capturing the opportunity it creates on the other side by helping our clients. Operator: Thank you. Our next question today comes from Dave Koning with Baird. Please go ahead. Dave Koning: Yeah. Hey, guys. Great job and great to see Gen AI bookings reaccelerate. A question, I guess, a little like Tien-Tsin's question. Just wanted to ask about the balance between Gen AI and managed services. You do a ton of managed services work. You get to know client operations really well. You can probably go in and recommend Gen AI work and gain a lot of share there, but then maybe displace some managed services. How does that really balance between consulting and managed services over time? Does the net of it all push revenue and margins higher? Angie Park: Sure. First, let me just kind of ground you in how we're thinking about consulting and managed services in FY26, just so we all have the facts of how we're thinking about it in FY26. I'll give you some more color on how we see those things actually work in the market. Angie, you want to just ground them in the FY26 piece? Angie Park: Hi, David. Good morning. For our guidance for FY26, both consulting and managed services are balanced. We see both of them in the low to mid-single-digit range. That's the context. Julie Sweet: Yeah. As you know, how it's actually worked out on the ground is that as you think about enterprise-wide strategies, a lot of times what we're talking to our clients about is where do you invest and build proprietary capabilities, where do you want to buy capabilities, and where are you best situated to go faster because you're partnering and buying them through a managed service like Accenture. What we're seeing a lot of is, for example, companies that are really behind, they're not as far along in their tech journey. They need managed services because they simply can't go fast enough. It's not just a cost play. They want the cost takeout, but they want to use everything we've invested in our platforms to get them to the advanced AI. Similarly, in the core operations, things like digital manufacturing and supply chain, we're developing more and more managed services there in order to allow them to go faster. We see this kind of continuing to develop as we have over the last several years, where managed services have become very strategic. They're not just a cost play. The more we can save them money in the way that we deliver, using advanced AI, that allows them to then reinvest into the business. Very similar patterns, managed services really for the last five or six years have become a very important part to the strategy of companies and how to use advanced technology, now it's advanced AI, faster. Dave Koning: Great. No, that's super helpful. Maybe just quick follow-up. Are you expecting a similar Q4 headwind through the first three quarters of this year and then anniversary it in Q4, and then going forward, maybe not having much impact at all? Is that kind of how you're modeling it? Angie Park: That's exactly right. We expect it to anniversary at the end of Q3. Dave Koning: Awesome. Thanks, guys. Nice job. Angie Park: Thanks. Operator: Thank you. Our next question today comes from James Faucette with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead. James Faucette: Thank you very much. Appreciate all the incremental color and detail here from everybody. I wanted to ask, we see, at least in the forecast, a little bit of increase in CapEx, et cetera. I'm wondering if you can give us a little bit of detail where that investment is going and how we should expect that to play out further. Angie Park: Sure. On our CapEx, we expect about $1 billion this year, which is about $400 million more than FY2025. This is really about us expanding our real estate and leasehold improvements in certain geographies, certain major markets for us. Julie Sweet: Because we're bringing more people back to the office. James Faucette: Kind of what I suspected. You mentioned, and we saw the reacceleration in Gen AI and bookings, et cetera. How is the pricing of those projects evolving? Has the velocity of projects transitioning from proof of concept to production changed at all? Angie Park: Let me just start on the pricing. For our Gen AI projects and the pure Gen AI that we were, or advanced AI that we've been talking about, we do see pricing that is accretive overall to Accenture's average. Julie Sweet: Yeah. In terms of acceleration, in terms of kind of moving from proof of concept to production, we're seeing more and more now move into production because we're helping them with the proof of concept, and then we're helping them scale. You also are just continuously seeing companies that weren't as fast out of the block now starting proof of concept. It really is a cycle that many companies are going to go through. You have leaders who are way ahead. We have other companies that are just getting started. What I would say is, rather than a reacceleration or deceleration, these things are going to be like everything. They're going to be lumpy, in terms of it. What we really look at is the overall trend of how much growth that we are getting and our share of this new spend. Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from Jamie Friedman with Susquehanna. Please go ahead. Jamie Friedman: Hi. Good morning. I too appreciate your prepared remarks. Really thought-provoking. I wanted to ask, Julie, about the way you're defining advanced AI. I think if the transcript's right, you say Gen AI, agentic AI, and physical AI. I'm actually asking about why you're saying you're not including data because we've sort of been trained that data is foundational. Why is the data component not in the definition of advanced AI? Julie Sweet: Because what we're trying to share with you is how we're taking spend in a new market. By the way, data is absolutely critical. In fact, one out of every two projects in Gen AI, Agentic AI, physical AI has significant data pull-through. Our data business is on fire, right? This is an absolutely critical area. Companies are just getting started. It's nascent in many places. It's part of the digital core that we're building. It's just that to date, we've wanted to share with all of you transparently the really new area. Data is part of the digital core that's growing. We've shared with you that 60% of our revenue is from the ecosystem partners, including the data. Look, going forward, now that advanced AI is, in fact, in all of the work, because it's either actual work or we're getting ready for the work, we'll think about how to share that. Just to date, since this started for all of us, like really from negligible revenue, we wanted to share how we've been specifically accelerating in the new area of spend. Jamie Friedman: Got it. Thank you. Going further, will you say that every new wave of technology has a time where you have to train and retool, and your core competence is to do that at scale? I'm just wondering, relative to prior technology, and you alluded to some of this in prior architectures, how do you think about that requirement, which you have tremendous mindshare at, which is to do technology at scale? How do you think about this relative to some of the previous technological evolutions? Thank you. Julie Sweet: It's going faster. There is so much demand, and the technology is moving faster. The more advanced skills and the new types of skills are coming faster. That's why we're being very decisive, right? Upfront, we said you've got to start training everyone in the new skills. We're now saying we've got to move faster to that. Also, remember that when we went into this, we'd already trained about 500,000 of our people on classical AI because going back to FY2019, we said the next decade would be about cloud, data, and AI. We start with a very strong base. This is definitely moving faster than prior technology evolutions in terms of how fast the demand is coming and the importance of us really winning the talent rotation. Operator: Thank you. Our next question today comes from Bryan Bergin with TD Cowen. Please go ahead. Bryan Bergin: Hey, good morning. Thanks for the added detail in the slides here. My first question on Gen AI impact. Can you speak about client behavior in seeking to use Gen AI and agentic solutions more themselves? You mentioned the efficiencies from the tech in areas like software development. I'm curious if you're seeing more clients seeking to then benefit to do that more themselves versus with third parties. I'm also curious if you've seen clients that thought they could do it themselves 6 to 12 months ago and then realize they do need help and they return to you. Julie Sweet: Yes. In fact, especially early on, because Gen AI seemed so simple, right? The reality is it's not the technology that is the biggest barrier. It is actually being able to get the mindset reorganized around how best to use it, the ability to do the change management, the process reinvention. If you think about your average company, their core competencies inside are not things like end-to-end process reinvention, right? You're hard-pressed to find a CEO that doesn't say, "I feel like my organization is too siloed. I feel like we don't have the right way of managing our data." We've had lots of clients who have started things on their own and then come to us who've got good proofs of concept that their team was able to do, but then just can't scale it. I'm doing right now, like just in the next few weeks, I'm personally leading a few different workshops with the entire C-suites of companies where the focus is, share with us how do we actually scale it and what can we really do now, right? As we're a couple of years into this, we have a number of solutions which we're now doing repeatedly within industries and across industries. Our clients are looking for us to share that success so that they can start, stop just having their own team saying, "Well, I have this idea, this idea," and saying, "How can we actually get scale now?" Bryan Bergin: OK. Thank you. That's helpful. A follow-up on the business optimization program. Can you talk about the assumed savings you expect to achieve from this optimization program and how it may help you evolve your operations? I'm specifically curious if you see that kind of combined with Gen AI adoption internally allowing you to operate at a sustainably higher utilization as that did take up this quarter. Julie Sweet: Hi, Brian. I think that for overall, we expect savings of over $1 billion from our business optimization program, which we expect that we will reinvest in our business and in our people because it's so important for our future growth. We expect to reinvest that while still delivering modest margin expansion. Julie Sweet: Yeah. In terms of the connection, just making sure this particular, these moves are primarily due to our talent strategy. The other piece was an exit of a couple of non-strategic acquisitions. On the talent strategy, it's more around, our number one strategy is upskilling. Given the skills we need, and we've had a lot of experience in upskilling, we're trying to, in a very compressed talent timeline where we don't have a viable path for skilling, sort of exiting people so we can get more of the skills in we need. That's really not related to the utilization piece in terms of it ticking up to 93%. We think it'll stay in the zone, in the low 90s to that, and it'll fluctuate a little bit. To your point around what can we do long term, we are continuously looking at, as the technology matures, our new structure around reinvention services. We'll look to see, are there ways that we can use the technology to deliver our services and operate Accenture in its core better? That's one of the reasons why we have the new reinvention services to really simplify how we're operating because that makes it much easier to start to use this AI. More to come as we fully roll out that model and identify new opportunities. Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from Darrin Peller of Wolfe Research. Please go ahead. Darrin Peller: Hey, guys. Thanks. It's good to hear from what it sounds like the pace of procurement change has calmed down a bit from the government side, such that you can forecast those. I guess, number one, just to verify that's right, you feel more confident around forecasting on it. There's a lot of policy changes. Just want to touch on a couple and ask you your thoughts lately. Number one, now that we have a little more clarity on tariffs, do you see more capital investment, especially in areas like products? Number two, maybe you could just comment on H-1B changes or potential changes. What are your thoughts around either wages or the pace of hiring of H-1Bs going forward and how it may or may not impact the business? Just a quick one on health care and the big beautiful bill, if any impact you're seeing there. Thanks, guys. Julie Sweet: Great. Thanks. Just quickly on federal, we do see procurement is now starting to pick up, although it's still slower than it has been in the past. The demand in federal is very much around modernization, consolidation, efficiency. Tech is at the center, so lots of demand around ERP and platforms. Our position with the ecosystem is really key here and our strategy to expand that partnership. Those partnerships are also important. We're really pleased with our new partnership with Palantir, which is really playing a critical role in federal. We feel good about where we are in federal and are relevant to the administration's agenda. That's what we're really focused on, being relevant to our clients. That's federal. On capital investment, I would say it's still a little early, right? Obviously, you've seen the improvement with the cut in interest rates. We're a global company, so there's a lot of stuff going on around the world. I think it's just a little bit too early to call yet how much this is going to open up on the capital investment. Of course, we're growing very significantly and taking advantage of the investments that are already happening, as you saw in our capital projects business. On H-1B visas, for us, this is really a non-issue because we only have about 5% of our people in the U.S. on H-1B visas, and they're for really specialized experience and skills for our clients. Not something that is really a big impact on Accenture. Whether it's health care or a lot of the different policy changes, remember, our business thrives by helping our clients navigate change, right? What we're seeing is that every time there's big policy changes, and this has been true for decades, that's why in our business, we have industry expertise. We have the functional expertise. When you have new compliance rules, et cetera, that usually drives more business for us. At this point, we see an opportunity to really stay close to our clients and help them navigate and take advantage and comply with new policy changes. That's true in health care, and it's really true across the board. Angie Park: Thank you. Operator, we have time for one more question, and then Julie will wrap up the call. Operator: Absolutely. Our final question comes from Jim Schneider at Goldman Sachs. Please go ahead. Jim Schneider: Good morning. Thanks for taking my question. Julie, I just wonder if you could follow on your comment that you expect headcount to grow during the course of the fiscal year across all regions. Can you maybe kind of frame for us the magnitude of that and the timing for it, given the context of some of the other business optimization actions you're seeing? Where would you expect headcount growth to land exiting the year, perhaps? Angie Park: I'll take that. Hey, Jim. Good morning. What I would tell you is, look, we expect it to grow across all markets. We don't have a specific number that we're giving you, but based upon the demand that we see, we expect our headcount to grow. Jim Schneider: Great. As a follow-up on that, if you could maybe talk about the net impact of AI you're using internally to optimize your own work, your own business, utilization. I think you mentioned earlier, 93%. That's basically hitting a new record. When would we expect to see that either reflected in even higher utilization or potentially gross margins, even though we know you don't manage directly to that? Julie Sweet: Yeah. Remember, right now, our utilization is really a reflection of the kind of momentum in demand that we're seeing. You saw the bookings, right? Our utilization, we would expect to continue to move around in the low 90%, so we don't have a structural change in utilization due to AI. We are already embedding AI, particularly in our big platforms like Gen AI, to drive efficiencies, and that's reflected in both our bookings and in our guide for the year. We're going to continue to be the leaders because that is what works, right? As you lead yourself, we're able to take that to our clients. We're able to show them how we're doing it and then help them do it in their business. That's kind of how it's developing. Operator: Thank you. As we close the question and answer session, I'd like to turn the conference back over to Julie Sweet for closing remarks. Julie Sweet: Terrific. Thanks again, everyone, for joining. In closing, I just want to thank all of our shareholders for your continued trust and support. We are working every day to earn your trust. A huge thank you to all of our reinventors because you are why we are able to deliver these results. Thanks again. Operator: Thank you. Today's conference has now concluded, and we thank you all for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect your lines and have a wonderful day.